JP2020081592A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine performing an appropriate control on corresponding relationship between decorative identification information and specific identification information.SOLUTION: In a low probability/non-KT state (normal state), while a variable display of a first special symbol that is a main symbol and a variable display of a second special symbol that is a sub symbol are parallelly being performed, if a displayed result of the variable display of the second special symbol that is not corresponding to decorative symbols becomes a "big win", an occurrence of the big win is notified by displaying characters of "FEVER" without performing a presentation of stopping and displaying a combination of the decorative symbols that becomes the big win.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 10-14

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine capable of playing a game.

As a game machine, a game ball, which is a game medium, is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when a game ball wins a prize area such as a winning opening provided in the game area, a predetermined prize value is given to the player. There is one configured in. Further, a variable display means capable of variably displaying identification information (also referred to as "fluctuation") is provided, and when the display result of the variable display of the identification information is the specific display result, a predetermined game value is given. There is one configured to give the player (so-called pachinko machine).

The prize value is to pay out the prize balls or give points or prizes according to the winning of the game balls in the prize area. In addition, the game value is that the state of the variable winning ball device provided in the game area of the gaming machine becomes advantageous for the player who easily hits the ball when the specific display result is obtained, and for the player. That is, the right to generate an advantageous state is generated, and the condition for paying out prize balls is easily established.

In the pachinko gaming machine, as a display result of the variable display of the special symbol (identification information) which is started in the variable display means based on the fact that the game ball has won the starting winning opening, a predetermined specific display mode is derived and displayed. When it is done, "big hit (advantageous state)" occurs. The derivation display is to stop and display the symbol. When a big hit occurs, for example, the big winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times, and a big hit game state where a hit ball is easy to win is entered. Then, in each opening period, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning holes are won, the winning holes are closed. The number of times the special winning opening is opened is fixed to a predetermined number (for example, 16 rounds). It should be noted that the opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is determined for each opening, and even if the number of winnings does not reach the predetermined number, the special winning opening is closed when the opening time elapses. Hereinafter, the opening period of each special winning opening may be referred to as a round.

As such a gaming machine, as shown in Patent Document 1, two special symbols (specific identification information) are variably displayed at the same time, while the decoration identification information corresponding to one special symbol is variably displayed, the other special symbol. When the variable display result of is a big hit, the special symbol corresponding to the decoration identification information is switched from one special symbol to the other special symbol, and the big hit symbol is a variable display result of the decoration identification information corresponding to the other special symbol. Displayed gaming machines have been proposed.

Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-138737 (FIG. 65)

As shown in Patent Document 1, when two pieces of specific identification information are variably displayed at the same time, the specific identification information corresponding to the decoration identification information is switched from one specific identification information to the other specific identification information. When the configuration is applied, it is unclear which display result of the decoration identification information corresponds to the display result of which specific identification information, and the player may mistakenly recognize it. Appropriate control of correspondence is required.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that appropriately controls the correspondence relationship between decoration identification information and specific identification information.

The gaming machine of means C1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player,
Variable display of the first specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol) and variable display of the second specific identification information (variable display of the second special symbol) can be executed in parallel with specific identification information variable display means ( A game control microcomputer 100),
Depending on the gaming state (non-KT state, KT state), the variable display of the first specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol) and the variable display of the second specific identification information (variable display of the second special symbol) A decoration identification information variable display means (production control CPU 120) capable of performing a variable display of decoration identification information (variable display of a decorative pattern) corresponding to either one of them.
Of the variable display of the first specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol) and the variable display of the second specific identification information (variable display of the second special symbol), the variable display of the decoration identification information (variable display of the decorative symbol) When the advantageous state (big hit game state) is controlled based on the variable display of the specific identification information corresponding to (), as shown in (A1) to (A4) in FIG. When the display result of the variable display of the special symbol is "big hit"), a notification effect for notifying the variable display result of the decoration identification information (as shown in FIG. 10-14 (A4), a combination of decorative symbols that is a big hit) (In this example, an effect for stopping and displaying “222”) and a notification effect execution means (CPU 120 for effect control),
Of the variable display of the first specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol) and the variable display of the second specific identification information (variable display of the second special symbol), the specific identification information that does not correspond to the variable display of the decoration identification information. When it is controlled to the advantageous state based on the variable display ((B1) to (B4) in FIG. 10-14, the display result of the variable display of the second special symbol that does not correspond to the decorative symbol is "big hit". 10), the notification effect is not executed (as shown in FIG. 10-14 (B1), the effect of stopping and displaying the combination of the decorative patterns that is a big hit is not executed, and the characters “FEVER” are displayed. The big hit is reported by displaying it.)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, when the advantageous state is controlled based on the variable display of the specific identification information that does not correspond to the decoration identification information, by not performing the notification effect, based on the variable display of any specific identification information. It is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing whether the player has controlled to the advantageous state.

The game machine of means C2 is
A gaming machine of means C1,
Of the variable display of the first specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol) and the variable display of the second specific identification information (variable display of the second special symbol), the specific identification information corresponding to the variable display of the decoration identification information When it is controlled to the advantageous state based on the variable display of (No. 10-14 (A1) ~ (A4), the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol is "big hit" A movable body that uses a movable body (a movable body motion production that moves the movable body 06TM100 from the tilted position to the standing position as shown in FIG. 10-14 (A3)). The production execution means (production control CPU 120) is provided,
Of the variable display of the first specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol) and the variable display of the second specific identification information (variable display of the second special symbol), the specific identification information that does not correspond to the variable display of the decoration identification information. When it is controlled to the advantageous state based on the variable display ((B1) to (B4) in FIG. 10-14, the display result of the variable display of the second special symbol that does not correspond to the decorative symbol is "big hit". The moving body effect is not executed (as shown in FIGS. 10-14 (B3) and (B4), the moving body motion effect is not executed).
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, since the movable body effect is executed at an irregular timing that is not expected by the player who is paying attention to the variable display of the decoration identification information, the movable state that is controlled to be in the advantageous state is highly movable. Prevents a decrease in the entertainment of body production.

The gaming machine of means C3 is
A gaming machine of means C1 or means C2,
The first start condition is satisfied after the first start condition is satisfied (start prize is generated in the winning ball device 6A) (as shown in FIG. 10-3, in the first special symbol normal process, the second special symbol is included). Variable display of the first specific identification information (first special symbol) based on that neither the big hit game state or the small hit game state based on the variable display result is controlled and the first number of reserved memories is not 0) (Variation display)
The second start condition is satisfied after the second start condition is satisfied (start prize is generated in the variable winning ball device 6B) (as shown in FIG. 10-4, in the second special symbol normal process, the second special symbol). Variable of the second specific identification information (second special symbol) based on the fact that it is not controlled in either the big hit game state or the small hit game state based on the variable display result, and the second number of reserved memories is not 0) Display (variable display),
It is possible to control to a special state (small hit game state) different from the advantageous state (big hit game state),
The first start condition and the second start condition cannot be satisfied when being controlled to the advantageous state (big hit game state) (as shown in FIG. 10-3, in the first special symbol normal process, It is controlled to the big hit game state based on the variable display result of 2 special symbols (YES in step S06TM1000A), and as shown in FIG. Based on the big hit game state based (YES in step S06TM1000B),
The first start condition and the second start condition cannot be satisfied when being controlled to the special state (small hit game state) (as shown in FIG. 10-3, in the first special symbol normal process, When the small hit game state based on the variable display result of the second special symbol is controlled (YES in step S06TM1000A), the variable display of the first special symbol is not started, and as shown in FIG. 10-4, In the 2 special symbol normal process, when the small hit game state based on the variable display result of the first special symbol is controlled (YES in step S06TM1000B), the variable display of the second special symbol is not started)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, since the start condition cannot be satisfied while being controlled to the advantageous state, the player can concentrate on the game in the advantageous state. In addition, since the start condition cannot be satisfied while being controlled to the special state, the player can concentrate on the game in the advantageous state.

The gaming machine of means C4 is
A gaming machine of means C3,
A gaming machine characterized by being able to be controlled to a special state (KT state) that is frequently controlled to the special state (small hit game state).
With such a configuration, it is possible to realize a gaming state that is different from the advantageous state as the advantageous game state for the player.

The gaming machine of means C5 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means C1 to means C4,
Regardless of the gaming state, the variable display of the first special identification information having a lower visibility than the decoration identification information (decorative pattern) is performed corresponding to the variable display of the first specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol). Possible (variable display of the first small symbol corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol can be executed), and decoration identification corresponding to the variable display of the second specific identification information (variable display of the second special symbol) It is possible to execute the variable display of the second special identification information whose visibility is lower than the information (decorative pattern) (the variable display of the second small symbol can be executed corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol). And the gaming machine.
With such a configuration, the player can recognize the variable display status of the specific identification information by checking the variable display status of the special identification information.

The gaming machine of means C6 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means C1 to means C5,
A game control section (main board 11) having the specific identification information variable display means (game control microcomputer 100);
When the decoration identification information variable display means (effect control CPU 120) and the decoration identification information variable display (variable display of decoration pattern) are not executed, special effects (first demo display, second demo display) are executed. And a production control unit (production control board 12) having possible special production execution means (production control CPU 120),
In the specific identification information variable display means (game control microcomputer 100), the first start condition is satisfied after the first start condition is satisfied (start prize is generated in the winning ball device 6A) (see FIG. 10-3). As shown, in the first special symbol normal processing, neither the big hit game state or the small hit game state based on the variable display result of the second special symbol is controlled and the first reserved memory number is not 0) The variable display of the first specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed based on, and the second start condition is satisfied (the start prize is generated in the variable winning ball device 6B). Established (as shown in FIG. 10-4, in the second special symbol normal processing, is not controlled to both the big hit game state and the small hit game state based on the variable display result of the first special symbol and the second Variable display of the second specific identification information (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed based on that the number of reserved memories is not 0),
The game control unit (main board 11) does not satisfy the first start condition (a start winning for the winning ball apparatus 6A has not occurred) and the variable display of the first specific identification information is executed. Not corresponding (variable display of the first special symbol is not executed) and the first special command (first customer waiting demo display designation command) and the second starting condition are not satisfied (variable winning a prize) The second special command corresponding to the fact that the start winning to the ball device 6B has not occurred) and the variable display of the second specific identification information has not been executed (the variable display of the first special symbol has not been executed). And (the second customer waiting demo display designation command) can be sent,
The effect control unit (effect control board 12) can execute the first special effect by the special effect executing means in response to the first game state when the first special command is received (FIG. 9). As shown in −38, when the production control CPU 120 receives the first customer waiting demo display designation command (YES in step 026IWS4701), based on the non-KT state (YES in step 026IWS4702), 1 demo display is started (step 026IWS4711), and when the second special command is received, the second special effect can be executed by the special effect executing means according to the second game state (FIG. 9). As shown in −39, when the production control CPU 120 receives the second customer waiting demonstration display designation command (YES in step 026IWS4801), based on the KT state (YES in step 026IWS4802), the second Start demo display (step 026IWS4811))
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the special effect can be started only when the command corresponding to the current game state is received, and the special effect can be started at an appropriate timing according to the game state. .

The game machine of means C7 is
A gaming machine of means C6,
While the first special effect (first demo display) is being executed, the start condition corresponding to the first specific identification information (first special symbol) is satisfied (as shown in FIG. 10-3, the first In the special symbol normal processing, the big hit game state and the small hit game state based on the variable display result of the second special symbol are not controlled and the first reserved memory number is not 0), in response to the first The special effect is ended (as shown in FIG. 9-38, when the variable display of the first special symbol is started (YES in step 026IWS4714), the first demo display is ended (step 026IWS4716)),
While the second special effect (second demo display) is being executed, the start condition corresponding to the second specific identification information (second special symbol) is satisfied (as shown in FIG. 10-4, the second In the special symbol normal processing, neither the big hit game state or the small hit game state based on the variable display result of the first special symbol is controlled, and the second reserved memory number is not 0), according to the second. The special effect is ended (as shown in FIG. 9-39, when the variable display of the second special symbol is started (YES in step 026IWS4814), the second demonstration display is made (step 026IWS4816)).
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to realize appropriate effect control corresponding to the execution state of the variable display of the specific identification information.

The gaming machine of means C8 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from the means C1 to means C7,
In the specific identification information variable display means (game control microcomputer 100), the first start condition is satisfied after the first start condition is satisfied (start prize is generated in the winning ball device 6A) (see FIG. 10-3). As shown, in the first special symbol normal processing, neither the big hit game state or the small hit game state based on the variable display result of the second special symbol is controlled and the first reserved memory number is not 0) The variable display of the first specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed based on, and the second start condition is satisfied (the start prize is generated in the variable winning ball device 6B). Established (as shown in FIG. 10-4, in the second special symbol normal processing, is not controlled to both the big hit game state and the small hit game state based on the variable display result of the first special symbol and the second Variable display of the second specific identification information (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed based on that the number of reserved memories is not 0),
During execution of the special effect (first demonstration display), when the first start condition can be satisfied, the first start condition is satisfied (the start winning is generated in the winning ball device 6A). It is possible to display, in the first mode, the number of pending storages corresponding to the establishment of one start condition (when the first number of pending storages is 4, as shown in FIG. 10A, 4 is displayed in the first pending display area 06TM011. It is possible to display the 1st hold display 06TM010),
During execution of the special effect (first demonstration display), the first start condition cannot be satisfied (as shown in FIG. 10-3, in the first special symbol normal processing, in the variable display result of the second special symbol When the big hit game state or the small hit game state based on it is controlled), in response to the establishment of the first starting condition (the occurrence of the starting winning prize for the winning ball apparatus 6A), the establishment of the first starting condition is dealt with. The number of reserved storages can be displayed in a second mode having lower visibility than the first mode (as shown in FIG. 10-6, when the first number of reserved storages is 1, the first number of reserved storages is special. "1" can be displayed in the display area 06TM015),
During execution of the special effect (second demo display), when the second start condition can be satisfied, the second start condition is satisfied (start win is generated in the variable winning ball device 6B). It is possible to display the number of reserved memories corresponding to the establishment of the second start condition in the first mode (as shown in FIG. 10-1, when the number of second reserved memories is 4, the second reserved display area 06TM021 is displayed. It is possible to display four second hold indications 06TM020),
During execution of the special effect (second demo display), the second start condition cannot be satisfied (as shown in FIG. 10-4, in the second special symbol normal process, in the variable display result of the first special symbol When it is controlled to the big hit game state or the small hit game state based on), it corresponds to the establishment of the second start condition in response to the establishment of the second start condition (the occurrence of the start prize for the variable winning ball device 6B). The retained storage number can be displayed in the second mode, which has lower visibility than the first mode (when the second reserved memory number is 0, as shown in FIG. 10-6, the second reserved memory number). "0" can be displayed in the special display area 06TM025)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the number of pending storages can be appropriately notified by displaying the number of pending storages in the second mode, which has lower visibility than the first mode.

The game machine of means C9 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means C1 to means C8,
Variable display of the first specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol) and variable display of the second specific identification information (variable display of the second special symbol) During variable display of the specific identification information (first During the variable display of the special symbol), different from the advantageous state (big hit game state) based on the variable display result of the other specific identification information (the variable display result of the second special symbol is "small hit") When controlled to a special state (small hitting game state), variable display interruption means (game control microcomputer 100) for interrupting variable display of one specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol),
An end effect (an effect that is executed in response to the reception of a small hit end designation command, for example, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (A4), when the special state (small hit game state) ends. After the special variable winning ball device 17 is closed, an end effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a character and an effect of displaying a character of “30pt GET!” on the image display device 5 is provided.
The non-special state (first KT state) is shown in the end effect (FIG. 10-12 (B3)) rather than the special state (second KT state) that is frequently controlled to the special state (small hitting game state). As described above, after closing the opened special variable winning ball device 17, the active display 06TM030 displayed in the active display area 06TM031 of the image display device 5 and the four display areas 06TM021 displayed in the second reserved display area 06TM021. The execution period of the effect of erasing the second hold display 06TM020 is short (as shown in FIG. 10-11(A), in the second KT state, the small hit ending period is 3 seconds, while in FIG. As shown in (B), in the first KT state, the small hit ending period is 0.5 seconds)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, in the non-special state, it is possible to shorten the period for interrupting the variable display of the one specific identification information, corresponding to the variable display situation of one specific effect information and one specific identification information Inconsistency with the production can be suppressed.

As a gaming machine, as shown in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2017-0866690 (FIG. 22), a gaming machine that performs a demo display (special effect) according to the execution status of variable display has been proposed. Further, as shown in JP-A-2015-156952 (paragraph 0050), a gaming machine in which the first special symbol (first specific identification information) and the second special symbol (second specific identification information) are variably displayed simultaneously Proposed. Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2017-0886690 (FIG. 22) is disclosed in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2017-0886690 (FIG. 22) for a game machine capable of concurrently executing variable display of two pieces of specific identification information as described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. When the configuration for executing the described special effect is applied, it is necessary to appropriately perform effect control regarding the special effect. The inventions relating to the means A1 to A9 are made in view of the above situation, and appropriately perform effect control regarding special effects in a gaming machine capable of concurrently performing variable display of two pieces of specific identification information. Especially.

The game machine of means A1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player,
The first start condition is satisfied after the first start condition (start prize is generated in the winning ball device 6A) is satisfied (as shown in FIG. 10-3, in the first special symbol normal process, of the second special symbol). Variable display of the first specific identification information (first special symbol) based on that neither the big hit game state or the small hit game state based on the variable display result is controlled and the first number of reserved memories is not 0) The second start condition is satisfied after the second start condition (start prize is generated in the variable winning ball device 6B) is satisfied while executing (in the second special symbol normal process). , The second specific identification information (second is not controlled in both the big hit game state and the small hit game state based on the variable display result of the first special symbol and the second reserved memory number is not 0) The variable display of the special symbol) is performed, and the variable display of the first specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol) and the variable display of the second specific identification information (variable display of the second special symbol) are performed in parallel. Executable specific identification information variable display means (game control microcomputer 100),
Depending on the gaming state (non-KT state, KT state), the variable display of the first specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol) and the variable display of the second specific identification information (variable display of the second special symbol) A decoration identification information variable display means (production control CPU 120) capable of performing a variable display of decoration identification information (variable display of a decorative pattern) corresponding to either one of them.
Special effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing special effect (first demonstration display, second demonstration display) when variable display of decoration identification information (variable display of decorative pattern) is not executed. Prepare,
During execution of the special effect (first demonstration display, second demonstration display), when the first start condition and the second start condition can be satisfied, which of the first start condition and the second start condition It is possible to end the special effect based on the establishment of one or the other (as shown in FIG. 9-38, when the variable display of the first special symbol is started (YES in step 026IWS4714), 1 demo display ends (step 026IWS4716), and as shown in FIG. 9-39, when the variable display of the second special symbol starts (YES in step 026IWS4814), the second demo display ends (step 026IWS4816). ),
During execution of the special effect (first demonstration display, second demonstration display), the first start condition and the second start condition cannot be satisfied (as shown in FIG. 10-3, first special symbol normal processing In, in the small hit game state is controlled based on the variable display result of the second special symbol (YES in step S06TM1000A), as shown in FIG. 10-4, in the second special symbol normal process, the first special symbol When the small hitting game state is controlled based on the variation display result (YES in step S06TM1000B), regardless of whether or not one of the first starting condition and the second starting condition is satisfied. It is possible to continue the special effect (as shown in FIG. 9-38, the variable display of the first special symbol is not started (NO in step 026IWS4714), and is controlled in the small hitting game state ( (NO in step 026IWS4715), the first demo display is not ended, and as shown in FIG. 9-39, the variable display of the second special symbol is not started (NO in step 026IWS4814), and the small hit game state is controlled. (YES in step 026IWS4815), the second demo display does not end)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to realize appropriate effect control corresponding to the situation of the variable display of the specific identification information.

The game machine of means A2 is
A gaming machine of means A1,
The decoration identification information variable display means (production control CPU 120) corresponds to the variable display of the first specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol) when being controlled to the first gaming state (non-KT state). Then, the variable display of the decorative identification information (variable display of the decorative symbol) can be executed, and the variable display of the second specific identification information (of the second special symbol) when controlled in the second game state (KT state) It is possible to execute variable display of decorative identification information (variable display of decorative patterns) in response to variable display).
When the first game state (non-KT state) is controlled during execution of the special effect (first demonstration display), the first start condition is satisfied when the first start condition can be satisfied. The special effect is ended in response to the establishment (starting winning to the winning ball device 6A) (as shown in FIG. 9-38, when the starting winning to the winning ball device 6A occurs, the first special symbol). Display is started (YES in step 026IWS4714), and the first demo display is ended (step 026IWS4716)), while the special effect is continued when the second starting condition is satisfied (as shown in FIG. 9-38). In, when the start winning to the variable winning ball device 6B occurs, the variable display of the second special symbol is started, but the variable display of the first special symbol is not started (NO in step 026IWS4714), and the jackpot gaming state is set. Since it is not controlled (NO in step 026IWS4715), the first demo display is not completed (step 026IWS4716),
When the second game state (KT state) is controlled during the execution of the special effect (second demo display), the second start condition is satisfied when the second start condition can be satisfied. The special effect is ended according to what is done (as shown in FIG. 9-39, when the start winning is generated in the variable winning ball device 6B, the variable display of the second special symbol is started (YES in step 026IWS4814). , The second demo display ends (step 026IWS4816), while the special effect is continued when the first starting condition is satisfied (as shown in FIG. 9-39, a starting winning for the winning ball device 6A occurs). Then, the variable display of the first special symbol is started, but the variable display of the second special symbol is not started (NO in step 026IWS4814), and is controlled to the KT state (YES in step 026IWS4815), the second. The demo display does not end (step 026IWS4816)),
During execution of the special effect (first demonstration display, second demonstration display), the first start condition and the second start condition cannot be satisfied (as shown in FIG. 10-3, first special symbol normal processing In, the small hit game state based on the variable display result of the second special symbol is controlled (YES in step S06TM1000A), as shown in FIG. 10-4, in the second special symbol normal process, of the first special symbol While being controlled to the small hitting game state based on the variation display result (YES in step S06TM1000B), the special effect is continued regardless of whether the first starting condition is satisfied (see FIG. 9-38). As shown, the variable display of the first special symbol is not started (NO in step 026IWS4714), and because it is controlled to the small hitting gaming state (NO in step 026IWS4715), the first demo display is not ended, and As shown in FIG. 9-39, the variable display of the second special symbol is not started (NO in step 026IWS4814), and is controlled in the small hitting game state (YES in step 026IWS4815), so the second demo display is ended. Do not let), continue the special effect regardless of whether or not the second start condition is satisfied (as shown in FIG. 9-38, when the start winning to the variable winning ball device 6B occurs, the first special symbol No variable display is started (NO in step 026IWS4714), and because the small hitting game state is controlled (NO in step 026IWS4715), the first demo display is not ended, and as shown in FIG. 9-39. , Variable display of the second special symbol is not started (NO in step 026IWS4814), because it is controlled to the small hit game state (YES in step 026IWS4815), the second demo display is not ended)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to realize appropriate effect control corresponding to the situation of the variable display of the specific identification information.

The game machine of means A3,
A gaming machine of means A1 or means A2,
It is possible to control to a special state (small hit game state) different from the advantageous state (big hit game state),
The first start condition and the second start condition cannot be satisfied when being controlled to the advantageous state (big hit game state) (as shown in FIG. 10-3, in the first special symbol normal process, It is controlled to the big hit game state based on the variable display result of 2 special symbols (YES in step S06TM1000A), and as shown in FIG. Based on the big hit game state based (YES in step S06TM1000B),
The first start condition and the second start condition cannot be satisfied when being controlled to the special state (small hit game state) (as shown in FIG. 10-3, in the first special symbol normal process, When the small hit game state based on the variable display result of the second special symbol is controlled (YES in step S06TM1000A), the variable display of the first special symbol is not started, and as shown in FIG. 10-4, In the 2 special symbol normal process, when the small hit game state based on the variable display result of the first special symbol is controlled (YES in step S06TM1000B), the variable display of the second special symbol is not started)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, since the start condition cannot be satisfied while being controlled to the advantageous state, the player can concentrate on the game in the advantageous state. In addition, since the start condition cannot be satisfied while being controlled to the special state, the player can concentrate on the game in the advantageous state.

The game machine of means A4,
A gaming machine of means A3,
A gaming machine characterized by being able to be controlled to a special state (KT state) that is frequently controlled to the special state (small hit game state).
With such a configuration, it is possible to realize a gaming state that is different from the advantageous state as the advantageous game state for the player.

The game machine of means A5 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from the means A1 to A4,
Regardless of the gaming state, the variable display of the first special identification information having a lower visibility than the decoration identification information (decorative pattern) is performed corresponding to the variable display of the first specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol). Possible (variable display of the first small symbol corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol can be executed), and decoration identification corresponding to the variable display of the second specific identification information (variable display of the second special symbol) It is possible to execute the variable display of the second special identification information whose visibility is lower than the information (decorative pattern) (the variable display of the second small symbol can be executed corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol). And the gaming machine.
With such a configuration, the player can recognize the variable display status of the specific identification information by checking the variable display status of the special identification information.

The game machine of means A6 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means A1 to means A5,
A game control section (main board 11) having the specific identification information variable display means (game control microcomputer 100);
An effect control unit (effect control board 12) including the decoration identification information variable display means (effect control CPU 120) and the special effect executing means (effect control CPU 120),
The game control unit (main board 11) does not satisfy the first start condition (a start winning for the winning ball apparatus 6A has not occurred) and the variable display of the first specific identification information is executed. Not corresponding (variable display of the first special symbol is not executed) and the first special command (first customer waiting demo display designation command) and the second starting condition are not satisfied (variable winning a prize) The second special command corresponding to the fact that the start winning to the ball device 6B has not occurred) and the variable display of the second specific identification information has not been executed (the variable display of the first special symbol has not been executed). (2nd customer waiting demo display designation command) can be sent,
The effect control unit (effect control board 12) can execute the first special effect by the special effect executing means in response to the first game state when the first special command is received (FIG. 9). As shown in −38, when the production control CPU 120 receives the first customer waiting demo display designation command (YES in step 026IWS4701), based on the non-KT state (YES in step 026IWS4702), 1 demo display is started (step 026IWS4711), and when the second special command is received, the second special effect can be executed by the special effect executing means according to the second game state (FIG. 9). As shown in −39, when the production control CPU 120 receives the second customer waiting demonstration display designation command (YES in step 026IWS4801), based on the KT state (YES in step 026IWS4802), the second Start demo display (step 026IWS4811))
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the special effect can be started only when the command corresponding to the current game state is received, and the special effect can be started at an appropriate timing according to the game state. .

The game machine of means A7 is
A gaming machine of means A6,
When the first special effect (first demonstration display) is being executed, the first start condition is satisfied (as shown in FIG. 10-3, in the first special symbol normal process, the second special symbol The first special effect is ended (not shown in FIG. 9-38) in response to the fact that neither the big hit game state or the small hit game state based on the variation display result is controlled and the first reserved memory number is not 0). As shown, when the variable display of the first special symbol is started (YES in step 026IWS4714), the first demo display is ended (step 026IWS4716)),
When the second special effect (second demo display) is being executed, the second start condition is satisfied (as shown in FIG. 10-4, in the second special symbol normal process, the first special symbol The second special effect is ended in response to the fact that neither the big hit game state or the small hit game state based on the variation display result is controlled and the second reserved memory number is not 0) (in FIG. 9-39). As shown, when the variable display of the second special symbol is started (YES in step 026IWS4814), the second demo display is displayed (step 026IWS4816)).
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to realize appropriate effect control corresponding to the execution state of the variable display of the specific identification information.

The game machine of means A8,
Any of the gaming machines selected from means A1 to means A7,
During execution of the special effect (first demonstration display), when the first start condition can be satisfied, the first start condition is satisfied (the start winning is generated in the winning ball device 6A). It is possible to display, in the first mode, the number of pending storages corresponding to the establishment of one start condition (when the first number of pending storages is 4, as shown in FIG. 10A, 4 is displayed in the first pending display area 06TM011. It is possible to display the 1st hold display 06TM010),
During execution of the special effect (first demonstration display), the first start condition cannot be satisfied (as shown in FIG. 10-3, in the first special symbol normal processing, in the variable display result of the second special symbol When the big hit game state or the small hit game state based on it is controlled), in response to the establishment of the first starting condition (the occurrence of the starting winning prize for the winning ball apparatus 6A), the establishment of the first starting condition is dealt with. The number of reserved storages can be displayed in a second mode having lower visibility than the first mode (as shown in FIG. 10-6, when the first number of reserved storages is 1, the first number of reserved storages is special. "1" can be displayed in the display area 06TM015),
During execution of the special effect (second demo display), when the second start condition can be satisfied, the second start condition is satisfied (start win is generated in the variable winning ball device 6B). It is possible to display the number of reserved memories corresponding to the establishment of the second start condition in the first mode (as shown in FIG. 10-1, when the number of second reserved memories is 4, the second reserved display area 06TM021 is displayed. It is possible to display four second hold indications 06TM020),
During execution of the special effect (second demo display), the second start condition cannot be satisfied (as shown in FIG. 10-4, in the second special symbol normal process, in the variable display result of the first special symbol When it is controlled to the big hit game state or the small hit game state based on), it corresponds to the establishment of the second start condition in response to the establishment of the second start condition (the occurrence of the start prize for the variable winning ball device 6B). The retained storage number can be displayed in the second mode, which has lower visibility than the first mode (when the second reserved memory number is 0, as shown in FIG. 10-6, the second reserved memory number). "0" can be displayed in the special display area 06TM025)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the number of pending storages can be appropriately notified by displaying the number of pending storages in the second mode, which has lower visibility than the first mode.

The game machine of means A9 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means A1 to means A8,
Variable display of the first specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol) and variable display of the second specific identification information (variable display of the second special symbol) During variable display of the specific identification information (first During the variable display of the special symbol), different from the advantageous state (big hit game state) based on the variable display result of the other specific identification information (the variable display result of the second special symbol is "small hit") When controlled to a special state (small hitting game state), variable display interruption means (game control microcomputer 100) for interrupting variable display of one specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol),
An end effect (an effect that is executed in response to the reception of a small hit end designation command, for example, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (A4), when the special state (small hit game state) ends. After the special variable winning ball device 17 is closed, an end effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a character and an effect of displaying a character of “30pt GET!” on the image display device 5 is provided.
The non-special state (first KT state) is shown in the end effect (FIG. 10-12 (B3)) rather than the special state (second KT state) that is frequently controlled to the special state (small hitting game state). As described above, after closing the opened special variable winning ball device 17, the active display 06TM030 displayed in the active display area 06TM031 of the image display device 5 and the four display areas 06TM021 displayed in the second reserved display area 06TM021. The execution period of the effect of erasing the second hold display 06TM020 is short (as shown in FIG. 10-11(A), in the second KT state, the small hit ending period is 3 seconds, while in FIG. As shown in (B), in the first KT state, the small hit ending period is 0.5 seconds)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, in the non-special state, it is possible to shorten the period for interrupting the variable display of the one specific identification information, corresponding to the variable display situation of one specific effect information and one specific identification information Inconsistency with the production can be suppressed.

As a gaming machine, as shown in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2017-0866690 (FIG. 22), a gaming machine that performs a demo display (special effect) according to the execution status of variable display has been proposed. Further, as shown in JP-A-2015-156952 (paragraph 0050), a gaming machine in which the first special symbol (first specific identification information) and the second special symbol (second specific identification information) are variably displayed simultaneously Proposed. Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2017-0886690 (FIG. 22) is disclosed in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2017-0886690 (FIG. 22) for a game machine capable of concurrently executing variable display of two pieces of specific identification information as described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. When the configuration for executing the described special effect is applied, it is necessary to appropriately perform effect control regarding the special effect. The inventions relating to the means B1 to B9 are made in view of the above situation, and in a gaming machine capable of concurrently performing variable display of two pieces of specific identification information, effect control regarding special effects is appropriately performed. Especially.

The game machine of means B1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player,
The first start condition is satisfied after the first start condition (start prize is generated in the winning ball device 6A) is satisfied (as shown in FIG. 10-3, in the first special symbol normal process, of the second special symbol). Variable display of the first specific identification information (first special symbol) based on that neither the big hit game state or the small hit game state based on the variable display result is controlled and the first number of reserved memories is not 0) The second start condition is satisfied after the second start condition (start prize is generated in the variable winning ball device 6B) is satisfied while executing (in the second special symbol normal process). , The second specific identification information (second is not controlled in both the big hit game state and the small hit game state based on the variable display result of the first special symbol and the second reserved memory number is not 0) The variable display of the special symbol) is performed, and the variable display of the first specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol) and the variable display of the second specific identification information (variable display of the second special symbol) are performed in parallel. Executable specific identification information variable display means (game control microcomputer 100),
Depending on the gaming state (non-KT state, KT state), the variable display of the first specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol) and the variable display of the second specific identification information (variable display of the second special symbol) A decoration identification information variable display means (production control CPU 120) capable of performing a variable display of decoration identification information (variable display of a decorative pattern) corresponding to either one of them.
Special effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing special effect (first demonstration display, second demonstration display) when variable display of decoration identification information (variable display of decorative pattern) is not executed. Prepare,
During execution of the special effect (first demonstration display, second demonstration display), the first start condition and the second start condition are satisfied regardless of whether the first start condition and the second start condition can be satisfied. The special effect is ended based on the fact that either one of the two starting conditions is satisfied (as shown in FIG. 10-21, a starting winning is generated in the winning ball apparatus 6A, and the first reserved memory number is 1). Then (NO in step S06TM1400), the first demonstration display is terminated, and as shown in FIG. NO), end the second demo display)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize appropriate effect control according to the establishment condition of the start condition of the specific identification information.

The game machine of means B2 is
A gaming machine of means B1,
The decoration identification information variable display means (production control CPU 120) corresponds to the variable display of the first specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol) when being controlled to the first gaming state (non-KT state). Then, the variable display of the decorative identification information (variable display of the decorative symbol) can be executed, and the variable display of the second specific identification information (of the second special symbol) when controlled in the second game state (KT state) It is possible to execute variable display of decorative identification information (variable display of decorative patterns) in response to variable display).
During execution of the special effect (first demonstration display, second demonstration display), the first start condition or the second start condition can be satisfied (as shown in FIG. 10-3, the first special symbol normal processing Therefore, the big hit game state or the small hit game state is not controlled based on the variable display result of the second special symbol, and the first reserved memory number is not 0, or as shown in FIG. In the special symbol normal processing, the big hit game state or the small hit game state is not controlled based on the variation display result of the first special symbol, and the second reserved memory number is not 0), when the first starting condition The special effect is ended according to the establishment (starting winning to the winning ball device 6A) (as shown in FIG. 10-21, when the starting winning to the winning ball device 6A occurs, the variation of the first special symbol). The display is started (YES in 026IWS4714), the first demonstration display is ended), and the special effect is ended in response to the establishment of the second start condition (as shown in FIG. 10-22, variable winning ball device 6B). When the start winning a prize is generated, the variable display of the second special symbol is started (YES in 026IWS4814), and the second demo display is ended),
During execution of the special effect (first demonstration display, second demonstration display), the first start condition or the second start condition cannot be satisfied (as shown in FIG. 10-3, the first special symbol normal processing In, the second special symbol is controlled in the big hit game state or the small hit game state, or, as shown in FIG. 10-4, in the second special symbol normal process, the first special symbol is the big hit game state or small. When the winning game state is controlled), the special effect is ended in response to the establishment of the first starting condition (as shown in FIG. 10-21, a start winning is generated in the winning ball device 6A). Also, the variable display of the first special symbol is not started (NO in step 026IWS4714), but the first number of reserved memories is 1 (NO in step S06TM1400), and the first demo display is ended), and the second start condition is set. The special effect is ended according to the establishment (as shown in FIG. 10-22, even if a start winning is generated in the variable winning ball device 6B, the variable display of the second special symbol is not started (NO in step 026IWS4814). ), the number of second reserved memories becomes 1 (NO in step S06TM1500), and the second demo display is terminated)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize appropriate effect control according to the establishment condition of the start condition of the specific identification information.

The game machine of means B3 is
A gaming machine of means B1 or means B2,
It is possible to control to a special state (small hit game state) different from the advantageous state (big hit game state),
The first start condition and the second start condition cannot be satisfied when being controlled to the advantageous state (big hit game state) (as shown in FIG. 10-3, in the first special symbol normal process, It is controlled to the big hit game state based on the variable display result of 2 special symbols (YES in step S06TM1000A), and as shown in FIG. Based on the big hit game state based (YES in step S06TM1000B),
The first start condition and the second start condition cannot be satisfied when being controlled to the special state (small hit game state) (as shown in FIG. 10-3, in the first special symbol normal process, When the small hit game state based on the variable display result of the second special symbol is controlled (YES in step S06TM1000A), the variable display of the first special symbol is not started, and as shown in FIG. 10-4, In the 2 special symbol normal process, when the small hit game state based on the variable display result of the first special symbol is controlled (YES in step S06TM1000B), the variable display of the second special symbol is not started)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, since the start condition cannot be satisfied while being controlled to the advantageous state, the player can concentrate on the game in the advantageous state. In addition, since the start condition cannot be satisfied while being controlled to the special state, the player can concentrate on the game in the advantageous state.

The game machine of means B4 is
A gaming machine of means B3,
A gaming machine characterized by being able to be controlled to a special state (KT state) that is frequently controlled to the special state (small hit game state).
With such a configuration, it is possible to realize a gaming state that is different from the advantageous state as the advantageous game state for the player.

The game machine of means B5 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means B1 to means B4,
Regardless of the gaming state, the variable display of the first special identification information having a lower visibility than the decoration identification information (decorative pattern) is performed corresponding to the variable display of the first specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol). Possible (variable display of the first small symbol corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol can be executed), and decoration identification corresponding to the variable display of the second specific identification information (variable display of the second special symbol) It is possible to execute the variable display of the second special identification information whose visibility is lower than the information (decorative pattern) (the variable display of the second small symbol can be executed corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol). And the gaming machine.
With such a configuration, the player can recognize the variable display status of the specific identification information by checking the variable display status of the special identification information.

The gaming machine of means B6 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means B1 to means B5,
A game control section (main board 11) having the specific identification information variable display means (game control microcomputer 100);
An effect control unit (effect control board 12) including the decoration identification information variable display means (effect control CPU 120) and the special effect executing means (effect control CPU 120),
The game control unit (main board 11) does not satisfy the first start condition (a start winning for the winning ball apparatus 6A has not occurred) and the variable display of the first specific identification information is executed. Not corresponding (variable display of the first special symbol is not executed) and the first special command (first customer waiting demo display designation command) and the second starting condition are not satisfied (variable winning a prize) The second special command corresponding to the fact that the start winning to the ball device 6B has not occurred) and the variable display of the second specific identification information has not been executed (the variable display of the first special symbol has not been executed). (2nd customer waiting demo display designation command) can be sent,
The effect control unit (effect control board 12) can execute the first special effect by the special effect executing means in response to the first game state when the first special command is received (FIG. 9). As shown in −38, when the production control CPU 120 receives the first customer waiting demo display designation command (YES in step 026IWS4701), based on the non-KT state (YES in step 026IWS4702), 1 demo display is started (step 026IWS4711), and when the second special command is received, the second special effect can be executed by the special effect executing means according to the second game state (FIG. 9). As shown in −39, when the production control CPU 120 receives the second customer waiting demonstration display designation command (YES in step 026IWS4801), based on the KT state (YES in step 026IWS4802), the second Start demo display (step 026IWS4811))
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the special effect can be started only when the command corresponding to the current game state is received, and the special effect can be started at an appropriate timing according to the game state. .

The game machine of means B7 is
A gaming machine of means B6,
When the first special effect (first demonstration display) is being executed, the first start condition is satisfied (as shown in FIG. 10-3, in the first special symbol normal process, the second special symbol The first special effect is ended (not shown in FIG. 9-38) in response to the fact that neither the big hit game state or the small hit game state based on the variation display result is controlled and the first reserved memory number is not 0). As shown, when the variable display of the first special symbol is started (YES in step 026IWS4714), the first demo display is ended (step 026IWS4716)),
When the second special effect (second demo display) is being executed, the second start condition is satisfied (as shown in FIG. 10-4, in the second special symbol normal process, the first special symbol The second special effect is ended in response to the fact that neither the big hit game state or the small hit game state based on the variation display result is controlled and the second reserved memory number is not 0) (in FIG. 9-39). As shown, when the variable display of the second special symbol is started (YES in step 026IWS4814), the second demo display is displayed (step 026IWS4816)).
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to realize appropriate effect control corresponding to the execution state of the variable display of the specific identification information.

The game machine of means B8 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means B1 to means B7,
During execution of the special effect (first demonstration display), when the first start condition can be satisfied, the first start condition is satisfied (the start winning is generated in the winning ball device 6A). It is possible to display, in the first mode, the number of pending storages corresponding to the establishment of one start condition (when the first number of pending storages is 4, as shown in FIG. 10A, 4 is displayed in the first pending display area 06TM011. It is possible to display the 1st hold display 06TM010),
During execution of the special effect (first demonstration display), the first start condition cannot be satisfied (as shown in FIG. 10-3, in the first special symbol normal processing, in the variable display result of the second special symbol When the big hit game state or the small hit game state based on it is controlled), in response to the establishment of the first starting condition (the occurrence of the starting winning prize for the winning ball apparatus 6A), the establishment of the first starting condition is dealt with. The number of reserved storages can be displayed in a second mode having lower visibility than the first mode (as shown in FIG. 10-6, when the first number of reserved storages is 1, the first number of reserved storages is special. "1" can be displayed in the display area 06TM015),
During execution of the special effect (second demo display), when the second start condition can be satisfied, the second start condition is satisfied (start win is generated in the variable winning ball device 6B). It is possible to display the number of reserved memories corresponding to the establishment of the second start condition in the first mode (as shown in FIG. 10-1, when the number of second reserved memories is 4, the second reserved display area 06TM021 is displayed. It is possible to display four second hold indications 06TM020),
During execution of the special effect (second demo display), the second start condition cannot be satisfied (as shown in FIG. 10-4, in the second special symbol normal process, in the variable display result of the first special symbol When it is controlled to the big hit game state or the small hit game state based on), it corresponds to the establishment of the second start condition in response to the establishment of the second start condition (the occurrence of the start prize for the variable winning ball device 6B). The retained storage number can be displayed in the second mode, which has lower visibility than the first mode (when the second reserved memory number is 0, as shown in FIG. 10-6, the second reserved memory number). "0" can be displayed in the special display area 06TM025)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the number of pending storages can be appropriately notified by displaying the number of pending storages in the second mode, which has lower visibility than the first mode.

The game machine of means B9 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means B1 to means B8,
Variable display of the first specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol) and variable display of the second specific identification information (variable display of the second special symbol) During variable display of the specific identification information (first During the variable display of the special symbol), different from the advantageous state (big hit game state) based on the variable display result of the other specific identification information (the variable display result of the second special symbol is "small hit") When controlled to a special state (small hitting game state), variable display interruption means (game control microcomputer 100) for interrupting variable display of one specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol),
An end effect (an effect that is executed in response to the reception of a small hit end designation command, for example, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (A4), when the special state (small hit game state) ends. After the special variable winning ball device 17 is closed, an end effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a character and an effect of displaying a character of “30pt GET!” on the image display device 5 is provided.
The non-special state (first KT state) is shown in the end effect (FIG. 10-12 (B3)) rather than the special state (second KT state) that is frequently controlled to the special state (small hitting game state). As described above, after closing the opened special variable winning ball device 17, the active display 06TM030 displayed in the active display area 06TM031 of the image display device 5 and the four display areas 06TM021 displayed in the second reserved display area 06TM021. The execution period of the effect of erasing the second hold display 06TM020 is short (as shown in FIG. 10-11(A), in the second KT state, the small hit ending period is 3 seconds, while in FIG. As shown in (B), in the first KT state, the small hit ending period is 0.5 seconds)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, in the non-special state, it is possible to shorten the period for interrupting the variable display of the one specific identification information, corresponding to the variable display situation of one specific effect information and one specific identification information Inconsistency with the production can be suppressed.

As an amusement machine, as shown in JP-A-2016-187523 (FIG. 73), when power is restored and power is restored, power is restored based on the image control unit receiving a power restoration designation command. There has been proposed a game machine that performs a power recovery effect to inform that it is. In the gaming machine shown in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2016-187523 (FIG. 73 ), when the power is restored, it is necessary to give an appropriate notification according to the variable display status of the specific identification information when the power is cut off. is there. The invention according to means D1 to D10 has been made in view of the above situation, and provides a gaming machine that appropriately notifies according to a variable display state of specific identification information when an electric power interruption occurs. It is in.

The game machine of means D1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player,
Variable display of the first specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol) and variable display of the second specific identification information (variable display of the second special symbol) can be executed in parallel with specific identification information variable display means ( Game control means (main board 11) having a game control microcomputer 100),
Depending on the gaming state (non-KT state, KT state), variable display of the first specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol) and variable display of the second specific identification information (variable display of the second special symbol) Effect control means (effect control board 12) having decoration identification information variable display means (effect control CPU 120) capable of performing variable display of decoration identification information (variable display of decorative patterns) corresponding to either one of them. Prepare,
The game control means (main board 11), the first information (variable display of the first special symbol) first information (first customer waiting demonstration display designation command, display corresponding to the first special symbol) of the first specific identification information Result designation command, variation pattern command corresponding to the first special symbol) and second information (variable display of the second special symbol) second information (second customer waiting demonstration display designation command, second) Display result designation command corresponding to the special symbol, variation pattern command corresponding to the second special symbol), and game state information related to the game state (low accuracy/non-KT background specification command, low accuracy/first KT background specification command, high accuracy) /First KT background designating command, high accuracy/second KT background designating command) can be transmitted to the production control means (production control board 12),
When the power control is restored, the effect control means (effect control board 12) can execute the recovery notification in different modes according to the first information, the second information, and the game state information. There is (as shown in “Situation 2” in FIG. 10-15, the game state is low/non-KT state based on the reception of the low-probability/non-KT background designation command and the second customer waiting demo display designation command. (Normal state), it is possible to specify that the variable display of the first special symbol that is the main symbol is being executed, and that the variable display of the second special symbol that is the sub symbol is not being executed. The word "Power off recovery is in progress" is displayed on the entire screen of the display device 5, and as shown in "Situation 4" of FIG. 10-15, the low probability/non-KT background designation command and the first customer waiting demo display designation command Based on the fact that the game state is low probability/non-KT state (normal state), the variable display of the first special symbol which is the main symbol is not executed, and the second special symbol which is the sub symbol Since it is possible to specify that the variable display of is being executed, the word "restoring" is displayed in the display range (upper right part of the screen) of the second small symbol which is a sub symbol, and the other parts are Design design (decorative design and first small design) and background image (sunny image) are displayed)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, in the gaming machine capable of executing the variable display of the first specific identification information and the second specific identification information in parallel, it is possible to perform an appropriate notification regarding the power-off recovery.

The game machine of means D2 is
A gaming machine of means D1,
Variable display of the first specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol) and variable display of the second specific identification information (variable display of the second special symbol), variable display of the decorative identification information (variable display of the decorative symbol) Corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information that does not correspond to ), variable display of the special identification information whose visibility is lower than the decoration identification information (variable display of the first small symbol, variable display of the second small symbol) can be executed. A gaming machine characterized by being.
With such a configuration, the player can confirm the variable display status of the specific identification information by confirming the variable display status of the special identification information.

The game machine of means D3 is
A gaming machine of means D1 or means D2,
When the production control means (production control CPU 120) recovers from power interruption,
The first information (first customer waiting demo display designation command, display result designation command corresponding to the first special symbol, variation pattern command corresponding to the first special symbol) and the second information (second customer waiting demo display designation Command, display result designation command corresponding to the second special symbol, variable pattern command corresponding to the second special symbol), variable display of the specific identification information corresponding to the variable display of the decorative identification information (variable display of the decorative pattern) (For example, variable display of the first special symbol) Information (first customer waiting demonstration display designation command, display result designation command corresponding to the first special symbol, variation pattern command corresponding to the first special symbol) is received. When there is not, execute the recovery notification of the first mode (the recovery screen shown in FIG. 10-16(B), in which the characters “power recovery is in progress” is displayed on the entire screen),
Of the first information and the second information, information (variable display of the second special symbol) regarding variable display of specific identification information that does not correspond to variable display of decoration identification information (second customer waiting demonstration display designation command, When the display result designation command corresponding to the second special symbol, the variation pattern command corresponding to the second special symbol) is not received, the recovery notification of the second mode (shown in FIG. 10-16(A), the sub symbol) In the display range (upper right part of the screen) of the second small design corresponding to, the character "restoring" is displayed, and in the other parts, each production design (decorative design and first small design) and background image (clear image) ) Is displayed, and then the information regarding the variable display of the specific identification information that does not correspond to the variable display of the decoration identification information (the second customer waiting demo display designation command, the display result corresponding to the second special symbol) When the designated command, the variation pattern command corresponding to the second special symbol) is received, the restoration notification of the second mode is ended (each production design (decorative design, first small design, second small design) and background. Only the image (clear image) is displayed)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the restoration process is notified in an appropriate manner according to the variable display status of the specific identification information corresponding to the decoration identification information and the variable display status of the specific identification information not corresponding to the decoration identification information. Is possible.

The game machine of means D4 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means D1 to means D3,
The first start condition is satisfied after the first start condition is satisfied (start prize is generated in the winning ball device 6A) (as shown in FIG. 10-3, in the first special symbol normal process, the second special symbol is included). Variable display of the first specific identification information (first special symbol) based on that neither the big hit game state or the small hit game state based on the variable display result is controlled and the first number of reserved memories is not 0) (Variation display)
The second start condition is satisfied after the second start condition is satisfied (start prize is generated in the variable winning ball device 6B) (as shown in FIG. 10-4, in the second special symbol normal process, the second special symbol). Variable of the second specific identification information (second special symbol) based on the fact that it is not controlled in either the big hit game state or the small hit game state based on the variable display result, and the second number of reserved memories is not 0) Display (variable display),
It is possible to control to a special state (small hit game state) different from the advantageous state (big hit game state),
The first start condition and the second start condition cannot be satisfied when being controlled to the advantageous state (big hit game state) (as shown in FIG. 10-3, in the first special symbol normal process, It is controlled to the big hit game state based on the variable display result of 2 special symbols (YES in step S06TM1000A), and as shown in FIG. Based on the big hit game state based (YES in step S06TM1000B),
The first start condition and the second start condition cannot be satisfied when being controlled to the special state (small hit game state) (as shown in FIG. 10-3, in the first special symbol normal process, When the small hit game state based on the variable display result of the second special symbol is controlled (YES in step S06TM1000A), the variable display of the first special symbol is not started, and as shown in FIG. 10-4, In the 2 special symbol normal process, when the small hit game state based on the variable display result of the first special symbol is controlled (YES in step S06TM1000B), the variable display of the second special symbol is not started)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, since the start condition cannot be satisfied while being controlled to the advantageous state, the player can concentrate on the game in the advantageous state. In addition, since the start condition cannot be satisfied while being controlled to the special state, the player can concentrate on the game in the advantageous state.

The game machine of means D5 is
A gaming machine of means D4,
A gaming machine characterized by being able to be controlled to a special state (KT state) that is frequently controlled to the special state (small hit game state).
With such a configuration, it is possible to realize a gaming state that is different from the advantageous state as the advantageous game state for the player.

The game machine of means D6 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means D1 to means D5,
Regardless of the gaming state, the variable display of the first special identification information having a lower visibility than the decoration identification information (decorative pattern) is performed corresponding to the variable display of the first specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol). Possible (variable display of the first small symbol corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol can be executed), and decoration identification corresponding to the variable display of the second specific identification information (variable display of the second special symbol) It is possible to execute the variable display of the second special identification information whose visibility is lower than the information (decorative pattern) (the variable display of the second small symbol can be executed corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol). And the gaming machine.
With such a configuration, the player can recognize the variable display status of the specific identification information by checking the variable display status of the special identification information.

The game machine of means D7 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means D1 to means D6,
A game control section (main board 11) having the specific identification information variable display means (game control microcomputer 100);
When the decoration identification information variable display means (effect control CPU 120) and the decoration identification information variable display (variable display of decoration pattern) are not executed, special effects (first demo display, second demo display) are executed. And a production control unit (production control board 12) having possible special production execution means (production control CPU 120),
In the specific identification information variable display means (game control microcomputer 100), the first start condition is satisfied after the first start condition is satisfied (start prize is generated in the winning ball device 6A) (see FIG. 10-3). As shown, in the first special symbol normal processing, neither the big hit game state or the small hit game state based on the variable display result of the second special symbol is controlled and the first reserved memory number is not 0) The variable display of the first specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed based on, and the second start condition is satisfied (the start prize is generated in the variable winning ball device 6B). Established (as shown in FIG. 10-4, in the second special symbol normal processing, is not controlled to both the big hit game state and the small hit game state based on the variable display result of the first special symbol and the second Variable display of the second specific identification information (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed based on that the number of reserved memories is not 0),
The game control unit (main board 11) does not satisfy the first start condition (a start winning for the winning ball apparatus 6A has not occurred) and the variable display of the first specific identification information is executed. Not corresponding (variable display of the first special symbol is not executed) and the first special command (first customer waiting demo display designation command) and the second starting condition are not satisfied (variable winning a prize) The second special command corresponding to the fact that the start winning to the ball device 6B has not occurred) and the variable display of the second specific identification information has not been executed (the variable display of the first special symbol has not been executed). (2nd customer waiting demo display designation command) can be sent,
The effect control unit (effect control board 12) can execute the first special effect by the special effect executing means in response to the first game state when the first special command is received (FIG. 9). As shown in −38, when the production control CPU 120 receives the first customer waiting demo display designation command (YES in step 026IWS4701), based on the non-KT state (YES in step 026IWS4702), 1 demo display is started (step 026IWS4711), and when the second special command is received, the second special effect can be executed by the special effect executing means according to the second game state (FIG. 9). As shown in −39, when the production control CPU 120 receives the second customer waiting demonstration display designation command (YES in step 026IWS4801), based on the KT state (YES in step 026IWS4802), the second Start demo display (step 026IWS4811))
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the special effect can be started only when the command corresponding to the current game state is received, and the special effect can be started at an appropriate timing according to the game state. .

The game machine of means D8 is
A gaming machine of means D7,
When the first special effect (first demonstration display) is being executed, the first start condition is satisfied (as shown in FIG. 10-3, in the first special symbol normal process, the second special symbol The first special effect is ended (not shown in FIG. 9-38) in response to the fact that neither the big hit game state or the small hit game state based on the variation display result is controlled and the first reserved memory number is not 0). As shown, when the variable display of the first special symbol is started (YES in step 026IWS4714), the first demo display is ended (step 026IWS4716)),
When the second special effect (second demo display) is being executed, the second start condition is satisfied (as shown in FIG. 10-4, in the second special symbol normal process, the first special symbol The second special effect is ended in response to the fact that neither the big hit game state or the small hit game state based on the variation display result is controlled and the second reserved memory number is not 0) (in FIG. 9-39). As shown, when the variable display of the second special symbol is started (YES in step 026IWS4814), the second demo display is displayed (step 026IWS4816)).
A gaming machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to realize appropriate effect control corresponding to the execution state of the variable display of the specific identification information.

The game machine of means D9 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means D1 to means D8,
In the specific identification information variable display means (game control microcomputer 100), the first start condition is satisfied after the first start condition is satisfied (start prize is generated in the winning ball device 6A) (see FIG. 10-3). As shown, in the first special symbol normal processing, neither the big hit game state or the small hit game state based on the variable display result of the second special symbol is controlled and the first reserved memory number is not 0) The variable display of the first specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed based on, and the second start condition is satisfied (the start prize is generated in the variable winning ball device 6B). Established (as shown in FIG. 10-4, in the second special symbol normal processing, is not controlled to both the big hit game state and the small hit game state based on the variable display result of the first special symbol and the second Variable display of the second specific identification information (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed based on that the number of reserved memories is not 0),
During execution of the special effect (first demonstration display), when the first start condition can be satisfied, the first start condition is satisfied (the start winning is generated in the winning ball device 6A). It is possible to display, in the first mode, the number of pending storages corresponding to the establishment of one start condition (when the first number of pending storages is 4, as shown in FIG. 10A, 4 is displayed in the first pending display area 06TM011. It is possible to display the 1st hold display 06TM010),
During execution of the special effect (first demonstration display), the first start condition cannot be satisfied (as shown in FIG. 10-3, in the first special symbol normal processing, in the variable display result of the second special symbol When the big hit game state or the small hit game state based on it is controlled), in response to the establishment of the first starting condition (the occurrence of the starting winning prize for the winning ball apparatus 6A), the establishment of the first starting condition is dealt with. The number of reserved storages can be displayed in a second mode having lower visibility than the first mode (as shown in FIG. 10-6, when the first number of reserved storages is 1, the first number of reserved storages is special. "1" can be displayed in the display area 06TM015),
During execution of the special effect (second demo display), when the second start condition can be satisfied, the second start condition is satisfied (start win is generated in the variable winning ball device 6B). It is possible to display the number of reserved memories corresponding to the establishment of the second start condition in the first mode (as shown in FIG. 10-1, when the number of second reserved memories is 4, the second reserved display area 06TM021 is displayed. It is possible to display four second hold indications 06TM020),
During execution of the special effect (second demo display), the second start condition cannot be satisfied (as shown in FIG. 10-4, in the second special symbol normal process, in the variable display result of the first special symbol When it is controlled to the big hit game state or the small hit game state based on), it corresponds to the establishment of the second start condition in response to the establishment of the second start condition (the occurrence of the start prize for the variable winning ball device 6B). The retained storage number can be displayed in the second mode, which has lower visibility than the first mode (when the second reserved memory number is 0, as shown in FIG. 10-6, the second reserved memory number). "0" can be displayed in the special display area 06TM025)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the number of pending storages can be appropriately notified by displaying the number of pending storages in the second mode, which has lower visibility than the first mode.

The game machine of means D10 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means D1 to means D9,
Variable display of the first specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol) and variable display of the second specific identification information (variable display of the second special symbol) During variable display of the specific identification information (first During the variable display of the special symbol), different from the advantageous state (big hit game state) based on the variable display result of the other specific identification information (the variable display result of the second special symbol is "small hit") When controlled to a special state (small hitting game state), variable display interruption means (game control microcomputer 100) for interrupting variable display of one specific identification information (variable display of the first special symbol),
An end effect (an effect that is executed in response to the reception of a small hit end designation command, for example, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (A4), when the special state (small hit game state) ends. After the special variable winning ball device 17 is closed, an end effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a character and an effect of displaying a character of “30pt GET!” on the image display device 5 is provided.
The non-special state (first KT state) is shown in the end effect (FIG. 10-12 (B3)) rather than the special state (second KT state) that is frequently controlled to the special state (small hitting game state). As described above, after closing the opened special variable winning ball device 17, the active display 06TM030 displayed in the active display area 06TM031 of the image display device 5 and the four display areas 06TM021 displayed in the second reserved display area 06TM021. The execution period of the effect of erasing the second hold display 06TM020 is short (as shown in FIG. 10-11(A), in the second KT state, the small hit ending period is 3 seconds, while in FIG. As shown in (B), in the first KT state, the small hit ending period is 0.5 seconds)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, in the non-special state, it is possible to shorten the period for interrupting the variable display of the one specific identification information, corresponding to the variable display situation of one specific effect information and one specific identification information Inconsistency with the production can be suppressed.

As a gaming machine, a variable display of the first identification information and a variable display of the second identification information can be executed, and the variable means is provided so that a game medium moving on a specific route of the movement route is provided so as to enter the game. Some are configured to be able to execute a specific notification for promoting the ejection of the medium. For example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2017-148127 (paragraph 0044) describes that when a big hit or a small hit occurs, a second game state display unit that lights up and informs that it is a right hit is provided. ing. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2017-148127 (paragraph 0044), there is no distinction between the case where the variable display of the first identification information is executed and the case where the variable display of the second identification information is executed. The specific notification is being executed. Therefore, it is not always possible to provide appropriate notification regarding the promotion of the launch of the game medium. Therefore, an object of the invention according to means E1 to E7 is to provide a game machine capable of appropriately informing about the promotion of the ejection of the game medium.

(Means E1) A game machine according to the present invention is a game machine capable of playing a game, and a game medium (for example, a game ball) has entered a first starting area (for example, a first starting winning opening). Variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) can be executed based on the second identification based on the game medium having entered the second starting area (for example, the second starting winning opening). Variable display execution means capable of executing variable display of information (for example, second special symbol) (for example, first special symbol process process (step S25A) in the game control microcomputer 100, steps S110A to S113A and second special symbol) A portion for executing the process corresponding to steps S110A to S113A of the process process (step S25B), a first state in which the game medium can enter (for example, an open state), and a second state in which the game medium is difficult or inaccessible. After the variable means (for example, the special variable winning ball device 17) that can be changed to the state (for example, the closed state) and the variable display of either the first identification information or the second identification information is executed, State control means (for example, a game control microcomputer) that can be controlled to either an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) or a special state having a lower degree of advantage than the advantageous state (for example, a small hit game state) 100 in the first special symbol process process (step S25A) steps S115A to S121A and the second special symbol process process (step S25B) step S115A to S121A equivalent to the process), and is controlled to a special state Variable means control means for controlling the variable means to the first state when it is (for example, steps S119A to S121A of the first special symbol process process (step S25A) in the game control microcomputer 100 and the second special symbol process process (step S25B) and a portion for executing the processing corresponding to steps S119A to S121A), and the first start area moves along a predetermined path (for example, the area to the left of the game area) of the moving path along which the game medium can move. The game medium is provided so that it can enter, and the variable means is provided so that the game medium that moves on a specific path (for example, the right side area of the game area) of the movement path can enter, and the game medium is launched to the specific path. Specific notification execution means (for example, in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing a specific notification (for example, right-handed notification shown in (1) and (2) of FIG. 9-48) for promoting The part that executes steps 026IWS2012A, S2021B, and S2027B. For example, a part of the effect control CPU 120 that executes steps 026IWS624 and S634. ), the specific notification execution means does not execute the specific notification when the first identification information is variably displayed and then controlled to a special state (for example, the gaming control microcomputer 100 returns Y in step 026IWS2024A). In the case of step 026IWS2027B, the same processing as step 026IWS2027B is not executed.For example, when the effect control CPU 120 is Y in step 026IWS629, it does not execute the same processing as step 026IWS624 (see FIG. 9-48(3)). To do. According to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately notify the promotion of the launch of the game medium.

(Means E2) In the means 1, a first pending storage means (for example, a first pending storage buffer) capable of storing the information regarding the variable display of the first identification information as a pending storage, and the information regarding the variable display of the second identification information. And a second hold storage means (for example, a second hold storage buffer) capable of storing as the hold storage, and the state control means displays the display result of the variable display of the first identification information or the variable display of the second identification information. It is possible to control to an advantageous state (eg, jackpot gaming state) when a specific display result (eg, jackpot pattern) is derived and displayed as a display result, and the display result of the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information. When the special display result (for example, the small hit pattern) is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display of, it is possible to control to the special state (for example, the small hit game state), and the display result of the variable display of the second identification information. Can be controlled to a special state (for example, KT state) in which the frequency of being a special display result is increased (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 can execute steps 026IWS2208A, S2213A, SS14A, S2219A, S2220A, S2208B, S2213B, SS14B). , S2219B, S2220B), and the variable display execution means, when performing the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information in parallel, displays the one variable display as a display result. Based on the special display result being derived and displayed, as the display result of the other variable display, a specific display result and a predetermined display result different from the special display result (for example, a missing pattern) are derived and displayed (for example, for production control). When the CPU 120 receives the first compulsory symbol confirmation designation command or the second compulsory symbol confirmation designation command, in step 026IWS9703, the control for causing the deviation symbol to be confirmed and displayed may be performed). With such a configuration, the variable display can be forcibly ended, and the pending storage can be smoothly consumed.

(Means E3) In the means 1 or 2, it is possible to give a predetermined value when controlled to a special state (for example, pay out 10 prize balls based on winning of a game ball to a special winning opening). , Value adding means capable of giving a value higher than a predetermined value when controlled in an advantageous state (for example, paying out 15 prize balls based on winning of a game ball to a special winning opening) (for example, payout control) Specific notification executing means, as the specific notification, the first specific notification (for example, the right-handed indicator 26 and the right-handed notification LED 37 shown in (1) and (2) of FIG. 9-48). Lighting) and a second specific notification having a higher visibility than the first specific notification (for example, the right-handed display 026IW007 shown in FIG. 9-48(1)) can be executed and controlled to the advantageous state. When performing, the first specific notification and the second specific notification are executed (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 026IWS2021A, S2022A, S2021B, S2022B, and the production control CPU 120 executes steps 026IWS624, S634. 9-48(1).), when the special display is controlled after the variable display of the second identification information is performed, the first specific notification is executed and the second specific notification is not executed (for example, , The game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 026IWS2027B and S2028B, and the effect control CPU 120 executes step 026IWS634 (see FIG. 9-48(2)). With such a configuration, it is possible to realize notification corresponding to the value that can be added.

(Means E4) In any one of the means 1 to 3, the state control means is capable of controlling a plurality of types of special states (for example, small hits A to C), and variably displays the first identification information. When the special state is controlled after being displayed, the special state of the type having a low degree of advantage (for example, small scale) is higher than the case where the variable state of the second identification information is executed and then the special state is controlled. The winning notification A) is performed, and the specific notification execution means executes the specific notification when the variable display of the second identification information is executed and the special state is controlled ((2), (3) in FIG. 9-48). ) Reference). With such a configuration, it is possible to realize appropriate notification in consideration of the advantage of the player.

(Means E5) In any one of the means 1 to 4, a variable display effect executing means capable of executing a variable display effect (for example, a variable display of a decorative pattern) corresponding to at least the variable display of the first identification information ( For example, the effect control CPU 120 includes a portion for executing steps S171 to S173), and the variable display effect execution means executes the variable display effect in a common mode when the special state is controlled and when the special state is not controlled. It is possible (for example, the production control CPU 120 executes steps 026IWS920 to S922, and when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and a small hit occurs, the non-reach miss symbol is forcibly displayed as a stop. ). With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the player's recognizability of being controlled to the special state after the variable display of the first identification information is executed.

(Means E6) In any one of the means 1 to 5, a delay means for delaying the movement of the game medium is provided upstream of the variable means in the specific path (for example, a regulation provided in the variable winning ball device 6B). May be provided. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent aiming at the timing at which the control to the special state is performed after the variable display of the second identification information is normally performed.

(Means E7) In any one of the means 1 to 6, the game control means for controlling the progress of the game (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103)) and the game control means. Equipped with effect control means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) that controls effect based on information, and the game control means controls execution of notification by notification means (for example, right-handed indicator 26) for performing a predetermined notification. (For example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 026IWS2021A, S2021B, S2027B), the effect control means includes a specific notification execution means, and the specific notification execution means specifies in response to the notification by the notification means. The notification (for example, turning on the LED 37 for right-handed notification) may be configured to be executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes step 026IWS634 when Y in step 026IWS633). According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize appropriate notification while reducing the processing load of the effect control means.

It is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process for game control. It is a flowchart showing an example of a first special symbol process processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production control main processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production control process treatment. It is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration example of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration of a payout control board. It is a rear view showing a pachinko gaming machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows a display result determination table. (1)-(3) is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of setting suggestion production, (4) is explanatory drawing which shows the table for determining the production mode of setting suggestion production. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of power-on processing. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of power-on processing. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of power-on processing. It is a timing diagram which shows the output period of a security signal. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a notification when the setting change flag is set at the time of power activation. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of power-on processing. (1) is an explanatory diagram showing a control when a power failure occurs before the setting value is determined, and (2) is a control diagram when a power failure occurs after the setting value is determined. It is an explanatory view for explaining a big hit probability and a small hit probability for every set value. It is an explanatory view for explaining a big hit probability and a small hit probability for every set value. It is an explanatory view showing a jackpot type determination table. It is an explanatory view showing a small hit type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern (variation time) of a special design and a decorative design. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern (variation time) of a special design and a decorative design. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern (variation time) of a special design and a decorative design. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the variation pattern table for small hits. It is an explanatory view for explaining an opening pattern of a variable winning a prize ball device and a special variable winning a prize ball device in a KT state. It is an explanatory view for explaining an opening pattern of a variable winning a prize ball device and a special variable winning a prize ball device in a KT state. It is an explanatory view for explaining an opening pattern of a variable winning a prize ball device and a special variable winning a prize ball device in a KT state. It is the explanation drawing which shows one example of the contents of production control command. It is the explanation drawing which shows one example of the contents of production control command. It is a flowchart showing a first special symbol normal process. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st variation pattern setting processing. It is a flowchart showing a first special symbol variation process. It is a flowchart showing a first special symbol stop process. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st gate passage waiting processing. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st big hit end processing. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st big hit end processing. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st small hit end processing. It is a flowchart showing a second special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart showing a second special symbol stop process. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd gate passage waiting processing. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd big hit end processing. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd big hit end processing. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd small hit end processing. It is an explanatory view for explaining how to transition the gaming state. It is an explanatory view for explaining an external output signal. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the output timing of the big hit signal 1 and the big hit signal 2. It is a flowchart showing an example of a normal symbol process processing. It is a flowchart showing a normal symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart showing a normal symbol stop process. It is a flow chart which shows pre-processing for opening an ordinary electric accessory. It is a flow chart which shows a concrete example of command analysis processing. It is a flow chart which shows a concrete example of command analysis processing. It is a flow chart which shows a concrete example of command analysis processing. It is a flow chart which shows demonstration display control processing. It is a flow chart which shows demonstration display control processing. It is a flow chart which shows variable display start waiting processing. It is a flowchart which shows a variable display start setting process. It is an explanatory view for explaining a concrete example of a setting value suggestive effect determination table. It is an explanatory view for explaining a specific example of a small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect determination table. It is a flowchart showing a special figure hit waiting process. It is a flowchart showing a special figure hit waiting process. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production mode of setting value suggestive production. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production mode of small hit RUSH continuation suggestion production. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display mode of the right-handed notification. It is the explanation drawing which shows the concrete example of the decoration design and the small design which correspond to the game state. It is explanatory drawing which shows the game flow at the time of being controlled by each game state. It is a flowchart showing a first special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart showing a second special symbol normal process. It is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect when the start winning is achieved during the first demo display. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of each production|presentation at the time of starting winning in the 1st demonstration display. It is a flowchart showing a first special symbol variation process. It is a flowchart showing a second special symbol variation process. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st small hit end processing. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd small hit end processing. (A) is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect when the small hit game state is controlled during the high accuracy/second KT state, and (B) is a small hit during the low accuracy/first KT state. It is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect when controlled to the game state. (A1) ~ (A5) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of each effect when controlled to the small hitting game state during the high accuracy/second KT state, and (B1) to (B4) are low accuracy. / It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of each effect when controlled to the small hit game state during the first KT state. (A) is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect when the first special symbol corresponding to the decorative pattern is a big hit, (B) is a second special symbol that does not correspond to the decorative pattern is a big hit It is a time chart which shows the execution timing of each production at this time. (A1) ~ (A4) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of each effect when the first special symbol corresponding to the decorative pattern is a big hit, (B1) ~ (B4) does not correspond to the decorative pattern. It is the explanation drawing which shows the concrete example of each production when the 2nd special design becomes the big hit. It is a figure which shows the transmission command according to the situation at the time of power supply restoration. It is a figure which shows a power recovery timing and a power recovery state. 7 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each display control when the power is cut off and the power is restored in the low accuracy/non-KT state. 7 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each display control when the power is cut off and the power is restored in the low accuracy/non-KT state. 9 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each display control when the power is cut off in the high-accuracy/second KT state and the power is restored. 9 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each display control when the power is cut off in the high-accuracy/second KT state and the power is restored. It is a flow chart which shows the modification of demonstration display control processing. It is a flow chart which shows the modification of demonstration display control processing. It is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect when the start winning is achieved during the first demo display. It is an explanatory view showing a production mode of each production when a start winning is made during the first demo display.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which is also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Structure of pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame (underframe) 3 that supports and fixes the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot into the game area by being shot from a predetermined hitting ball launching device.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the right side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1), a variable display (also called a special drawing game) of special symbols (also called a special drawing) as a plurality of types of special identification information is provided. There is provided a first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

The “variable display” of the special symbol is, for example, variably displaying a plurality of types of special symbols (the same applies to other symbols described later). The fluctuation includes update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement/reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of the special symbol or a normal symbol described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative pattern, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scroll-displayed or updated and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed in a blinking manner. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derived or derived display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be referred to as a variable display or a variable.

The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also referred to as "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also referred to as "second special symbols". In addition, the special figure game using the first special figure is called a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also called a "second special figure game". The special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol may be one type.

Further, below the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, a right hitting indicator 26 is provided for urging a right hitting operation to perform a firing operation aiming at the right side of the game area. There is. The right-handed indicator 26 is composed of, for example, an LED, and is turned on by the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) mounted on the main board 11 (see FIG. 2).

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special drawing game and the second special drawing game, a decorative pattern as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern (a pattern showing numbers or the like) Variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special drawing game or the second special drawing game, the decorative pattern is variably displayed (for example, up and down) in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Direction scroll display and update display). Note that the special figure game and the variable display of the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

Further, for example, on the screen of the image display device 5, there is provided a display area for displaying a suspension display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended. In this example, the first hold display area 5A for displaying the hold display corresponding to the variable display of the first special figure, and the second hold display for displaying the hold display corresponding to the variable display of the second special figure. Area 5B is provided. A display area for displaying an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5. The hold display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display corresponding display corresponding to the variable display.

Further, on the right side of the image display device 5, a right-handing notification LED 37 for urging a right-handing operation is provided. The right-handing notification LED 37 is controlled by the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 (see FIG. 2).

The number of variable displays that are held is also called the number of held storages. The number of reserved memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also called a first reserved memory number, and the number of reserved memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also called a second reserved memory number. In addition, the total of the first pending storage number and the second pending storage number is also referred to as the total pending storage number.

In addition, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B, which are configured to include a plurality of LEDs, are provided, and the first hold indicator 25A indicates the number of LEDs to be lit. The first pending storage number is displayed by, and the second pending display unit 25B displays the second pending storage number according to the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A having a first starting winning port is provided. The game ball that has won the first start winning opening is guided to the back surface of the game board 2 and detected by the first starting opening switch 22A. When a game ball is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A, a predetermined number (1) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball based on this detection information.

A row of nails 19 is provided on the right side of the first start winning opening so that the game balls flowing down from the right side of the game area do not enter the area where the first starting winning opening is provided. Has been done. Thus, the row of nails 19 for preventing the game ball flowing down from the right side of the game area from entering is provided, so that the game ball is operated to aim at the left side of the game area (so-called left hitting). The game ball can be won in the first starting winning opening only when the operation is performed.

In this example, the row of nails 19 is provided, so that the game ball can be won in the first start winning port only when the player makes a left-handed operation. I can't stop. For example, the game ball may be configured to be able to win in the first starting prize hole only when the player is left-handed because the first starting prize hole is provided on the left side of the game area. The mouth may be provided on the left side of the game area, and the row of nails 19 may also be provided so that the game ball can be won in the first start winning opening only when the left striking operation is performed.

A pass gate 41 is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. The game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21.

Below the passage gate 41, a special variable winning ball device 7 forming a special winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 extends in the left-right direction in a slightly inclined state, and moves the plate-shaped bottom member formed as the bottom surface of the flow path through which the game ball flows down in the front-back direction to move the bottom surface. The game ball is changed to an open state (also referred to as an open state) in which a game ball can be won in a special winning opening located below the member and a closed state (also referred to as a closed state) in which the game ball cannot be won. Special variable winning ball device 7, in the jackpot gaming state that occurs when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, the bottom member is moved forward. The bottom member is moved backward from the closed state in which the forward movement is performed toward the rear, and the opening control is performed to open the special winning opening, which is the winning area.

Below the special variable winning ball device 7, there are provided a special variable winning ball device 17 forming a special winning port for a small hit, and a variable winning ball device 6B having a second starting winning port, as shown in FIG. As shown in, the special variable winning ball device 17 is arranged on the left side, and the variable winning ball device 6B is arranged adjacent to the right side on the right side. These special variable winning ball device 17 and variable winning ball device 6B extend in the left-right direction in a slightly inclined state, and a plate-shaped bottom member formed as the bottom surface of the flow path through which the game ball flows down in the front-back direction. By moving the ball back and forth, a special winning opening or a second starting winning opening located below the bottom member allows the game ball to win a prize (also called an open state) and the game ball cannot win a prize. Say). The special variable winning ball device 17 is a small hit game state that occurs when a predetermined display result (small hit design) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. The bottom member is moved backward from the closed state in which the forward movement is performed forward, and the opening control is performed to open the special winning opening, which is the winning area. Further, the variable winning ball device 6B, when the normal symbol display device 20 hits and displays the symbol, the bottom member is moved backward from the closed state in which the bottom member is moved forward toward the front, The opening control for opening the second starting winning opening, which is the winning area, is executed.

In this example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed to have the same structure. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the special variable winning ball device 7 is formed in such a manner that the bottom surface member is slightly inclined from the upper left to the lower right, so that the game ball dropped on the special variable winning ball device 7 is If the special variable winning ball device 7 is in the closed state, the special variable winning ball device 7 moves on the special variable winning ball device 7 from the upper left to the lower right, and falls on the variable winning ball device 6B below it.

Further, in this example, the special variable winning ball device 17 is slightly larger than the variable winning ball device 6B. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed such that the bottom surface members are slightly inclined from the upper right to the lower left, so the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B are variable. If the special variable winning ball device 17 or the variable winning ball device 6B is closed, the game ball on the winning ball device 6B moves from the upper right to the lower left on the special variable winning ball device 17 or the variable winning ball device 6B. Go. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, since the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B are arranged adjacent to each other, the special variable winning ball device 7 does not win the special variable winning ball device 6B. If the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B is moved backward and the second starting winning port is in the open state, the gaming ball dropped to the second starting winning port is a special variable winning ball. The game ball does not flow toward the device 17. On the other hand, if the second start winning hole is not open, the game ball moves on the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B and is guided to the special variable winning ball device 17. At this time, if the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device 17 is moved backward and the special winning opening is open, the gaming ball wins the special winning opening. Furthermore, if the special winning opening is not in the open state, the game ball moves on the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device 17 and drops to the out opening as it is.

Further, in this example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed with a plurality of restricting pieces for reducing the flow-down speed of the game balls flowing down on the bottom surface member. There is. In the present example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 6B are provided with the restriction pieces, so that the game flows downward from the upper left to the lower right or from the upper right to the lower left. The flow direction of the game ball is changed so that the ball meanders with the movement of the front-back direction component, and the time required for the flow is delayed compared to the case without the restriction piece.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 1, the special variable winning ball device 17 is arranged on the left side, and the variable winning ball device 6B is arranged on the right side. The bottom member of the ball device 6B is formed so as to gently incline from the upper right to the lower left, and when the bottom member is not retracted and is in the closed state, the variable winning ball device 6B is changed to the special variable winning ball device. Since the game balls are configured to flow toward 17, in this sense, the variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the upstream side, and the special variable winning ball device 17 is provided on the downstream side. Can be said.

Inside the special winning opening, there is provided a switch (first count switch 23) capable of detecting a game ball winning in the special winning opening. When the game ball is detected by the first count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball based on the detection information. Therefore, when the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to be opened and the special winning opening is opened, it becomes a state advantageous to the player. On the other hand, if the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to be closed and the special winning opening is closed, the player cannot pass the game ball into the special winning opening to get the winning ball. You will be at a disadvantage.

Inside the special winning opening, a switch (second count switch 24) capable of detecting the game ball winning in the special winning opening is provided. When a game ball is detected by the second count switch 24, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball based on the detection information. Here, when the game ball passes (enters) the special winning opening that is opened in the special variable winning ball device 17, the number of the winning balls is smaller than that when the gaming ball wins the big winning opening, For example, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls pass (enter) other prize holes such as the first start prize hole 1 and the second start prize hole. Therefore, if the special variable winning a prize ball device 17 is controlled to be opened and the special winning opening is opened, it becomes a state advantageous to the player. On the other hand, if the special variable winning a prize ball device 17 is controlled to be closed and the special winning opening is closed, the player cannot pass the game ball to the special winning opening to get the prize ball. You will be at a disadvantage.

Further, in the second starting winning opening, a second starting opening switch 22B capable of detecting the game ball winning in the second starting winning opening is provided. When the game ball is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B, a predetermined number (one) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball based on the detection information.

Hereinafter, the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be collectively referred to as a starting winning opening or a starting opening.

In this pachinko gaming machine 1, the passage gate 41, the special variable winning ball device 7 (large winning hole), the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning port), and the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning port). Is provided on the right side of the game area, so when the player is in a big hit game or in the KT state (so-called small hit time), the player aims at the right side of the game area (a so-called right hitting operation). )I do.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four places on the left and right lower sides of the game area), there are provided general winning openings 10 which are always kept open by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when one of the general winning openings 10 is entered, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

The entry of a game ball into each prize hole including the general prize hole 10 is also referred to as a "prize". In particular, winning at the starting openings (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1), a normal symbol display device 20 is provided. As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 includes a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs a variable display of a normal symbol as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from the special symbol. Ordinary symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such variable display of ordinary symbols is also called a universal symbol game.

Above the normal symbol display device 20, a universal symbol holding display device 25C is provided. The universal figure pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of stored universal figure pending memories, which is the number of universal figure pending games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, since the variation display of the normal symbol is executed based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41, the passage gate 41 plays a role as a normal starting area. However, even when the big hit symbol is derived and displayed, since the big hit game state is entered based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the pass gate 41, the pass gate 41 also plays a role as an operation area. Therefore, the passage gate 41 is configured as a dual-purpose gate that serves as both a normal starting region and an operating region.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill and a large number of obstacle nails that change the flow direction and speed of the game ball. At the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an outlet for taking in the game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at upper and left upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a game effect frame LED 9 is provided in the periphery of the game area. ..

At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a hit ball operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward a game area by a hit ball launching device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, a gaming ball paid out as a prize ball or a gaming ball rented out by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be supplied to a ball striking device. ) Is provided with a hit ball supply plate (upper plate). Below the upper plate, there is provided a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, a stick controller 31A that can be held by a player and tilted is attached. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the action (operation etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of game progression)
In this pachinko gaming machine 1, when the gaming state is the normal state, it is advantageous for the player to perform a shooting operation (so-called left hitting operation) aiming at the left side of the game area. When the player makes a left-hand hitting operation by rotating the hitting ball operation handle 30 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the player, and the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol display The first special figure game by the device 4A is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters into the starting winning opening (winning prize) during the period during execution of the special drawing game, or during the period when it is controlled to the big hitting game state or the small hitting game state described later (starting winning occurs, If the special drawing game based on the starting prize cannot be immediately executed), the special drawing game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the first special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later.) as a fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "big hit". .. Also, if a special symbol different from the jackpot symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") is stopped and displayed, "missing" is indicated. Even in the first special figure game, the small hit symbol may be stopped and displayed at an extremely low rate, and the small hit symbol may be "small hit".

After the display result in the first special figure game becomes "big hit", the big hit game state is controlled as an advantageous state advantageous to the player, provided that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41.

In the big hit game state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is one of the elapse timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls entering the special winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It continues until the earlier of the two. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the special winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also referred to as an open upper limit period hereinafter. In this way, one cycle in which the special winning opening is opened is called a round (round game). In the big hit game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until a predetermined upper limit number (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the big hit game state, the player can get the prize ball by entering the game ball into the special winning opening. Therefore, the big hit game state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the big hit game state, and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous for the player.

In addition, the "big hit" is set to the big hit type. For example, multiple types of opening mode (number of rounds and opening upper limit period) of the special winning opening and a plurality of types of game states after the big hit game state (normal state, probability variation state (high probability state), KT state, high base state, etc.) are prepared. The jackpot type is set according to these. As the big hit type, a big hit type that can obtain a large number of prize balls, or a big hit type that has few prize balls or almost no prize balls may be provided.

After the big hit game state is finished, it may be controlled to a certain variation state, a KT state, or a high base state according to the big hit type.

In the probability variation state (probability variation state), the probability variation control is performed so that the probability that the display result is "big hit" is higher than that in the normal state. The probability variation state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because it is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol is improved and a "big hit" is likely to occur.

In the KT state, the KT control that is more likely to make a small hit than in the normal state is executed. With this pachinko gaming machine 1, since a certain amount of prize balls can be obtained even in the small hitting game state, compared to the large hitting game state, a small number of prize balls can be obtained, but this is an advantageous state for the player.

In the high base state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special map change time (period during which the special map changes) compared to the normal state is executed (time saving state), and it is called "Public hit" in the normal figure game. By increasing the probability of becoming higher than in the normal state, the control that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening (high opening control, high base control) is also executed. The high base state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is an advantageous state for the player.

The probability change state, the KT state, and the high base state are continued until one of the ending conditions such as that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times and the next big hit game state has been started is satisfied. To do. The condition that the end condition is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as the number of times cut (variation of the number of times probability).

The normal state is an advantageous state such as a big hit game state that is advantageous to the player, a game state other than a special state such as a probability change state, a KT state, and a high base state, and the display result in the special figure game is "big hit". The pachinko gaming machine 1 such as the probability of becoming the same as the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the initial setting state (for example, when the system is reset, when the predetermined return processing is not executed after power-on) is controlled. It is in a state of being.

When the big hit game is finished and the game state is controlled to the probability change state, the KT state, or the high base state, it is advantageous for the player to carry out a firing operation (right hitting operation) aiming at the right side of the game area. When the player makes a right-hand hitting operation by rotating the hitting ball operation handle 30 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the player and the gaming ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal figure game by the normal symbol display device 20 is started. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the previous execution period of the general education game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but cannot immediately execute the general education game based on the passage) , The universal figure game based on the passage is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this ordinary figure game, if a specific ordinary symbol (a symbol for a regular symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the ordinary symbol is "per ordinary symbol". On the other hand, as a fixed ordinary symbol, if a normal symbol other than the regular symbol (normal symbol lost symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "normal symbol lost". When the "universal figure hit" is reached, the opening control is performed to open the variable winning ball device 6B for a predetermined period (the second start winning port is opened).

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In the second special figure game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later.) as a fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "big hit", If a predetermined special symbol different from the big hit symbol (small hit symbol, for example, "2") is stopped and displayed, it is a "small hit". In addition, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the symbol is "missing".

After the display result in the second special figure game is "big hit", the big hit game state is controlled as an advantageous state advantageous to the player, provided that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41. After the display result in the second special figure game is "small hit", the small hit game state is controlled.

In the small hitting game state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened in a predetermined opening manner. As with the big hit type, a small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

After the small hit game state is over, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the special figure game display result is "small hit" is continuously controlled (however, "small hit" occurs If the special figure game at that time is the predetermined number of special figure games in the above-mentioned number of times cut, the game state is naturally changed).

The gaming state may change based on that the game ball has passed a specific area (for example, a specific area in the special winning opening) during the big hit gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to be in a certain change state after the big hit game state.

(Progress, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game or enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The effect will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. However, in addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and/or a point of the frame LED 9 is displayed. It may be performed by turning on/off the light, the operation of the movable body 32, or the like.

As effects to be executed according to the progress of the game, in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first special figure game is displayed. In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special figure game and the second special figure game, the fixed decorative symbol (a combination of three decorative symbols) becomes the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol. ) Is also stopped (derived).

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, with the reach mode, when the decorative design stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the big hit combination described later, the decorative design which is not yet stopped and displayed is variably displayed. Is an aspect that continues.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the proportion of the display result (the display result of the special drawing game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern) that is a “big hit” (also called a big hit reliability or a big hit expectation degree) according to the effect mode. Different types of reach effects are executed. Reach productions include, for example, normal reach and super-reach, which has higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern which is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decorative design on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration) The display result of the variable display of the pattern is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative pattern (for example, "7") is stopped and displayed together on a predetermined effective line in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. ..

In the case of "probability variation jackpot" that is controlled to the probability variation state after the jackpot gaming state is finished, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7", etc.) are also stopped and displayed, and after the jackpot gaming state is transformed to the probability variation state. In the case of "uncertain variation big hit (normal big hit)" that is not controlled, an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6" etc.) may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, the odd decorative pattern is also referred to as a probability variation design, and the even decoration pattern is also referred to as a non-probability variation design (normal design). After the reach mode is achieved with the non-probability variation pattern, the promotion effect that finally becomes the “probability variation jackpot” may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", as a display result of the variable display of the decorative design on the screen of the image display device 5, a fixed decorative design (for example, "" 1 3 5”) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is “small hit”). As an example, the decorative patterns forming the chances are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. It should be noted that the display result of the special figure game is "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state) and when it is "small hit". , A common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special drawing game is “miss”, the variable display mode of the decorative design does not become the reach mode, but as the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (“ (Also referred to as "non-reach lost") may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is "non-reach lost"). Further, when the display result is "miss", after the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a predetermined reach combination other than the jackpot combination ("reach miss"). (Also referred to as) fixed display may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative design is "reach lost").

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect that gives a notice of the jackpot reliability is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. The notice production includes a notice production that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display being executed and a look-ahead notice production that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display in which execution is suspended). As the prefetching notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the normal mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, once the decorative design is temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative design, and then the variable display is resumed, one variable display can be simulated like multiple variable display. You may make it perform a pseudo continuous production.

Even during the big hit game state, a big hit mid-game production for notifying the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit performance, an effect for notifying the number of rounds or a promotion effect showing that the value of the big hit game state is improved may be executed. In addition, during the small hitting game state, the small hitting production which notifies the small hitting game state is executed. In addition, during the small hitting game state, in some big hitting type (the big hitting type of the big hitting game state of the form similar to the small hitting game state, for example, the big hitting type which makes the following game state the high-precision state) big hitting game By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not be able to know whether the present is in the small hitting game state or the big hitting game state. In such a case, by performing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high-accuracy state and the low-precision state. May be.

Further, for example, when the special drawing game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with, for example, a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a sound control board 13, an LED control board 14, a relay board 15, etc. as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and progresses in the above-mentioned game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of special figure game (including hold management), execution of general figure game (including hold management), big hit It has a function of controlling a gaming state, a small hitting gaming state, a gaming state, etc. The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described below, effect control commands described below, data such as various tables referred to when making various determinations described below) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as a main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are saved for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped partially or entirely. Alternatively, all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts the numerical value data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game in an updatable manner. The game random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 is, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, and various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display device 20, first hold) An output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the universal figure hold indicator 25C, and the like, and an output port for transmitting the signal.

The switch circuit 110 includes various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, starting opening switch (first starting opening switch 22A and second starting opening switch 22B), count switch (first counting switch 23 and second counting switch 24). )) is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100 by taking in a detection signal (a detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on due to a game ball passing or entering). The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 receives a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81, the solenoid 82, the solenoid 83, etc.) from the game control microcomputer 100 for the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory and the special winning opening door. It is transmitted to the solenoid 82 and the solenoid 83 for the special winning opening.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as a part of the control of the progress of the game, production control board (command for designating (notifying) the progress status of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of the special figure game (including a big hit type), a variation pattern used when the special figure game is executed (details will be described later). )), the status of the game (for example, the start and end of variable display, the status of opening of the special winning opening, the occurrence of winnings, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the command for specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board that is independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, It has a function of executing various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery.

On the effect control board 12, an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125 are mounted.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121, thereby performing a process together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above-described function of the effect control board 12, and an effect to be executed). (Including the determination of). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 is used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the effect execution based on a detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected, and is a signal that appropriately indicates the operation content). The control unit 123 may be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display the effect image by supplying the image display device 5 with a video signal according to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further outputs a sound in synchronization with the display of the effect image and turns on/off the frame LED 9 and the right-handing notification LED 37. Therefore, the sound control signal (a signal that specifies a sound to be output) is voice-controlled. The LED signal is supplied to the substrate 13 or an LED signal (a signal designating the lighting/extinguishing state of the LED) is supplied to the LED control substrate 14. In addition, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L, 8R, drives the speakers 8L, 8R based on the sound designating signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designating signal from the speakers 8L, 8R. Let

The LED control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the frame LED 9 and the right-handing notification LED 37, drives the frame LED 9 and the right-handing notification LED 37 based on the LED signal, and specifies the LED signal. The frame LED 9 and the right hitting notification LED 37 are turned on/off. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls audio output and turning on/off of the LED.

It should be noted that the production control CPU 120 executes audio output, control of turning on/off the LED (supply of sound designation signal or LED signal, etc.), control of the movable body 32 (supply of signal for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do it.

The random number circuit 124 updatable counts the numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by the effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 transmits, for example, an input port for receiving the production control command transmitted from the main board 11 and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, LED signal). And an output port of.

Substrates other than the main substrate 11, such as the effect control substrate 12, the sound control substrate 13, and the LED control substrate 14, are also referred to as sub substrates. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function like the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operation of the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes the game control main processing. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets an interrupt prohibition (step S1). Then, necessary initial setting is performed (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, internal device (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.) register settings, settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on the power supply board, for example. When the power is turned on with the clear switch turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), the initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets an initial value in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control command is received, the effect control CPU 120 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized, for example, in the image display device 5.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power cut), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop time process immediately before the pachinko gaming machine 1 stops operating due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop process, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection processing includes processing for adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.) for advancing the game, the state of the backup flag and an error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (performed by using the error detection code) and determines whether or not the data is normal (step). S5). In step S5, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data at the time when the power supply is stopped, for example, based on the parity bit and the checksum. If it is determined that they match, the data in the RAM 102 is determined to be normal.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state at the time of stopping the power supply, so the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply was stopped. In the restoration process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents of the RAM 102 (contents of backed up data). As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the variation of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

And CPU103 transmits the production control command which directs recovery from power failure to production control board 12 (Step S7). Along with this, a production control command for designating a backed-up game state before power interruption, and a production control for designating the display result of the special figure game being executed when the special figure game is being executed. You may make it transmit a command. These commands can use the same commands as the commands set for transmission in the special symbol process processing described later. When the production control CPU 120 receives the production control command that specifies the time of recovery from power failure, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that recovery from power failure has been performed or is being recovered from power failure. The screen is displayed to The effect control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

After finishing the restoration process or the initialization process and transmitting the production control command to the production control board 12, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is taken at regular intervals (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and interrupts are permitted (step S12). ). Then, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to execute the predetermined switch process, so that the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port are performed via the switch circuit 110. Whether or not the detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B, the first count switch 23, and the second count switch 24 is determined (step S21). Then, by executing a predetermined main side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be issued if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots) supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1, starting information (starting) Data such as information indicating the number of winnings and the like, probability variation information (information indicating the number of times the probability has changed, etc.) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes the first special symbol process process (step S25A). The CPU 103 executes the first special symbol process process for each timer interrupt, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the first special symbol game, controlling the big hit game state and the small hit game state, and controlling the game state. (See below for details). Further, the CPU 103 executes the second special symbol process process (step S25B). The CPU 103 executes the second special symbol process process for each timer interrupt, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the second special symbol game, controlling the big hit game state and the small hit game state, and controlling the game state. It In addition, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, it is possible to simultaneously perform the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol in parallel.

Following the first special symbol process process and the second special symbol process process, the normal symbol process process is executed (step S26). CPU103 executes normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41) execution and hold management, It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "universal figure hit". The ordinary figure game is executed by driving the ordinary symbol display device 20, and the number of ordinary figure reservations is displayed by turning on the ordinary figure hold indicator 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when an electric power interruption occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, etc. may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set the transmission of the effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

Although not shown in FIG. 4, in the game control timer interrupt process, a test terminal for outputting a test signal for making it possible to confirm the control state of the game machine outside the game machine. Processing is also executed. In the test terminal process, the CPU 103 performs control to output a test signal (right-handed test signal) that can specify that the right-handed operation is being performed. Specifically, in the test terminal processing, the CPU 103 performs control to output a right-handed test signal during the big hit game, the small hit game based on the variable display of the second special symbol, and the KT state. On the other hand, in the test terminal processing, the CPU 103 does not perform the control of outputting the right-hand hitting test signal during the small hitting game based on the variable display of the first special symbol.

FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S25A shown in FIG. 4 as the first special symbol process processing. In the first special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a first start winning determination process (step S101A).

In the first start winning a prize determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning to the first starting prize hole, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the first hold storage number is executed. When the start winning award to the first start winning a prize mouth occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the big hit type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored in the first holding storage buffer provided in the RAM 102 as holding information. To be done. In addition, a process of pre-reading a display result or a variation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After storing the hold information and the first hold storage number, the transmission for transmitting the effect control command for designating the determination result such as the occurrence of the start winning, the first hold storage number, and the look-ahead determination on the effect control board 12. Settings are made. The effect control command at the time of the start winning set to be transmitted in this way is, for example, effect control from the main board 11 by executing the command control processing of step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the first special symbol process processing is completed. It is transmitted to the substrate 12.

After executing the first start winning a prize determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110A to S121A in accordance with the value of the first special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process of the first special symbol process process (steps S110A to S121A), a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The first special symbol normal process of step S110A is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In the first special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game, based on the presence or absence of the hold information. Further, in the first special symbol normal process, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether the display result of the first special symbol or the decorative symbol is "big hit" or "small hit" and "big hit" In this case, the jackpot type is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the first special symbol normal processing, a fixed special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. .. After that, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the first special symbol normal process ends.

When making various decisions based on the random number values, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values that are compared with random number values are assigned to decision results) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The first variation pattern setting process of step S111A is executed when the value of the first special figure process flag is "1". In this first variation pattern setting process, a variation pattern is determined using a random number value for determining the variation pattern, based on a pre-determined result of whether or not the display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. It includes a process of determining which one. In the first fluctuation pattern setting process, when the fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the first fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special figure game (special figure change time) (also the execution time of variable display of the decorative pattern), the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern (whether reach or not), the variable display of the decorative pattern. Is specified, and is also referred to as a variable display pattern.

The first special symbol variation process of step S112A is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is "2". In this first special symbol variation processing, the setting process for changing the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A, and the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the first special symbol is measured. It includes processing to do. Further, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the first special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the first special symbol variation process ends. To do.

In this example, since the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel, for example, the first special symbol variation process (step S112A), the first When the special symbols are being displayed in a variable manner, there may be small hits in the variable display of the second special symbols which are controlled by a small hit game. In this case, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) determines whether or not the small hit game is in progress (specifically, the value of the second special figure process flag is the second small hit). Pre-opening process-determines whether or not the value is equivalent to the second small hit end processing), if during the small hit game, the value of the first special figure process flag corresponds to the first special symbol variation processing Do not change from the value, and if it is not in the small hit game, it is possible to update the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the next first special symbol stop process. By performing such control, the variable display of the first special symbol is interrupted during the small hit game based on the variable display of the second special symbol, and the variable display of the first special symbol is restarted after the end of the small hit game. Control to do so. Incidentally, not only such control, for example, during the small hit game based on the variation display of the second special symbol, the process of measuring the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the first special symbol is interrupted (of the timer The update may be interrupted).

Further, for example, the small hit ending period as the small hit end processing period may be configured to be different depending on the gaming state. For example, in a normal state, if configured to suspend the variable display of the first special symbol, the suspension period of the variable display of the first special symbol becomes long, and the execution period and the suspension period of the variable display of the first special symbol If the difference becomes large, it is necessary to absorb the interruption period due to the stop of swinging of the decorative pattern, etc., resulting in a discomfort for the player. Therefore, in the normal state, it is desirable that the small hit ending period be shorter than that in the KT state (first KT state, second KT state). In this case, for example, the small hit ending period may be 0.5 seconds in the normal state, while the small hit ending period may be 3 seconds in the KT state.

Further, in the case of configuring as described above, for example, in the first KT state, since the game ball is practically difficult to win in the small hit control and no special effect is produced, the small hit ending period is shorter than that in the second KT state. It may be configured to do so. On the other hand, in the second KT state, the game ball is easy to win in the small hit control and an effect for emphasizing the small hit control is executed. Therefore, the small hit ending period may be made longer than that in the first KT state. .. In this case, for example, the small hitting ending period may be 0.5 seconds in the first KT state, while the small hitting ending period may be 3 seconds in the second KT state.

Further, as for the small hit fanfare period as the small hit opening pretreatment period, the length of the period may be changed depending on the gaming state, as in the above small hit ending period.

The first special symbol stop process of step S113A is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is "3". In this first special symbol stop process, to stop the variation of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A, to stop display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the first special symbol It includes the process of setting. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "9". If the display result is "miss", the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "Small hit" or "Loss", the game state is updated when the probability variation state, the KT state, or the high base state is controlled, and when the end of the number of cuts is satisfied. .. When the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated, the first special symbol stop process ends.

The first gate passage waiting process of step S114A is executed when the value of the fourth special process flag is "4". In the first gate passage waiting process, control for waiting passage of the game ball to the passage gate 41 is performed. When the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 41 is detected, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "5".

The first jackpot opening preprocessing of step S115A is executed when the value of the first special figure process flag is "5". In this first big hit opening preprocessing, based on the fact that the display result is "big hit", etc., processing for starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state and setting for opening the big winning opening, etc. It is included. When the special winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an upper limit opening period for opening the special winning opening and an upper limit number of executions of the round are set according to which the big hit type is. When these settings are completed, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "6", and the first jackpot opening preprocessing is completed.

The first big hit opening process of step S116A is executed when the value of the first special figure process flag is "6". This first big hit opening process is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time after the special winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 23, and the like. , And a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the special winning opening from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the special winning opening to the closed state, after performing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "7". Then, the process during the opening of the first big hit is ended.

The first jackpot opening post-processing of step S117A is executed when the value of the first special figure process flag is "7". In the first big hit opening post-processing, processing for determining whether or not the number of executions of the round in which the special winning opening is opened has reached the set upper limit number of executions, and when the upper limit execution number is reached, the big hit It includes processing for making settings for ending the gaming state. When the round execution count has not reached the upper limit execution count, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to “6”, while when the round execution count reaches the upper limit execution count, the first special feature process flag is updated. The value of the figure process flag is updated to "8". When the value of the first special figure process flag is updated, the first jackpot opening post-processing is ended.

The first big hit ending process of step S118A is executed when the value of the first special figure process flag is "8". This first big hit ending process corresponds to the process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as the effect operation for notifying the end of the big hit game state is executed, or the end of the big hit game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting the probability variation control, the KT control, and the high base control. When such a setting is made, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the first big hit ending process ends.

The first small hit opening preprocessing of step S119A is executed when the value of the first special figure process flag is "9". The first small hit opening pre-processing includes processing for setting the special winning opening to the open state in the small hit game state based on the display result of "small hit". .. At this time, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the first small hitting opening pretreatment is ended.

The first small hit opening process in step S120A is executed when the value of the first special figure process flag is "10". This first small hit opening process is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the special winning opening and the timing of returning the special winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing for determining whether or not When the special winning opening is returned to the closed state to reach the end timing of the small hitting game state, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "11", and the first small hitting open process ends.

The first small hit ending process of step S121A is executed when the value of the first special figure process flag is "11". The first small hitting end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hitting game state is executed. Here, when the small hit game state ends, the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hitting game state has elapsed, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the first small hitting end processing is ended.

The process executed in the second special symbol process process (step S25B) is the same as the process executed in the first special symbol process process (step S25A). That is, in the first special symbol process process described in FIG. 5, if "first" is read as "second", the second special symbol process process will be described. Further, each random number value extracted in the first start winning determination process of the second special symbol process process (step S25B) is stored in the second holding storage buffer provided in the RAM 102 as holding information.

In this example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel, so, for example, the second special symbol variation process is performed and the variation of the second special symbol is changed. When it is being displayed, it may be a small hit in the variable display of the first special symbol and may be controlled to a small hit game. In this case, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) determines whether or not the small hit game is in progress (specifically, the value of the first special figure process flag is the first small hit). Pre-opening process to determine whether the value is equivalent to the first small hit end processing), if the small hit game is during, the value of the second special figure process flag is equivalent to the second special symbol variation processing Do not change from the value, and if it is not a small hit game, it is possible to update the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the next second special symbol stop process. By performing such control, during the small hit game based on the variable display of the first special symbol, the variable display of the second special symbol is interrupted, and the variable display of the second special symbol is restarted after the end of the small hit game. Control to do so. Not only such control, for example, during the small hit game based on the variation display of the first special symbol, the process of measuring the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the second special symbol is interrupted (of the timer The update may be interrupted).

Incidentally, with regard to the small hit control based on the variable display of the second special symbol, the length of the small hit fanfare period or the small hit ending period may be changed depending on the game state.

(Main operation of the production control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 6. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122 and set various initial values, and to the effect control board 12. Register settings of the installed CTC (counter/timer circuit) are performed. Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control processing, control for performing an initial operation of the movable body 32 such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation are executed.

Then, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state each time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on the CTC register setting, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and stands by.

On the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated each time a predetermined time has elapsed. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt disable, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disable state is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, a performance control command is fetched from a predetermined input port of the input ports included in the I/O 125 that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command fetched at this time is stored in the effect control command receiving buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the production control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to the off state (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are read. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or the RAM 122 is stored in the RAM 122 so that the effect control command received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process processing or the like. The reception flag provided is turned on. When the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the game state.

After the command analysis process is executed in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an operation of displaying an effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, an operation of outputting audio from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation of a decorative light emitting body such as the frame LED 9 and a decorative LED, and driving of the movable body 32. Controls for operating various effect devices such as actions are performed. Further, with respect to the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process processing of step S76, effect random number updating processing is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by software. Then, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be executed before returning to the processing in step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice production are performed based on the production control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, the processing for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any one of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative symbols in the image display device 5, based on whether or not a command or the like specifying start of variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. are included. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 is started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting processing, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (fixed decorative pattern), the variable display mode of the decorative pattern, the reach effect and various The presence/absence of execution of various effects such as a notice effect, its mode, and execution start timing are determined. Then, the effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result or the like is set. Then, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is ended. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decorative pattern in response to the instruction to start the variable display of the decorative pattern.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In the effect display during variable display, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display an effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. Or driving the movable body 32, outputting voice or sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, and sending a command (illumination signal) to the LED control board 14. Various effect control is performed during variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on/off/blinking the frame LED 9 and the decorative LED by output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the variable display end of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating that the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed from the main board 11 is received. Corresponding to what has been done, the fixed decorative design which is the display result of the decorative design is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the variable display effect effect processing ends.

The special figure winning waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "3". In the special figure winning waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the effect control command for designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state has been received from the main board 11. When a production control command for designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command designates the start of the big hit game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6." Update to ". On the other hand, if the command designates the start of the small hitting game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4" which is a value corresponding to the effect processing during the small hitting. Further, when the waiting time for receiving the command is not received without receiving the command designating the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is “miss”. Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0” which is the initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure hit waiting process ends.

The effect process during the small hit in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is "4". In the effect processing during the small hit, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect contents in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set contents. . Further, in the small hitting production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to end the small winning game state, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small winning finish production. The value is updated to a certain "5", and the effect processing during the small hit is finished.

The small hit end production process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "5". In the small hitting end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value, and the small hit end effect processing is ended.

The big hit midfield effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big hit mid effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect contents in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the setting contents. Further, in the big hit midfield effect process, the value of the effect control process flag is a value corresponding to the ending effect process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating termination of the big hit game state from the main board 11. It updates to "7" and finishes the big hit midfield effect process.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the big hit game state, and performs various kinds of effect control of the ending effect at the end of the big hit game state based on the setting contents. Run. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value, and the ending effect process is ended.

(Variation of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, but encloses the game medium and gives a score based on the occurrence of a prize. It may be an enclosed game machine.

What is displayed during variable display of the special symbol is only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-"), and variable display may be performed by repeating display and extinction of the symbol. Further, even when the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic description, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but a predetermined number of bets is set by inserting a medal, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, A slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to a player (for example, a big bonus when the stop symbol combination becomes a specific symbol combination when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by The present invention can be applied to a slot machine in which one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as bonus) are installed.

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form distributed and provided to a computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a removable recording medium, and the computer device or the like in advance. It may be distributed by being installed in the storage device included in. Further, the program and data for implementing the present invention may be distributed by being downloaded from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The game execution mode is not limited to that executed by mounting a removable recording medium, but can also be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in the internal memory or the like. Alternatively, the hardware resources of other devices may be directly used on the network connected via a communication line. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, one of the expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of the effect (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) is “0%”. May be included. For example, it is also included that one is a ratio of "0%" and the other is a ratio of "100%" or a ratio less than "100%".

[Explanation on Characteristic Part 21TM]
Next, the characteristic part 21TM will be described. Various control boards such as a main board 11, a performance control board 12, and a terminal board (information output board) 21TM016 as shown in FIG. 8A are mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, a launch control board, and an interface board are arranged on the back surface of the game board 2 or the like of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 2 described above, on the main board 11, the first starting port switch 22A and the second starting port switch 22B, and the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, etc. Various parts are connected, and various effect devices such as the speakers 8L and 8R and the frame LED 9 are connected to the effect control board 12, but these are omitted in FIG. 8-1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side. As shown in FIG. 8-3, the main board 11 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 while being housed in the board case 21TM201, and progresses the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Various circuits for controlling are installed. The main board 11 is mainly intended for a random number setting function used in a special figure game, a function for inputting a signal from a switch or the like arranged at a predetermined position, and a sub-side control board including an effect control board 12 and the like. It has a function of outputting a control command as an example of the command information as a control signal and transmitting it, a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer, and the like. Moreover, the main board 11 performs lighting/extinguishing control of each LED (for example, segment LED) which comprises the 1st special symbol display device 4A and the 2nd special symbol display device 4B, and the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol. The variable display of a predetermined display symbol such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol display 20 and controlling the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 20 by turning on/off/coloring the normal symbol display 20. It also has a control function.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-3, the main board 11 is provided with a display monitor 21TM029 that can be visually recognized from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The display monitor 21TM029 displays various winning information on winning. It also has a display function. A display changeover switch 21TM030 is provided on the left side of the display monitor 21TM029, and the information displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 can be changed over by operating the display changeover switch 21TM030.

The main board 11 incorporates various signals such as a power-off signal, a clear signal, and a reset signal in addition to the detection signals from the game control microcomputer 100 and various switches for detecting the game ball, for example. An information output circuit 112 for outputting various signals such as a security signal from the switch circuit 110 transmitting to 100 and the terminal board 21TM016 is mounted.

The main substrate 11 shown in FIG. 8-1 is enclosed in a substrate case 21TM201 made of a transparent synthetic resin material as shown in FIG. 8-3, and the display monitor 21TM029 is provided in the center of the main substrate 11. (For example, 7 segments) are arranged, and a display changeover switch 21TM030 is arranged on the right side of the display monitor 21TM029. The display monitor 21TM029 and the display changeover switch 21TM030 are arranged on the front side when the main board 11 is viewed. A lock switch 21TM051 (see FIG. 8-1) for switching to a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode described later is provided in the lower center of the back surface of the main board 11. The main board 11 cannot be visually recognized in the state where the gaming machine frame 3 is not opened. Therefore, the front side when visually recognizing the main board 11 is the back surface side of the game board 2 in the state where the gaming machine frame 3 is opened. It is the front when viewed, and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front surface when visually recognizing the main board 11 and the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

In addition, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), each winning opening (big winning opening, second starting winning opening, first starting winning opening, first to fourth general winning opening, hereinafter, "entry area" (Also referred to as) the number of game balls entering the game, and various prize information such as the consecutive ratio and the winning combination is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029, and the prize information is displayed. By doing so, it is possible to confirm various winning information such as consecutive ratios and winning ratios after installation at the game hall. That is, on the maker side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is usual to design the gaming board surface so that the gaming balls enter the general winning opening at a predetermined frequency (pass the test). In addition, when conducting the test, it is confirmed whether or not the game ball has entered the general winning opening at a predetermined frequency. Furthermore, after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed, it is confirmed what kind of adjustment has been made, and as a result of the adjustment, whether the game ball has entered the general winning opening as often as designed. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to recognize what kind of adjustment was made in the pachinko gaming machine 1 after the installation.

Further, the power supply board is enclosed in a board case made of a transparent synthetic resin material, and set values such as a winning probability (ball-out rate) of a big hit, which will be described later, are changed on the lower right side of the back surface of the power supply board. A clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 that functions as a setting switch for power supply and a power switch 21TM055 are provided. A clerk at the game hall operates the power switch 21TM055 while the power supply voltage is not supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1, so that the main board 11, the performance control board 12, the payout control board 21TM037, and the like are predetermined. Operating voltage is supplied. Furthermore, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated at the timing when the power switch 21TM055 is operated, a clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100, and initialization processing (RAM clear) described later is performed. Executed. By arranging the power switch 21TM055 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 on the same power supply substrate, the power-on operation and the initialization operation can be easily performed.

The lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 are provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and cannot be operated unless the gaming machine frame 3 that can be opened by a predetermined key operation is opened. Therefore, only a store clerk who possesses a predetermined key can operate it. Further, since the lock switch 21TM051 requires key operation, only the clerk of the game shop who has a key for operating the lock switch 21TM051 can operate it. Further, the lock switch 21TM051 is a switch capable of executing an ON/OFF switching operation by a predetermined key, but is capable of executing the switching operation and executing an operation different from the switching operation (for example, a pushing operation). It may be a possible switch.

The lock switch 21TM051 can maintain the ON state or the OFF state. That is, the lock switch 21TM051 can maintain the ON state or the OFF state even if the force is not applied by the clerk of the game hall or the like. The lock switch 21TM051 has a structure in which the key can be inserted and removed only in the OFF state. According to such a configuration, the clerk at the amusement arcade must turn off the lock switch 21TM051 in order to collect the key, so the clerk at the amusement arcade leaves the lock switch 21TM051 in the ON state. You can prevent it from happening.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 8-3, in the lower part of the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for discharging the gaming balls winning each winning opening and the gaming balls entering the out opening to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A nozzle (exhaust port) is provided, and an outlet switch 21TM070 for detecting a game ball discharged from the pachinko gaming machine 1 (detecting a game ball that has been launched) is provided in the nozzle. ing. The outlet switch 21TM070 is connected to the switch circuit 110.

The control signal transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control command includes, for example, a display control command used to control the image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used to control the voice output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the frame LED 9 and the decoration. It includes an LED control command used to control the lighting operation of the application LED.

FIG. 8-2 is a block diagram showing components related to payout, such as the payout control board 21TM037 and the ball payout device 21TM097. As shown in FIG. 8-2, a payout control microcomputer 21TM370 including a payout control CPU 21TM371 is mounted on the payout control board 21TM037. In this embodiment, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is a one-chip microcomputer and has at least a built-in RAM. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370, a RAM (not shown), a ROM (not shown) storing a payout control program, an I/O port and the like constitute a payout control board 21TM037. That is, the payout control board 21TM037 is realized by a payout control CPU 21TM371, a payout control microcomputer 21TM370 having a RAM and a ROM, and an I/O port. Further, the I/O port may be incorporated in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

The detection signals from the out-of-ball switch 21TM187, the full tank switch 21TM048, and the payout number count switch 21TM301 are input to the I/O port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. In this embodiment, the detection signal from the payout number counting switch 21TM301 is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 and then output to the main board 11 via the I/O port 21TM372a and the output circuit 21TM373B. ..

Further, on the payout control board 21TM037, as shown in FIG. 8-2, a gaming machine frame opening sensor that detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 that supports and fixes the gaming board 2, and the front surface of the gaming board 2 can be opened and closed. A game machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300 including a door frame opening sensor that detects the opening of the glass door frame 3a that is covered with is connected, and various abnormalities are detected based on detection signals output from these sensors. It also has a function to determine the occurrence of (error). The detection signal when the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected and the detection signal when the opening of the glass door frame 3a is detected are input to different terminals, whereby the payout control microcomputer The 21TM370 is capable of distinguishing between the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a.

The detection signal from the payout motor position sensor 21TM295 is input to the I/O port 21TM372e of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. The payout motor position sensor 21TM295 is a sensor including a light emitting element (LED) and a light receiving element for detecting the rotational position of the payout motor 21TM289, and is used for detecting that the game ball is clogged, that is, so-called ball biting. .. In the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 mounted on the payout control board 21TM037, the detection signal from the ball burnout switch 21TM187 indicates the ball burnout state, or the detection signal from the full tank switch 21TM048 indicates the full tank state. Then, the ball payout process is stopped.

Further, when the detection signal from the full tank switch 21TM048 indicates a full state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has a low level with respect to the launch board 21TM090 in order to stop the ball launch from the hitting ball launching device. Output full signal. The firing motor signal to the firing motor 21TM094 output from the AND circuit 21TM091 of the firing board 21TM090 is transmitted from the firing board 21TM090 to the firing motor 21TM094. The full signal from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is input to one of the input sides of the AND circuit 21TM091 mounted on the launch board 21TM090, and the drive signal from the drive signal generation circuit 21TM092 (for driving the launch motor 21TM094) Which is a signal that plays a role of supplying power from the power supply substrate) is input to the other input side of the AND circuit 21TM091. Then, the firing motor signal of the AND circuit 21TM091 is input to the firing motor 21TM094. That is, while the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is outputting a full signal, the output of the firing motor signal to the firing motor 21TM094 is stopped.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has a built-in serial communication circuit 21TM380 for inputting/outputting (transmitting/receiving) signals to/from the game control microcomputer 100 by serial communication. In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 are connected between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 via serial communication circuits 21TM505 and 21TM380. For confirmation, signals (prize ball request signal, reception ACK signal) are exchanged (transmitted/received) at regular intervals (for example, 1 second). That is, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a signal for confirming the connection (a prize ball request signal in this embodiment) at regular intervals via the serial communication circuit 21TM505, and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the award ball request signal from the game control microcomputer 100 is received, transmits a signal (reception ACK signal) to that effect to the game control microcomputer 100. In this embodiment, by placing specific data on the prize ball request signal or the reception ACK signal, the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 are transmitted at the timing of transmitting/receiving the prize ball request signal or the reception ACK signal. It is configured to exchange specific data with. For example, when a winning occurs, the game control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of award balls to be paid out by changing a predetermined bit of the award ball request signal, and the award that has been set. A ball request signal is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the prize ball payout operation is completed, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 sets the data indicating the end of the prize ball by changing the predetermined bit of the received ACK signal, and the received ACK signal having the setting is set. It is transmitted to the control microcomputer 100. In addition, when a predetermined error (error such as ball lending, full tank, out of ball, etc.) occurs, data indicating the content of the error is set by changing a predetermined bit of the received ACK signal, and the setting is made. The received ACK signal thus made is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 sends a prize ball information signal indicating the number of prize balls paid out and a ball lending number signal indicating the number of lent balls to the terminal board (the external terminal board for the frame and the external terminal board for the board) via the output port 21TM372b. (Including and) output to 21TM160. Although a driver circuit is installed outside the output port 21TM372b, it is omitted in FIG. 8-2.

Further, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 outputs an error signal to the error display LED 21TM374 by the 7-segment LED via the output port 21TM372c. Further, a signal for instructing turning on/off is output to the award ball LED 21TM053 and the out-of-ball LED 21TM054 via the output port 21TM372b. A detection signal from the error release switch 21TM375 for releasing the error state is input to the input port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037. The error release switch 21TM375 is used to release the error state by software reset.

Further, the drive signal from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 to the payout motor 21TM289 is transmitted to the payout motor 21TM289 in the payout mechanism portion of the ball payout device 21TM097 via the output port 21TM372a and the relay board 21TM072. Although a driver circuit (motor drive circuit) is installed outside the output port 21TM372a, it is omitted in FIG. 8-3.

A card unit control microcomputer is installed in the card unit 21TM050 installed adjacent to the game machine. Further, the card unit 21TM050 is provided with a usable display lamp, a connecting stand direction indicator, a card insertion display lamp and a card insertion slot. A frequency display LED 21TM060, a ball lendable LED 21TM061, a ball lending switch 21TM062, and a return switch 21TM063 are connected to the interface board (relay board) 21TM066.

From the interface board 21TM066 to the card unit 21TM050, a ball lending switch signal indicating that the ball lending switch 21TM062 has been operated and a return switch signal indicating that the return switch 21TM063 has been operated are given according to the operation of the player. .. Further, the card unit 21TM050 gives a card balance display signal indicating the balance of the prepaid card and a ball lendability display signal to the interface board 21TM066. Between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037, a connection signal (VL signal), a unit operation signal (BRDY signal), a ball lending request signal (BRQ signal), a ball lending completion signal (EXS signal) and a pachinko machine operation signal ( (PRDY signal) is transmitted and received via the input port 21TM372f and the output port 21TM372d. An interface board 21TM066 is interposed between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037. Therefore, a signal such as a connection signal (VL signal) is transmitted and received between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037 via the interface board 21TM066, as shown in FIG. 8-2.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is powered on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 mounted on the payout control board 21TM037 outputs a PRDY signal to the card unit 21TM050. Further, the card unit control microcomputer outputs a VL signal when the power is turned on. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 determines the connected state/unconnected state of the card unit 21TM050 according to the input state of the VL signal. When the card is accepted in the card unit 21TM050 and the ball lending switch is operated to input the ball lending switch signal, the card unit controlling microcomputer outputs a BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037. When a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit control microcomputer outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037.

Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 raises the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050, and when detecting the fall of the BRQ signal from the card unit 21TM050, drives the payout motor 21TM289 to give the player a predetermined number of lending balls. Pay out. Then, when the payout is completed, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 lowers the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050. After that, on condition that the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 is not in the on state, when the payout command signal is received from the game control microcomputer 100, the prize ball payout control is executed.

The power supply voltage AC24V used in the card unit 21TM050 is supplied from the payout control board 21TM037. That is, the power supply from the power supply board to the card unit 21TM050 is performed via the payout control board 21TM037 and the interface board 21TM066. In this example, a fuse for protecting the card unit 21TM050 is provided in the AC24V power supply line for the card unit 21TM050 arranged in the interface board 21TM066, and a voltage not lower than a predetermined voltage is supplied to the card unit 21TM050. Is prevented.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is configured so that the winning probability (ball-out rate) of the big hit changes according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal process of the special symbol process process described later, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the winning probability (ball-out rate) of the jackpot is changed. .. The set value is made up of 6 stages from 1 to 6, where 6 is the highest payout rate, and the smaller the value is in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the lower the payout rate. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is the highest for the player, and as the value becomes smaller in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the advantage becomes gradually lower.

8A to 8F are explanatory diagrams showing the display result determination table corresponding to each set value. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 is set. In each display result determination table, the variable special figure designation buffer is 1 (first), that is, the first special symbol is subject to variable display, and the variable special figure designation buffer is 2 (second). That is, that is, for each of the cases where the second special symbol is subject to variable display, a determination value for a big hit is set.

As shown in FIG. 8-4(A), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 1, if the variable special symbol designation buffer is the first, that is, the first special symbol is the target of variable display. If the set value is "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6", there is a lower probability (1/300) to win the jackpot. ing. Further, if the variation special map designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as when the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, the second special symbol Even when is targeted for variable display, it is adapted to win the big hit with the same probability (1/300) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-4(B), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 2, if the fluctuation special map designation buffer is the first, the setting value is “1”. There is a higher probability (1/280) than in some cases to win the jackpot. Further, if the variation special map designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as when the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, the second special symbol Even when is targeted for variable display, it is adapted to win the big hit with the same probability (1/280) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-4(C), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 3, if the variation special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is “1”, The chances of winning the jackpot are higher than the case of “2” (1/280). Further, if the variation special map designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as when the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, the second special symbol Even when is targeted for variable display, it is adapted to win the big hit with the same probability (1/280) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8D, when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 4, if the variation special map designation buffer is the first, the setting value is “1”, The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/250) than in the case of "2" or "3". Further, if the variation special map designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as when the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, the second special symbol Even when is targeted for variable display, it is adapted to win the big hit with the same probability (1/250) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-4(E), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 5, if the fluctuation special map designation buffer is the first, the setting value is “1”, The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/235) than in the case of “2”, “3”, and “4”. Further, if the variation special map designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as when the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, the second special symbol Even if is targeted for variable display, it is adapted to win the big hit with the same probability (1/235) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-4(F), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 5, if the fluctuation special map designation buffer is the first, the setting value is “1”, The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/220) than in the case of “2”, “3”, “4”, and “5”. Further, if the variation special map designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as when the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, the second special symbol Even when is targeted for variable display, it is adapted to win the big hit with the same probability (1/220) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and determines whether the value of MR1 corresponds to the big hit shown in FIGS. 8-4(A) to (F). If the hit determination value is matched, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (big hit A to big hit F). That is, the jackpot win is determined with a probability according to the set value. The “probability” shown in FIGS. 8-4(A) to (F) indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit. Also, to determine whether to make a big hit, it means to decide whether to control the big hit gaming state, the stop symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B It also means deciding whether or not to make a jackpot design.

Further, in the present embodiment, the CPU 103 is configured to determine whether or not to make a big hit using the display result determination tables shown in FIGS. 8-4(A) to (F). It is provided separately, and the determination of the big hit is performed by using a common table for the case of the variable display of the first special symbol and the case of the variable display of the second special symbol regardless of the variable special symbol designation buffer. Good.

In this embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a total of 6 setting values 1 to 6, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to this. The settable values that can be set to 2, may be 3, 3, 4, 5, or 7 or more.

(Setting suggestion production)
The effect control CPU 120 that has received the setting command can suggest the setting value by executing the effect according to the setting value specified by the setting command. For example, the setting value can be suggested to the player by making the mode of the ending effect executed when the big hit game state ends different depending on the specified setting value. FIGS. 8-5(1), (2), and (3) show examples of setting suggestive effects. 8-5(1) shows an example in which the ending image in the "sunny" mode is selected on the big hit ending screen, and in FIG. 8-5(2), the ending screen in the "cloudy" form is selected on the big hit ending screen. For example, FIG. 8-5(3) shows an example in which the ending image in the “rain” mode is selected on the jackpot end screen. FIG. 8-5(4) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the table for determining the mode of the setting suggestive effect based on the setting value designated by the setting command.

The CPU 103 transmits a setting command for designating a setting value to the effect control CPU 120. Further, the CPU 103, when the jackpot gaming state is over, sends an effect control command for executing an ending effect in the image display device 5 to the effect control CPU 120. The effect control CPU 120 can store the setting value specified by the received setting command in the RAM 102, and determine the ending effect mode based on the stored setting value. For example, based on the effect control command transmitted when the jackpot gaming state is finished, the image display device 5 is stored together with a character (character of "BONUS end") informing that the jackpot gaming state is ended. It is possible to display an ending image in a mode (sunny mode, cloudy mode, rainy mode) determined based on the set value.

In the table shown in FIG. 8-5(4), the setting values designated by the setting command are "1, 2", "3, 4", and "5, 6". , When setting the mode of the setting suggestive effect to the “clear” mode shown in FIG. 8-5(1), when determining to the “cloudy” mode shown in FIG. 8-5(2), and FIG. In the case of determining the “rain” mode shown in 5(3), the determination value of is assigned.

When the setting value designated by the received setting command is “1” or “2”, the effect control CPU 120 suggests the setting of the “fine” mode shown in (1) at a low rate (for example, 20%). It was decided to execute the effect (ending effect), and it was decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) in the "cloudy" mode shown in (2) at a medium ratio (for example, 40%). It is determined to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) in the "rain" mode shown in (3) at a rate of 40% (for example, 40%). Further, when the setting value designated by the received setting command is "3" or "4", the effect control CPU 120 is in the "fine" mode shown in (1) at a low rate (for example, 20%). It is decided to execute the setting suggesting effect (ending effect), and it is decided to execute the setting suggesting effect (ending effect) in the “cloudy” mode shown in (2) at a high rate (for example, 50%), and the medium degree. It is determined to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) in the “rain” mode shown in (3) at a rate (for example, 30%). When the setting value designated by the received setting command is "5" or "6", the effect control CPU 120 has a high rate (for example, 50%) of the "clear" mode shown in (1). It is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect), and it is determined to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) in the "cloudy" mode shown in (2) at a low rate (for example, 20%). It is determined to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) in the “rain” mode shown in (3) at a rate (for example, 30%).

In this way, by varying the determination rate of each mode of the setting suggestion effect according to the set value, the player becomes interested in how the setting suggestion effect is executed, and the setting suggestion effect is performed. The interest of the production can be improved. In this example, the player becomes interested in how the ending effect executed when the jackpot gaming state ends is executed, and in particular, the ending effect is executed in the "sunny" mode. You will expect to be done.

(Process at power-on)
Next, the power-on process will be described.
8-6 to 8-8 are diagrams showing an example of processing executed in the game control microcomputer 100 when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on.

As shown in FIG. 8-6, the CPU 103 of the game controlling microcomputer 100 checks the data in the backup RAM area after the power is turned on (step S21TM4010). In this process, a parity check is performed as a data check.

If the check result is normal (YES in step S21TM4010), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 matches a regular value, for example, 0-5. Is confirmed (step S21TM4020). In this example, as the set values stored in the set value storage area, six numbers 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 are set as normal values, and six-stage set values having different jackpot probabilities are provided. ing. The setting value 0 in this example corresponds to the setting value 1 shown in FIG. 8-4 described above, and the setting value 1 in this example corresponds to the setting value 2 shown in FIG. 8-4 described above. The value 2 corresponds to the setting value 3 shown in FIG. 8-4 described above, the setting value 3 in this example corresponds to the setting value 4 shown in FIG. 8-4 described above, and the setting value 4 in this example is described above. The setting value 5 shown in FIG. 8-4 etc. corresponds to the setting value 5 shown in FIG. 8-4 described above.

Here, in this example, when the pachinko game machine 1 is shipped from the game machine maker (before being installed in the game hall), the value with the lowest jackpot probability among the above-mentioned regular values is set in the set value storage area. (0 in this example) is stored. If the data in the set value storage area is damaged, it may not be a normal value. If the set value is a legal value (YES in step S21TM4020), it is confirmed whether or not the setting change flag is set (step S21TM4030). The setting change flag is set when the mode is changed to the setting change mode described later (step S21TM4580) and is cleared when the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off (step S21TM4720).

If the setting change flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the clear switch (setting change switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S21TM4040).

If the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is ON (YES in step S21TM4040), the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag to 1 (step S21TM4050). The value of the RAM clear flag is a value indicating whether or not it is determined that the RAM clear (initialization of the game state) is executed, and when the value is 1, it is determined that the RAM clear is executed. It has been done. In this example, the RAM clear is not actually executed when the RAM clear flag is set to 1, and when the setting change mode is controlled, the RAM clear is executed after the process related to the setting change mode is completed. Will be done.

The area in which the value of the RAM clear flag is stored is not included in the backup RAM area. Therefore, when the power is cut off, the value of the RAM clear flag is not held, and the value of the RAM clear flag at power restoration is 0 (initial value is not set). The notification that the gaming state is initialized may be performed before the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, and as described later, after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends. It may be performed.

On the other hand, if the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is OFF (NO in step S21TM4040), the CPU 103 shifts to step S21TM4060.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state (step S21TM4060). Here, as described above, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected by the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300, and the gaming machine frame/door frame opening A detection signal indicating that the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and a detection signal indicating that the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected are output from the sensor 21TM300 to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 recognizes that the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 has been detected, it notifies the gaming control microcomputer 100 that the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 has been detected, When recognizing that the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected, the game control microcomputer 100 is notified by notifying that the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected. The open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be individually recognized.

The game machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300 detects to the game control microcomputer 100 a detection signal indicating that the open state of the game machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a are detected. When the detection signal indicating that is output (that is, when the gaming control microcomputer 100 includes the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300), the gaming control microcomputer 100 determines By inputting the detection signal, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be individually recognized.

When the CPU 103 recognizes the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a (YES in step S21TM4060), it is confirmed whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (step S21TM4070). . If the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4070), the process proceeds to step S21TM4510 and subsequent processes related to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode shown in FIG. 8-7. When the mode is changed to the setting change mode, the setting value can be confirmed and changed, and when the mode is changed to the setting confirmation mode, the setting value can be confirmed.

That is, when the data check result of the backup RAM area is normal (YES in step S21TM4010), the set value is a normal value (YES in step S21TM4020), and the power is not cut off during the setting change ( Change of the set value and / Or, it becomes possible to confirm. On the other hand, if the gaming machine frame 3 is in the closed state (NO in step S21TM4060) or the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4070), which one of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode is set? Without being controlled by the mode, the process proceeds to step S21TM4760 (transmission of setting command) described later.

In the present embodiment, (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state in order to bring the setting value into a state in which the setting value can be confirmed (setting confirmation mode), but (2) ) Two conditions are required: the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state. When the CPU 103 confirms that the conditions (1) and (2) are both satisfied by the determination processing in steps S21TM4060 and S21TM4070, the CPU 103 can confirm the set value (setting confirmation). Mode). In addition to these conditions (1) and (2), the RAM clear flag is set based on the fact that (3) it is determined that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES). As described later, it is possible to shift to a state (setting change mode) in which the setting value can be changed, provided that the setting has been performed.

As described above, the lock switch 21TM051 that must be operated to confirm or change the set value is provided on the back side of the game board 2, and must be operated unless the gaming machine frame 3 is opened. I can't. Even if the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, that the lock switch 21TM051 is operated means that the gaming machine frame/door frame opening sensor 21TM300 is abnormal or some illegal operation. There is a possibility that the means is about to confirm or change the set value. In such a state, it is inappropriate to permit the confirmation or change of the set value. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set in the confirmation mode. Also, the control is not performed in any of the setting change modes.

In the present embodiment, as condition (1), when either the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode. Although controllable, it is not limited to such a form, and even if the glass door frame 3a is in the open state, if the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, the setting confirmation mode and the setting change mode It may not be controlled by any of the above.

On the other hand, in step S21TM4060, when the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a is not recognized (NO in step S21TM4060), that is, both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a If it is in the closed state, the process proceeds to step S21TM4760 (transmission of a setting command) described below without being controlled by any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. Further, when it is confirmed in step S21TM4070 that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4070), the mode is not controlled in any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, and step S21TM4760 described later is performed. Move on to (send setting command).

In the data check of the backup RAM area (step S21TM4010), if the check result is abnormal (NO in step S21TM4010), the CPU 103 shifts to step S21TM4120. Further, in checking the value stored in the setting value storage area (step S21TM4020), if the regular value (0 to 5) is not stored in the setting value storage area (NO in step S21TM4020), the CPU 103 determines that , And proceeds to step S21TM4120. When it is confirmed that the setting change flag is set in the setting change flag check (step S21TM4030) (YES in step S21TM4030), the CPU 103 shifts to step S21TM4120.

Here, even if a regular value (0 to 5) is stored in the setting value storage area, if a part of the backup RAM area is damaged, it is determined as NO in step S21TM4010. Then, the process proceeds to step S21TM4120. That is, when the value stored in the set value storage area may be inappropriate, the setting is changed based on the fact that the setting change mode transition condition (step S21TM4120 to step S21TM4140 described later) is satisfied. It will be controlled by the mode. Further, in the data check of the backup RAM area (step S21TM4010), even if the check result is normal (YES in step S21TM4010), a regular value (0 to 5) is not stored in the set value storage area. (NO in step S21TM4020), the setting change mode is controlled based on the fact that the setting change mode transition condition (step S21TM4120 to step S21TM4140 described later) is satisfied. If the setting change mode was controlled when the power was turned off last time, the setting change mode is controlled based on the fact that the setting change mode transition condition (step S21TM4120 to step S21TM4140 described later) is satisfied. It will be.

In step S21TM4120, the CPU 103 confirms whether the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state (step S21TM4120). When the CPU 103 recognizes the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a (YES in step S21TM4120), it is confirmed whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (step S21TM4130). ..

If the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4130), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S21TM4140).

If the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4140), the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag to 1 (step S21TM4150). Then, the processing after step S21TM4510 related to the setting change mode shown in FIG. 8-7 is executed.

On the other hand, when the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a is not recognized in step S21TM4120 (NO in step S21TM4120), that is, both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a In the closed state, in step S21TM4130, when the lock switch 21TM051 is not in the ON state (NO in step S21TM4130), in the step S21TM4140, when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not in the ON state In (NO in step S21TM4140), the CPU 103 indicates that the setting value stored in the setting value storage area may be abnormal without executing the processing of step S21TM4510 and subsequent steps related to the setting change mode. The indicated set value abnormality error command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120.

Upon receiving the setting value abnormality error command, the effect control CPU 120 notifies the image display device 5 that the setting value may be abnormal. For example, a message "Setting value may be abnormal" is displayed. Further, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to temporarily turn off the power (turn off the power switch 21TM055) and then shift to the setting change mode when the power is turned on again (when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on). The user is informed that an operation for changing the set value is performed (the set value is confirmed). For example, the message "Please turn on the power again to switch to the setting change mode after turning off the power" is displayed. It should be noted that similar notification may be performed by voice output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined loop process (repeating steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220) until the power is turned off.

In this loop processing, the CPU 103 performs a wait of 4 ms (step S21TM4200) and then displays the character "E" on the display monitor 21TM029, whereby "the set value is not a regular value (0 to 5)". Despite that there is a possibility, the transition condition for controlling to the setting change mode (all of which are determined to be YES in steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140) is not satisfied and the setting change mode has not been entered.” Notify (step S21TM4210). Then, the security signal is output from the output terminal (terminal number 10) to which one end of the security signal line is connected (step S21TM4220). The security signal is input to an external device to which the other end of the security signal line is connected (for example, a hall computer that manages information of a plurality of gaming machines, a card unit or a calling lamp device provided corresponding to the gaming machine). To be done.

During the loop processing period, the character "E" is displayed every 4 ms on the 7-segment display provided in the display monitor 21TM029. A weight of 4 ms is provided to prevent excessive heat from staying in the 7-segment display and damaging the display. The security signal is continuously output during the loop processing. By outputting the security signal externally, a predetermined event (in this example, the set value is a normal value (0 to 5) in the pachinko gaming machine 1 based on the input of the security signal in an external device such as a hall computer. It is possible to specify the possibility that the transition condition for controlling to the setting change mode is not satisfied and the setting change mode is not entered)).

The loop processing of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220 will be continued until the power supply is stopped (until the power switch 21TM055 is turned off).

That is, when the data check result of the backup RAM area is abnormal (NO in step S21TM4010), the set value is not a normal value (NO in step S21TM4020), and the power is cut off during the setting change ( That is, when the setting change flag is set at the time of power-on, and it is determined to be YES in step S21TM4030), in any of the cases, the game should not be played in this state, Before shifting to the normal game processing (for example, game control timer interrupt processing including prize ball processing, special symbol process processing, etc.), it is necessary to set the set value in the set value storage area to a regular value. Therefore, the RAM clear flag is set to shift to the setting change mode.

In the present embodiment, in order to change the setting value (setting change mode), (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, (3) Three conditions that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state are required. When the CPU 103 confirms that all of the conditions (1) to (3) are satisfied by the determination processing in steps S21TM4120, S21TM4130, and S21TM4140, it is possible to change the setting value ( It is possible to switch to the setting change mode).

If any one of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, the change of the set value is not permitted, so that the set value of the set value storage area can be set to a regular value. Without, it is not possible to shift to the normal game processing. Therefore, when NO is determined in any of the determination processes of steps S21TM4120, S21TM4130, and S21TM4140, the process proceeds to the loop process (steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220) described above.

Once the process shifts to the loop process (step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220), the game player cannot shift to the normal game process. Therefore, the clerk or the like in the game arcade must turn the pachinko gaming machine 1 off and then turn it on again. I won't. As described above, when the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is not satisfied, the power is temporarily cut off so that all the conditions (1) to (3) are satisfied at the next power-on. Then, the mode is shifted to the setting change mode, and the set value in the set value storage area is fixed to a regular value.

When any of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, the CPU 103 presets the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. The light may be emitted in the power-off instruction mode to prompt the user to turn off the power.

In the present embodiment, when the setting change flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), the setting value is not permitted to be changed, but the setting value can be confirmed (setting confirmation mode). , (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state (YES in step S21TM4060), and (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4070).

However, if the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state (YES in step S21TM4120), and (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state. Even if the two conditions that are (YES in step S21TM4130) are satisfied, the setting confirmation mode is not controlled. Even if these conditions (1) and (2) are satisfied, (3) if it is determined in step S21TM4140 that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not in the ON state (NO), It is controlled to the game stopped state (loop processing of step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220) without being controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

Next, processing related to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-7 and 8-8. In the process of FIG. 8-7, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 matches a regular value (any one of 0 to 5 in this example) ( Step S21TM4510). When the regular value (0 to 5) is stored in the set value storage area (YES in step S21TM4510), the process proceeds to step S21TM4530. When the regular value (0 to 5) is not stored in the setting value storage area (NO in step S21TM4510), the CPU 103 has the lowest jackpot probability "0" as the regular value in the setting value storage area. Is stored (step S21TM4520). Then, the process proceeds to step S21TM4530.

Next, the CPU 103 performs a power-off process after performing a wait of 4 ms (step S21TM4530) (step S21TM4540). In the power-off process, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not a power-off signal based on a power-off including an unexpected power failure is input, and when the power-off signal is input, the CPU 103 checks whether the power supply is stopped. Immediately before the power supply stops operating due to the stop, the power supply stop processing is executed. In this power supply stop process, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection processing includes processing for adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.) for advancing the game, the state of the backup flag and an error detection code. That is, in the power-off process, the check data is stored in the predetermined backup area.

Thereby, when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled (when the repeating processing of step S21TM4530 to step S21TM4620 or the repeating processing of step S21TM4530 to step S21TM4570 and step S21TM4650 is being performed). When the disconnection occurs, the data check is appropriately executed in step S21TM4010 after the power is restored.

Next, the CPU 103 causes the display monitor 21TM029 to display a value corresponding to the set value (0 to 5 in this example) stored in the set value storage area (step S21TM4550). Here, the value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is a value (1 to 6) obtained by adding 1 to the value (0 to 5) stored in the set value storage area. Since the clerk at the amusement hall normally recognizes the range of the set values as 1 to 6, if the value stored in the set value storage area is displayed as it is on the display monitor 21TM029, the clerk at the amusement hall will actually see it. There is a risk of erroneously recognizing the setting value of. Therefore, in this example, [the value stored in the set value storage area+1] is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 as the set value. Next, the CPU 103 outputs a security signal (step S21TM4560).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether the RAM clear flag is 0 (step S21TM4570). If the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES in step S21TM4570), that is, if the RAM clear is not executed after the mode (here, the setting confirmation mode) ends, the CPU 103 specifies that the setting confirmation mode is controlled. A setting confirmation mode command is transmitted (step S21TM4650), and the process proceeds to step S21TM4680. The effect control CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting confirmation mode based on the reception of the setting confirmation mode command. Therefore, the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R can notify that the gaming machine is controlled in the setting confirmation mode.

On the other hand, when the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO in step S21TM4570), that is, when the RAM clear is executed after the mode (here, the setting change mode) ends, the CPU 103 changes the set value. A setting change flag indicating that there is a possibility of being set is set (step S21TM4580). Since the area in which the value of the setting change flag is stored is included in the backup RAM area, the value of the setting change flag is retained even when the power is turned off. Therefore, if the power is cut off while the setting change mode is being controlled, the value of the setting change flag is 1 (set state) when the power is turned on next time.

Next, the CPU 103 transmits a setting change mode command designating that the setting change mode is controlled (step S21TM4590). Based on the reception of the setting change mode command, the effect control CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting change mode. Therefore, the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R can notify that the gaming machine is controlled in the setting change mode.

Next, the CPU 103 inputs the setting changeover switch information indicating whether or not the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated (step S21TM4600), and confirms whether or not the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated. (Step S21TM4610).

If the setting switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is not operated (NO in step S21TM4610), the CPU 103 shifts to step S21TM4680. When the setting switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated (YES in step S21TM4610), the CPU 103 updates the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 (step S21TM4620), and then proceeds to step S21TM4680. Transition. The updated set value is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 in the next step S21TM4550.

Every time the clerk at the game arcade operates the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 (YES in step S21TM4610), the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is updated (step S21TM4620). For example, the regular set value is in the range of 0 to 5, and the set value stored in the set value storage area when the setting change mode is controlled (when the power is turned on or when the power is turned off last time) is 3 If there is, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is updated in the order of 3→4→5→0→1→2→3 for each setting change operation, and accordingly, the display monitor 21TM029 responds. The displayed information is updated in the order of 4→5→6→1→2→3→4.

Here, it is possible to display the current setting value (step S21TM4550), output the security signal (step S21TM4560), and send the setting confirmation mode command (step S21TM4650), but send the setting change mode command (step S21TM4590). ) And the state in which the setting value update (step S21TM4620) cannot be executed corresponds to the setting confirmation mode in which the setting value can be confirmed or the setting value cannot be changed. During the period in which the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the processes of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4570 and step S21TM4650 are repeatedly executed.

In the setting confirmation mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4070), and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4040 and the RAM clear flag). Remains 0).

In addition, it is possible to display the current set value (step S21TM4550) and output the security signal (step S21TM4560), and to send the setting change mode command (step S21TM4590) and update the set value (step S21TM4620). This state corresponds to the setting change mode in which the set value can be confirmed and changed.

In the setting change mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (determined YES in step S21TM4070 or step S21TM4130), and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4040 or step S21TM4140). It is determined that the RAM clear flag is set to 1 in step S21TM4050 or step S21TM4150).

The setting confirmation mode command is a command that is transmitted only once during the setting confirmation mode control. Therefore, when the CPU 103 transmits the setting confirmation mode command, it can specify that the setting confirmation mode command has been transmitted, and set the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag that does not require backup storage when the power is turned off. The setting confirmation mode command transmission flag may be cleared when the setting change flag is cleared (step S21TM4720). The setting confirmation mode command may be transmitted only when the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag is not set. Similarly, the setting change mode command is a command that is transmitted only once during the setting change mode control. Therefore, when the CPU 103 transmits the setting change mode command, it can specify that the setting change mode command has been transmitted, and set a setting change mode command transmission flag that does not require backup storage when the power is turned off. The setting change mode command transmission flag may be cleared when the setting change flag is cleared (step S21TM4720). The setting change mode command may be transmitted only when the setting change mode command transmission flag is not set.

In step S21TM4680, CPU 103 confirms whether lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state. Then, when the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (NO in step S21TM4680), a wait of 4 ms (step S21TM4530) is performed again, and then the processes of step S21TM4540 and subsequent steps are repeated. That is, if the value of the RAM clear flag is 0, the control of the setting confirmation mode is continued, and if the value of the RAM clear flag is 1, the control of the setting change mode is continued.

If the lock switch 21TM051 is OFF in step S21TM4680 (YES in step S21TM4680), the CPU 103 ends the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and sets 1000 ms as the value of the security signal timer (step S21TM4710). Since the predetermined time is set as the value of the security signal timer, the security signal is continuously output until the value of the security signal timer becomes 0 ms from the predetermined time in the information output process when the process shifts to the normal game process thereafter. Will be done. For example, when the game control timer interrupt processing is executed every 2 ms, the value of the security signal timer is decremented by 2 ms, and the output of the security signal is stopped when the value reaches 0 ms. Therefore, at the time of step S21TM4710, the remaining output period of the security signal is set to 1000 ms regardless of whether the setting change mode is ended or the setting confirmation mode is ended.

That is, as shown in FIG. 8-9(1), output of the security signal is started in response to the start of control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (step S21TM4560), and the setting change mode and the setting confirmation are confirmed. Corresponding to the end of control of any of the modes, the value of the security signal timer is set so that the security signal is continuously output until at least 1 sec has elapsed from the end of the control of either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Set (step S21TM4710).

Here, the process of starting the output of the security signal in step S21TM4560 is performed regardless of whether it is controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (which mode is controlled. It is executed as a common process (without (without). Further, the processing for setting the remaining output period of the security signal in step S21TM4710 is also performed regardless of whether the control is in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (determine which mode is controlled. It is executed as a common process. In this way, the security signal output control is simplified by sharing the security signal output start control and output end control between the setting change mode control and the setting confirmation mode control. The control load can be reduced.

Also, output of the security signal is started in response to the start of the control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and is output in response to the end of the control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. By stopping, it is possible to appropriately notify an external device such as a hall computer that the gaming machine may have been controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

Here, in step S21TM4710 immediately after the control of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is finished, a security signal that is common to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode (1000 ms) is set. The timer is set. However, if both the output start control and the output end control of the security signal are shared between the case where the setting change mode is controlled and the case where the setting change mode is controlled, which mode is set on the external device side. It will be difficult to know if it was controlled.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-9(2), when the setting change mode is controlled, that is, when the RAM clear flag is set to 1, the security signal is temporarily sent in step S21TM4710. After setting 1000 ms as the value of the timer, based on the determination of NO in step S21TM4770 described later, in step S21TM1465 after clearing the RAM, reset (overwrite) 30000 ms as the value of the security signal timer. There is. That is, after the remaining output period of the security signal is once set to 1 sec, the remaining output period of the security signal is reset (overwritten) to 30 sec.

When the above-described signal output control is performed, the final output stop timing of the security signal is as shown in FIG. 8-9 (2), when the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the setting confirmation mode ends. 1 sec has passed, and when the setting change mode has been controlled, 30 sec has passed from the end of the setting change mode.

Specifically, when it is controlled to the setting confirmation mode (when the RAM clear is not performed and the value of the security signal timer is not changed from 1 second), the game control timer interrupt after the interrupt permission is given. In the process (for example, the information output process), the security signal is continuously output until the value of the security signal timer changes from 1000 ms to 0 ms, and the setting change mode is controlled (when the RAM clear is performed, When the value of the security signal timer is changed from 1 second to 30 seconds), the value of the security signal timer is changed from 30000 ms to 0 ms in the game control timer interrupt process (for example, information output process) after the interrupt permission. The security signal will continue to be output until. In addition, when it is controlled to the setting confirmation mode, when it is controlled to the setting change mode, the value of the security signal timer is a predetermined time (1000 ms or 30000 ms) at the timing before shifting to the game control timer interrupt process. ) To 0 ms, the security signal may be continuously output, and the game control timer interrupt process may be performed after the security signal is output.

As described above, the security signal is continuously output for at least 1 sec depending on whether the control in the setting confirmation mode is finished or the control in the setting change mode is finished, and the control is changed to the setting change mode. In this case, the security signal is continuously output until 30 seconds elapse after the control of the setting change mode ends. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the output period of the security signal different between the case of controlling in the setting confirmation mode and the case of controlling in the setting change mode, while making the output control of the security signal common.

As a result, in the external device, it is possible to know whether the initialization process has been executed and the control has been performed in the setting confirmation mode, or the initialization process has been executed and has been performed in the setting change mode. .. For example, if the output period of the security signal is less than 30 seconds, it can be specified that the setting confirmation mode is controlled without executing the initialization process, and if the output period of the security signal is 30 seconds or more, the initial state can be specified. It is possible to presume that the conversion processing is executed and the setting change mode may be controlled.

The security signal is output even when the game stop target error such as the magnetic abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection sensor. The security signal in this case is continuously output until the power of the game machine is turned off. Further, the CPU 103 sets the abnormality detection flag in the backup area of the RAM 102 (however, the area cleared by the initialization process) based on the abnormality detected by the abnormality detection sensor. Then, it is assumed that the security signal is output for 4 minutes based on the abnormality detection flag being set when the power is restored.

Here, if the setting confirmation mode is controlled when the power is restored, the RAM clear is not executed, and therefore the value of the abnormality detection flag remains set without being initialized in the signal output process. It is possible to continuously output the security signal for 4 minutes after the power is turned on. That is, it is possible to prevent the output period of the security signal from being limited to the period from the end of the control of the setting confirmation mode to the lapse of 1 second. On the other hand, if the setting change mode is controlled when the power is restored, the RAM clear will be executed, so the error detection flag will be cleared in the subsequent signal output processing (power failure occurs). At some point, it is unclear whether or not an abnormality has been detected), and as a result, the security signal output period is the period from the end of the setting change mode until 30 seconds elapse (depending on the execution of RAM clear). Period).

In addition, in the example shown in step S21TM4710 of FIG. 8-7, 1 second is set as the value of the security signal timer, but the present invention is not limited to such a form, and is first set after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends. The value of the security signal timer set to 1 may be at least a period during which the output of the security signal can be recognized by the external device side, for example, 50 ms or more. That is, the common 50 ms may be set as the value of the security signal timer when the setting change mode ends and when the setting confirmation mode ends.

After the processing of step S21TM4710, the CPU 103 clears the setting change flag (step S21TM4720). Here, when the power is cut off after the setting change flag is cleared, it is determined that the setting change flag is not set when the power is restored (NO in step S21TM4030). Become.

Next, the CPU 103 erases the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM4730). Then, the setting value (any one of 0 to 5) stored in the setting value storage area is set in the setting command, and the setting command is transmitted (step S21TM4760). Even when the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are not controlled when the power is turned on, the process of step S21TM4760 is executed and the setting command is transmitted.

Here, the player usually recognizes the range of the setting values as 1 to 6, and the value specified by the setting command (the value stored in the setting value storage area) is directly imaged on the CPU 120 side for effect control. If it is displayed on the display device 5, the player may erroneously understand the set value. Therefore, in the present embodiment, on the CPU 120 side for effect control, a value obtained by adding 1 to the value (0 to 5) specified by the setting command is recognized as the setting value (1 to 6), and the setting value 1 to 6 is set. The effect that suggests the set value is executed in the range.

Not limited to such a form, the CPU 103 sets a value (1 to 6) obtained by adding 1 to the setting value (0 to 5) stored in the setting value storage area to the setting command to perform the effect control. It may be transmitted to the CPU 120 for use. As a result, the range of the setting value designated by the setting command becomes 1 to 6, which matches the range normally recognized by the player. On the CPU 120 side for effect control, the set value (1 to 6) specified by the setting command is displayed on the image display device 5 as it is, or an effect that suggests the set value (1 to 6) specified by the setting command is executed. By doing so, the set value can be appropriately notified or suggested. Further, it becomes unnecessary for the effect control CPU 120 side to perform addition processing on the set value designated by the received setting command, and the control load on the effect control CPU 120 side can be reduced.

As described above, the effect control CPU 120 can specify that the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode has ended by receiving the setting command. Further, it is possible to suggest the set value by executing the effect according to the set value designated by the setting command. For example, the setting value can be suggested to the player by making the mode of the ending effect executed when the big hit game state ends different depending on the specified setting value.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the RAM clear flag is 0 (step S21TM4770).

Here, when the value of the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES in step S21TM4770), the data check result of the backup RAM area is normal (YES in step S21TM4010), and the set value is a normal value (step S21TM4010). It is determined to be YES in S21TM4020, the power is not cut off during the setting change (NO in step S21TM4030), and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is OFF (NO in step S21TM4040). Therefore, it is only necessary to execute the processing at the time of power interruption recovery without clearing the RAM.

If the value of the RAM clear flag is 0, the CPU 103 executes the process when the data check result of the backup RAM area is normal when the power is turned on, and after the interrupt permission, the game control timer interrupt process (special (Including symbol process processing)). That is, when neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode is controlled, or when the control of the setting confirmation mode is finished, the CPU 103 determines that the value of the RAM clear flag is 0. Without executing the clear, the backup command is transmitted as a command at the time of power interruption recovery, and the normal game process is started.

In the production control CPU 120, based on the reception of this backup command (command at the time of restoration), restoration from power failure is performed based on the data at the time of power supply stop (RAM clear is not performed. Be recognized). When the production control CPU 120 receives the backup command, the production device such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the frame LED 9 has been restored from the power interruption based on the data when the power supply was stopped. It is possible to notify that (RAM has not been cleared).

On the other hand, when the value of the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO in step S21TM4770), it means that the RAM clear is set to 1 in step S21TM4050 or step S21TM4150, and it is determined to execute the RAM clear. Therefore, the process at the time of turning on the power, which involves clearing the RAM, may be executed.

When the value of the RAM clear flag is 1, the CPU 103 executes the process of setting 30 seconds as the value of the security signal timer and the process when the data check result of the backup RAM area is abnormal at power-on. , After the interruption permission, the game control timer interruption processing (including special symbol process processing etc.) may be performed.

As shown in FIG. 8-8, the CPU 103 performs the RAM clear processing based on the RAM clear flag being 1 (step S21TM1410). In the RAM clear processing, the data (special symbol process flag, probability variation flag, time saving flag, reserved memory, etc.) indicating the game state before the power supply is stopped, which is stored in the game state information storage area of the RAM 102, is cleared and the initial value is set. However, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is not cleared and is not changed before the RAM clearing process. Further, the area in which each aggregated value (game information that can be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) such as the serial ratio, the winning combination, and the base is stored for each set value is not cleared, and each aggregated for each set value. The value is not changed before the RAM clear process. Then, the character "C" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 to notify that the game state has been initialized (step S21TM1420). By the RAM clearing process, predetermined data (for example, the data of the count value of the counter for generating the random number for normal symbol determination) is initialized to 0, but an arbitrary value or a predetermined value It may be initialized to. Further, the predetermined area (for example, the data of the count value of the counter for generating the normal symbol per determination random number) may be left as it is without initializing the entire area of the RAM 102.

The reason why the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is not cleared in this RAM clearing process is as follows. If it has been stored (YES in step S21TM4020), and (b) the setting change mode is controlled, the value of the setting value storage area is set to 0 (step S21TM4520) or the setting change mode is in progress. This is because the normal value is stored by the operation (step S21TM4610 and step S21TM4620). Furthermore, after the RAM clearing process, the setting change mode cannot be controlled, and there is no opportunity to change the value stored in the setting value storage area.

Next, the CPU 103 sets the pointer to the start address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 101 (step S21TM1430), and sequentially sets the contents of the initialization setting table in the work area (step S21TM1440). By the processing of step S21TM1430 and step S21TM1440, for example, a normal symbol per determination random number counter, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag such as a flag for selectively performing processing according to the control state. The initial value is set.

After executing steps S21TM1430 and S21TM1440, the CPU 103 reads out the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 (step S21TM1450). In the game control timer interrupt process, which will be described later, the jackpot determination in the special symbol process process is executed based on the setting value read here. Next, the CPU 103 transmits an initialization command designating that the initialization processing has been performed when the power is turned on (or when the setting change mode ends) (step S21TM1460). In the effect control CPU 120, the initialization processing is performed based on the reception of the initialization command (the RAM is cleared without recovery from the power failure based on the data when the power supply is stopped). Recognize (have been broken). When the production control CPU 120 receives the initialization command, the production device such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the frame LED 9 has initialized the game state and the like (data when power supply is stopped). Based on the above, it is possible to notify that the RAM has been cleared without recovery from the power failure.

Next, the CPU 103 sets 30 seconds as the value of the security signal timer (step S21TM1465). As a result, the value (1 second) of the security signal timer set in step S21TM4710 after the end of the setting change mode is changed (overwritten) to the value (30 seconds) corresponding to the execution of the RAM clear. become. When the RAM clear is executed without being controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, step S21TM4710 is not executed (1 second is set as the value of the security signal timer). Value), the value of the security signal timer is set to 30 seconds corresponding to the execution of the RAM clear. On the other hand, if the RAM clear is not executed (including the case where the setting confirmation mode is controlled), the process of step S21TM1465 is not executed, so the value of the security signal timer is 1 second set in step S21TM4710. There is.

Since the value of the security signal timer is set in this step S21TM1465 or the above-described step S21TM4710, the security signal is output in the game control timer interrupt process after the interrupt permission (information output process), After that, every time the game control timer interrupt process is executed by the interrupt permission, the value of the security signal timer is decremented by 2 ms, and the output of the security signal is stopped at the timing when the value of the security signal timer becomes 0. Will be.

Then, the CPU 103 executes the setting process of the serial communication circuit 21TM505 (step S21TM1480). In this setting process, the connection confirmation signal is output from the output circuit 21TM067 of the main board 11 to the input circuit 21TM373A of the payout control board 21TM037. Further, the communication between the serial communication circuit 21TM505 of the game control microcomputer 100 and the serial communication circuit 21TM380 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is set to an executable state.

Next, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S21TM1490). The CPU 103, for example, executes a process in accordance with a random number circuit setting program to set the random number circuit 104 to update the value of the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result.

Then, in step S21TM1500, the CPU 103 sets the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 so that a timer interrupt is taken at regular intervals (for example, 2 ms). That is, a value corresponding to, for example, 2 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is taken every 2 ms.

Next, the CPU 103 repeatedly executes the display random number updating process (step S21TM1520) and the initial value random number updating process (step S21TM1530). When the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are executed, the interrupt prohibited state is set (step S21TM1510), and when the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are completed, the interrupt enabled state is set. It is set (step S21TM1540). As a result, the process shifts to the normal game process capable of executing the game control timer interrupt process. In the present embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining the stop symbol of the special symbol when not a big hit or a random number for determining whether to reach when not a big hit, for display The random number update process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number. The initial value random number updating process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random numbers. In this embodiment, the initial value random number, the initial value of the count value of the counter (normal symbol per determination random number generation counter) for generating a random number for determining whether or not to win the normal symbol is determined. It is a random number to do. A game control process for controlling the progress of a game to be described later (the game control microcomputer 100 controls, by itself, a game device such as an effect display device, a variable winning ball device, and a ball payout device provided in the game machine. In the process of, or the process of transmitting a command signal to control other microcomputers, also referred to as game device control process), the count value of the random number per ordinary symbol is one round (ordinary random number per symbol is determined) When the number of numerical values between the minimum value and the maximum value of the possible values has been increased), the initial value is set to the counter.

In this example, when it is determined in step S21TM4770 that the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES), the CPU 103 determines whether the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both closed. Without confirming (regardless of the state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a), the process shifts to the power-off recovery process, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode, and the RAM clear flag is set in step S21TM4770. If it is determined to be 0 (YES), the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both closed (depending on the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. Alternatively, the process may be shifted to the process when the power is cut off.

In addition, in this example, when it is determined in step S21TM4770 that the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO), the CPU 103 determines whether or not both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed. Without confirming (regardless of the state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a), the process shifts to the process when the power is turned on (process after step S21TM1410 (RAM clear)). Not limited to this, if it is determined in step S21TM4770 that the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO), the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both closed (game machine frame). 3 or depending on the state of the glass door frame 3a), the process may be shifted to the process when the power is turned on (process after step S21TM1410 (RAM clear)).

As described above, the clerk or the like in the game hall puts the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the setting change mode by turning on the lock switch 21TM051 and turning on the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 when the power is turned on. In addition to being able to control, it is possible to initialize the game state and the like (execute RAM clear). Also, by turning on the lock switch 21TM051 and turning off the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 when the power is turned on, it is possible to control the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the setting confirmation mode, and also the gaming state and the like. Can be prevented from being initialized (NO in step S21TM4040 or step S21TM4140 to set the RAM clear flag to 1). In this way, the clerk at the game arcade can select whether to control the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and can also select whether to initialize the game state or the like. There is.

As described above, when the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on, it means that the setting value was unstable because it was controlled in the setting change mode when the power was cut off. There is a possibility that the set value that the game hall is trying to confirm is not stored in the set value storage area. In the example shown in FIGS. 8-6 to 8-8, the CPU 103 determines that the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), and the game is stopped (step S21TM) without shifting to the normal game process (step S21TM4030). S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220 are controllable, and a security signal is output in response to control to the game stopped state (step S21TM4220).

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the game from being started (the game control timer interrupt process is executed) in the state where the set value is unstable, and to supply the power when the power is turned on. It is possible to notify the external device that it was controlled in the setting change mode when the disconnection occurred.

In addition, in the examples shown in FIGS. 8-6 to 8-8, the CPU 103 sets a condition for shifting to the setting change mode based on that the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030) ( If all of the steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140 are YES), the set value abnormality error command is transmitted (step S21TM4190) and the display monitor is displayed in the game stopped state (loop processing of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220). An error display for displaying the character "E" is displayed on 21TM029 (step S21TM4210).

In the example shown in FIG. 8-10, each 7-segment display 21TM029A to 21TM029D constituting the display monitor 21TM029 displays the letter “E”, thereby causing an abnormality in the clerk at the amusement hall (setting change mode). There is a possibility that the power supply may have been cut off under control). In addition, the production control CPU 120, which has received the setting value error command, causes the image display device 5 to display a message “Please turn on the power again to switch to the setting change mode after the power is turned off”. After turning the power off (power switch 21TM055 is OFF), the store clerk, etc., shifts to the setting change mode when the power is turned on again (power switch 21TM055 is ON) and changes the set value. Perform a notification to urge (confirm the set value).

In this example, (a) when the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on, and when the transition condition for controlling the setting change mode is satisfied, that is, (i) the gaming machine frame 3 is It is in the open state (YES in step S21TM4120), (ii) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4130), and (iii) the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S21TM4140). If it is determined to be YES), the setting change mode is controlled. As a result, the error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: display of "E" on the display monitor 21TM029) is not executed, and the message display on the side of the production control board 12 ("Power is turned on again after power off." Please move to the setting change mode”).

Here, in the effect control CPU 120 that has received the setting change mode command (step S21TM4590), the image display device 5 has been controlled to the setting change mode, that is, the setting change operation (setting change switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated. ), it is possible to notify that the set value can be changed. For example, the message "in the setting change mode" or the message "Please perform the setting change operation to change the set value" can be displayed on the image display device 5. With this, a clerk at the amusement hall can understand that the setting change mode is controlled, and by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052, the set value stored in the set value storage area By changing the lock switch 21TM051 to the OFF state after changing the preset set value, the set value can be fixed and the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be shifted to the normal game processing.

On the other hand, (b) when the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on, and the transition condition for controlling the setting change mode is not satisfied, that is, among the above (i) to (iii) If any one of the conditions is not satisfied, the setting change mode is not controlled, and the game is stopped (the loop processing of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220) after the setting value error command is transmitted (step S21TM4190). .. As a result, an error display (step S21TM4210: display “E” on the display monitor 21TM029) on the main board 11 side is executed, and a message display on the effect control board 12 side (“power is turned on again after power off”). Please change to the setting change mode").

In this way, the error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: “E” display on the display monitor 21TM029) is executed, and the message display on the effect control board 12 side (“power is turned on again after power off”). Please change to the setting change mode”) is also performed, and as a state of the gaming machine, even if the power is cut off during the setting change mode, the condition for changing to the setting change mode after the power is restored is It will be notified that the condition is not established. In this case, the clerk at the amusement hall understands that the game is not controlled in the setting change mode and is in the game stopped state (it is necessary to turn on the power again to control the setting change mode). It is possible. Therefore, after once turning off the power, the power is turned on again by operating so that all the transition conditions (i) to (iii) to the setting change mode are satisfied. Then, in the setting change mode, by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is changed to the planned setting value, and then the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off. By switching to the state, the set value can be fixed and the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be shifted to the normal game processing.

In this way, when the power is cut off in the setting change mode, the state of the gaming machine can be appropriately notified when the power is restored.

Here, when the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is satisfied when the power is restored (a), an error is displayed on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: “E” is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029). This automatically shifts to the setting change mode without prompting the user to avoid unnecessary error display and promptly change the setting value appropriately.

On the other hand, when the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is not satisfied when the power is restored (b), it is not possible to shift to the setting change mode when the power is restored even though the power is cut off during the setting change mode. Since it is in the state, it is forcibly controlled to the game stopped state (loop processing of step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220), and the error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: display of "E" on display monitor 21TM029). Will be done. As a result, it is possible to limit the progress of the game in an unstable state where the set value is not fixed, and it is possible to realize appropriate game control.

When the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the transition conditions (i) to (iii) for transitioning to the setting change mode are all satisfied, and the transition condition (i ) To (iii) are not satisfied, different commands may be transmitted as commands indicating that the set value may be abnormal.

For example, when the transition condition is satisfied, the command indicates that the set value may be abnormal, and the mode is changed to the setting change mode (or the condition for the transition is satisfied). The CPU 120 for effect control, which has transmitted the command indicating that the command has been received, displays the message "The setting value may be abnormal" and the message "It is automatically controlled in the setting change mode" It is preferable to display it on the device 5. On the other hand, when the transition condition is not satisfied, it is preferable to transmit the set value abnormality error command in step S21TM4190 as described above.

After the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is finished and the process is shifted to the normal game process, (1) the lock switch 21TM051 is operated when the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both closed. In response to the change (from the OFF state to the ON state), the lock control command is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 to the effect control CPU 120, and (2) the setting changeover switch (clear switch). ) In response to the operation of 21TM052 (from the OFF state to the ON state), the setting control switch operation command is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 to the effect control CPU 120.

Then, the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120) is controlled in both the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode based on the reception of the lock switch operation command and/or the setting change switch operation command. It is possible to specify that an operation for changing the set value has been performed and notify that effect, even though it does not exist. For example, on the basis of the reception of the lock switch operation command, the image display device 5 executes the abnormal operation warning notification for displaying the characters "The operation of the lock switch has been detected." Further, based on the reception of the setting changeover switch operation command, the abnormal operation warning notification displaying the character "The operation of the setting changeover switch has been detected." is executed. As a result, the clerk of the game hall clearly understands that the operation for changing the set value has been performed even if the operation is not controlled in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and illegal It is possible to check whether or not

Not limited to such a form, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether the lock switch 21TM051 is operated after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends and the process moves to the normal game process, and The lock switch operation command and the setting changeover switch operation command may not be transmitted without confirming whether or not the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated. Thus, during the period in which the normal game process (game control timer interrupt process) is being executed, the execution status of the operation for changing the set value and the operation for confirming the set value is not checked. This makes it possible to reduce the control load on the game control microcomputer 100.

(Modification of power-on processing)
In the example shown in FIG. 8-6, when the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM4030), (i) the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state (YES in step S21TM4120). ), (ii) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4130), and (iii) the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4140). Only when it is confirmed that the RAM clear flag is set, the RAM clear flag is set to 1 (step S21TM4150) and the mode is changed to the setting change mode (NO in step S21TM4570).

Not limited to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 8-11, when the setting change flag is set at power-on (YES in step S21TM4030), the three conditions (i) to (iii) are satisfied. The RAM clear flag may be set to 1 (step S21TM4150) and the mode may be changed to the setting change mode (NO in step S21TM4570) without checking whether or not the condition is satisfied.

In the processing shown in FIG. 8-11, when the data check result of the backup RAM area is abnormal (NO in step S21TM4010), the setting value is not a regular value (NO in step S21TM4020), the setting change flag is set. If YES (YES in step S21TM4030), the RAM clear flag is set to 1 (step S21TM4150) without determining whether the conditions (i) to (iii) are satisfied, and the setting is changed. The process is controlled (NO in step S21TM4570) and is not controlled in the game stopped state (process corresponding to the loop process of step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220), which is different from the process shown in FIG. 8-6. Other parts are the same as the processing shown in FIGS. 8-6 to 8-8.

Even in such a case, the RAM clear flag is set to 1 and the mode is changed to the setting change mode based on the setting change flag being set when the power is turned on. It is possible to properly determine the state of the gaming machine when the power is cut off during the change.

In the example shown in FIG. 8-11, when the setting change flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), (i) the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, and (ii) the lock switch 21TM051 is ON. Is set, and (iii) the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state. Based on the establishment of the three conditions, the setting change mode is controlled (NO in step S21TM4570). If the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), (i) to (iii) are set. Regardless of whether the three conditions are satisfied, the setting change mode is forcibly controlled.

As described above, when the power is cut off while being controlled in the setting change mode, the three conditions (i) to (iii) are based on the setting change flag being set when the power is restored. By automatically controlling the setting change mode regardless of whether or not is satisfied, it is possible to improve workability for determining the set value.

Here, if the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the setting is performed even if the condition (ii) the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (YES in step S21TM4130) is not satisfied. It will be controlled in the change mode. As a result, in the setting change mode, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is changed by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 while the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the OFF state. (Step S21TM4610 to step S21TM4620 in FIG. 8-7).

As described above, the condition for ending the setting change mode is to switch the lock switch 21TM051 from the ON state to the OFF state (determine YES in step S21TM4680). Therefore, if the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state in order to confirm the set value and end the setting change mode, the store clerk who has performed the setting value change operation once changes the lock switch 21TM051 from the OFF state. After switching to the ON state, the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state (YES is determined in step S21TM4680).

As described above, the condition for starting the control of the setting change mode is set depending on whether the setting change flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030) or the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030). While making different, the conditions for ending the control of the setting change mode (the operation of switching the lock switch 21TM051 from the ON state to the OFF state) are made common to clarify the condition for ending the control of the setting change mode, It is arranged to appropriately shift to the normal game processing.

Here, when the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030) and the setting change mode is controlled, a notification prompting the lock switch 21TM051 to be turned on may be given. good. For example, when the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag to 1 in step S21TM4150 and transmits the setting value error command (in step S21TM4190 described above). Perform the corresponding process), and the effect control CPU 120 that received the setting value error command (step S21TM4110) says, "Turn on the lock switch once and then switch it off after changing the setting value." The message may be displayed on the image display device 5.

In the processing shown in FIGS. 8-6 to 8-8 and 8-11, it is not possible to shift to the normal game processing when the setting change flag is set. Therefore, the gaming machine manufacturer sets the setting change flag in advance before shipping the pachinko gaming machine 1 (before installation in the gaming hall), and then the gaming machine side goes through the setting change mode. Unless the set value is changed and the setting change mode is ended, the game on the pachinko gaming machine 1 cannot be performed. Accordingly, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed in the game arcade, it is possible to reliably control the setting change mode to perform the setting change operation and to take a measure to fix the set value.

(Set value storage control when power is cut off while changing the set value)
Next, the set value storage control when the power is cut off during the change of the set value will be described with reference to FIGS. In the example shown in FIG. 8-7, in the setting change mode, the setting change switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated to change the setting value itself stored in the setting value storage area.

First, regarding the control in the case where the power supply is cut off before the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state (before the end of the setting change mode) by changing the setting value in the setting change mode, FIG. This will be described using -12(1).

As shown in order 1, when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on (the clear switch 21TM052 is also turned on) to be controlled to the setting change mode. In this example, when the power is turned on, “0” is stored as the set value in the set value storage area of the RAM 102. Next, as shown in order 2, with the start of the setting change mode, the set value “0” stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is read, and the read set value is set to 1 "1", which is obtained by adding, is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the ON state.

Next, as shown in order 3, in the setting change mode, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is “0” based on the first operation of the setting switch (clear switch) 21TM052. Is changed from "1" to "1", and "2" obtained by adding 1 to the changed setting value is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the ON state. Further, as shown in order 4, in the setting change mode, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is "1" based on the second operation of the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052. Is changed to “2”, and “3” obtained by adding 1 to the changed setting value is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the ON state.

Next, as shown in order 5, in the setting change mode, it is assumed that the power is cut off while the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the ON state, that is, before the operation for ending the setting change mode is performed. At this time, the setting value storage area is in a state where the setting value “2” after the second operation of the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is stored. In the power-off state, the setting value “2” stored in the setting value storage area formed in the backup area of the RAM 102 is retained as it is.

Next, as shown in order 6, when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on (the clear switch 21TM052 is also turned on) to control the setting change mode. When the power is turned on, “2” is stored as the set value in the set value storage area of the RAM 102. The set value “2” is the value stored in the set value storage area when the power supply was cut off in the previous setting change mode.

Next, as shown in order 7, with the start of the setting change mode, the setting value “2” stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is read, and the read setting value is set to 1 "3", which is obtained by adding "," is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the ON state.

Since the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on in the order 6, when the control shown in FIG. 8-11 is applied, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off (or cleared). Even if the switch 21TM052 is in the OFF state), the setting change mode is automatically controlled. Therefore, the lock switch 21TM051 in the order 6 and the order 7 may be in the OFF state.

In this way, when the set value is changed in the setting change mode and the power is cut off without the lock switch 21TM051 being turned off (without ending the setting change mode), the power is restored when the power is restored. The set value after the change in the previous setting change mode is held in the set value storage area. Therefore, when the power is restored, the preset setting value may have already been set, and in this case, the clerk at the amusement arcade terminates the setting change mode without performing the operation of changing the setting value again. Since it is only necessary to shift the game machine to the normal game processing, workability can be improved.

Next, regarding the control in the case where a power-off occurs after the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state (after the setting change mode) by changing the setting value in the setting change mode, This will be described with reference to FIG.

Orders 1 to 4 are the same as the example shown in FIG. Next, as shown in order 5, in the setting change mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state, so that the setting change mode ends. As a result, the set value “2” after the second operation of the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is performed is determined as the final set value. At this time, “2” is stored as the set value in the set value storage area, and “3” obtained by adding 1 to the confirmed set value is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029.

After that, as shown in order 6, it is assumed that the power switch 21TM055 is turned off, and the power supply is stopped. In this power-off state, the setting value “2” stored in the setting value storage area formed in the backup area of the RAM 102 is retained as it is.

Next, as shown in order 7, when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on (the clear switch 21TM052 is also turned on), and the setting change mode is controlled. When the power is turned on, “2” is stored as the set value in the set value storage area of the RAM 102. This set value “2” is the value that was finally stored in the set value storage area when the previous setting change mode ended.

Next, as shown in order 8, with the start of the setting change mode, the setting value “2” stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is read, and the read setting value is set to 1 "3", which is obtained by adding "," is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the ON state.

As shown in FIGS. 8-12 (1) and (2), when the power is cut off while being controlled to the setting change mode, and when the power supply is stopped after the control of the setting change mode is completed. In either case, when the power is restored, the set value after being changed according to the setting change operation in the previous setting change mode, that is, the set value stored in the set value storage area immediately before the power is cut off, , Valid setting values (setting values stored in the setting storage area when power is restored).

It is not limited to the storage control of the set values shown in FIGS. That is, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is copied to the setting information temporary storage area when the setting change mode is controlled, and the setting change switch (clear switch) is set when the setting change mode is controlled. When the 21TM052 is operated, the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is changed without changing the setting value in the setting value storage area and the setting change mode is ended (the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on. The setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is stored in the setting value storage area (overwritten) to confirm the setting value based on the operation of switching from the state to the OFF state). May be. In this case, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is a value (1 to 6) obtained by adding 1 to the setting value (0 to 5) stored in the setting information temporary storage area, and the setting information temporary storage area The set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 also changes in response to the change of the set value stored in the.

With such a configuration, even if the setting change mode is controlled when the power is turned on and the setting change operation is performed (when the setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is changed), the setting is changed. When the power is cut off without completing the operation for ending the change mode (without switching the lock switch 21TM051 to the OFF state), the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is set to the power supply. It has not been changed since it was turned on (before the setting change operation was performed in the setting change mode). That is, in the power supply stopped state, the set value stored in the set value storage area at the previous power-on is still held. Therefore, the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display section 21TM029A) when being controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is restored is stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 at the previous power-on. It becomes a value according to the set value.

In this way, it is possible to appropriately determine the set value when the power is cut off while being controlled in the setting change mode. Further, when the power supply is stopped in an unstable state where the setting change mode has not ended, the change of the set value can be limited.

For the control related to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode shown in the above embodiment, a plurality of setting values (for example, 0 to 5) are provided, and for a gaming machine having a different jackpot probability depending on the setting values. Although applicable, the present invention is not limited to this, and although a plurality of setting values (for example, 0 to 5) are provided, the jackpot probability is common regardless of the setting values (for example, for all of the setting values 0 to 5). It is also applicable to a gaming machine (the jackpot probability is 1/300).

In addition, the present invention disclosed in the following is disclosed in the characteristic part 21TM.

As disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), there has been proposed a gaming machine including a setting changing unit that changes setting values in multiple stages based on an external setting changing operation. In addition, as disclosed in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-500506 (paragraph 0102), a gaming machine in which a "big hit signal" or the like is output from an external output terminal of a main control board has been proposed. Regarding the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), when it is necessary to grasp the control state related to the setting on the external device side when changing the setting value or the like. However, even if the signal output technology of the conventional game machine described in JP-A-2014-500506 (paragraph 0102) is applied, it is difficult for the external device side to grasp this. is there. The invention relating to means O1 to means O4 has been made in view of the above situation, and is to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately notifying the outside of the gaming machine of a control state related to setting.

The game machine of means O1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing control (big hit determination processing in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to a set value (6 steps of different set values 0 to 5 with different ranges for big hit determination random numbers) ,
A setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM4530 to step S21TM4620) capable of controlling a setting change mode capable of changing a set value,
Setting confirmation mode control means capable of controlling the setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM4530 to step S21TM4570 and step S21TM4650),
Specific signal output means for outputting a specific signal (security signal) in response to the start of control of either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (the game control microcomputer 100 for outputting a security signal in step S21TM4560), ,
And a setting means (a game control microcomputer 100 for setting the value of the security signal timer) for setting a value (value of the security signal timer) relating to the period during which the specific signal is output,
The setting means can set a predetermined value that is common in the case of being controlled to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode (in step S21TM4710, 1 second is set as the value of the security signal timer). ),
The specific signal output means outputs the specific signal at least until a period corresponding to the predetermined value elapses in response to the end of the control of either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (in the setting confirmation mode). The security signal is continuously output until 1 second has passed from the end of the setting confirmation mode, and the security signal is continuously output until 30 seconds have passed from the end of the setting change mode with the end of the setting change mode. Do)
It is characterized by
According to this, the state of the gaming machine related to the setting can be appropriately notified to the external device.

The game machine of means O2 is
A gaming machine of means O1,
Equipped with initialization means for initializing the game state (the game control microcomputer 100 for executing RAM clear (step S21TM1410) based on the RAM clear flag being set in step S21TM4050 and step S21TM4150),
The initialization means initializes the game state in accordance with the control of the setting change mode (when controlled to the setting change mode, RAM clear is executed after being controlled to the setting change mode),
The setting means can set a specific value corresponding to a period longer than the period corresponding to the predetermined value after setting the predetermined value (after setting 1 second as the value of the security signal timer in step S21TM4710). (When the RAM clear is executed, 30 seconds can be set as the value of the security signal timer in step S21TM1465),
The specific signal output means outputs a specific signal in response to the end of the control of the setting change mode until the period corresponding to the specific value elapses (from the end of the setting change mode with the end of the setting change mode. The security signal is continuously output until 30 seconds have passed)
It is characterized by
According to this, the specific signal is output at least during the period corresponding to the predetermined value regardless of whether the control of the setting change mode is ended or the control of the setting confirmation mode is ended. When the mode is controlled, the specific signal is output for a period longer than the period corresponding to the predetermined value. Therefore, the setting process by the setting unit is made common and different output is made in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. It is possible to set the period.

The game machine of means O3 is
A gaming machine of means O1 or means O2,
In the setting change mode, when power supply to the game machine is stopped without performing a specific operation (detection that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in step S21TM4680) for ending the setting change mode In the specific information storage unit (the backup area of the RAM 102) for storing the specific information (setting change flag), the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4580 based on the shift to the setting change mode, and the setting change mode ends. Based on this, the game control microcomputer 100) for clearing the setting change flag in step S21TM4720 is provided,
When the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (it is determined that the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4030 at power restoration). In this case), the game is stopped and a specific signal is output (the processing of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220 is repeatedly executed until the power is turned off based on the condition for shifting to the setting change mode not being satisfied). Is possible.
According to this, when the power supply is stopped during the control of the setting change mode, the state of the gaming machine can be appropriately notified to the external device when the power supply is restarted.

The game machine of means O4 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means O1 to means O3,
Game control means for controlling the progress of the game (a game control microcomputer 100 for executing a game control timer interrupt process),
And a production control means (CPU 120 for production control) for controlling execution of production,
The game control means,
Display means (display monitor 21TM029),
Setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 that executes the processing of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620);
In the setting change mode, power is not supplied to the gaming machine without performing a specific operation for ending the setting change mode (without detecting an operation of turning off the lock switch 21TM051 in step S21TM4680). Specific information storage means for storing specific information when stopped (in the backup area of the RAM 102, the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4580 based on the shift to the setting change mode, and the setting change mode is terminated. Based on step S21TM4720, the game control microcomputer 100) for clearing the setting change flag, and
When the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (it is determined that the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4030 when power is restored). In this case, it is possible to execute an error notification on the display means and also to send an error command to the effect control means (a set value abnormality error command is sent at step S21TM4190, and a display monitor is displayed at the error display at step S21TM4210). It is possible to display the letter "E" on 21TM029),
In response to the reception of the error command, the effect control means notifies the user of an operation for changing the set value (the image display device 5 is set to "return power on after power off to enter setting change mode". Please move." message is displayed.)
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible to appropriately notify the clerk of the game hall of the state of the game machine and to prompt the operation for changing the set value.

Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), there has been proposed a gaming machine including a setting changing unit that changes setting values in multiple stages based on an external setting changing operation. In the gaming machine as described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), it is necessary to appropriately notify the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped when changing the setting value. The invention relating to means P1 to means P4 is made in view of the above situation, and a gaming machine that appropriately notifies the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped when changing the set value. To provide.

The game machine of means P1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing control (big hit determination processing in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to a set value (6 steps of different set values 0 to 5 with different ranges for big hit determination random numbers) ,
A setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM4530 to step S21TM4620) capable of controlling a setting change mode capable of changing a set value,
Specific information storage means for storing specific information capable of specifying that the setting change mode has been controlled (the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4580 based on the shift to the setting change mode, and the setting change mode ends. Based on this, the game control microcomputer 100) which clears the setting change flag in step S21TM4720,
The specific information storage means can store the specific information even after the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped (the value of the setting change flag is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102),
When the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (it is determined that the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4030 at power restoration). In this case), an error notification means capable of executing error notification (a game control microcomputer 100 that displays an error in step S21TM4210 when the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is not satisfied) is further provided. .
According to this, when the power supply is stopped in the setting change mode, the state of the gaming machine can be appropriately notified.

The game machine of means P2 is
A gaming machine of the means P1,
The setting change mode control means is such that the setting change condition is satisfied (when the power is turned on, the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch (setting It is possible to control the setting change mode based on the changeover switch) 21TM052 being in the ON state),
When the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (it is determined that the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4030 at power restoration). In this case, it is possible to control to the setting change mode without executing the error notification based on the fact that the setting change condition is satisfied (when the power is turned on, all the steps S21TM4120, S21TM4130, and S21TM4140 are performed). Based on the determination of YES, shift to the setting change mode without shifting to the loop processing of step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220).
It is characterized by
According to this, when the condition for controlling in the setting change mode is satisfied, the setting change mode is controlled without executing the error notification, and unnecessary error notification is avoided and the set value is appropriately set. Can prompt change.

The game machine of means P3 is
A gaming machine of means P1 or means P2,
When the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (it is determined that the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4030 at power restoration). In this case, it is possible to carry out the error notification and put the game in a stopped state (when the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is not satisfied when the power is turned on (one of steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140). (If NO is determined in), the process proceeds to the loop process of step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220 without shifting to the setting change mode).
It is characterized by
According to this, the progress of the game in the state where the set value is unstable can be restricted, and the appropriate game control can be realized.

The game machine of means P4 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means P1 to means P3,
Game control means for controlling the progress of the game (a game control microcomputer 100 for executing a game control timer interrupt process),
And a production control means (CPU 120 for production control) for controlling execution of production,
The game control means,
Display means (display monitor 21TM029),
Setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 that executes the processing of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620);
The specific information storage means,
When the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (it is determined that the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4030 at power restoration). In this case, it is possible to execute the error notification on the display means and also to send an error command to the effect control means (a setting value abnormality error command is sent at step S21TM4190, and displayed on the error display at step S21TM4210). It is possible to display the letter "E" on the monitor 21TM029),
In response to the reception of the error command, the effect control means notifies the user of an operation for changing the set value (the image display device 5 is set to "return power on after power off to enter setting change mode". Please move." message is displayed.)
It is characterized by
According to this, it is possible to appropriately notify the clerk of the game hall of the state of the game machine and to prompt the operation for changing the set value.

Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), there has been proposed a gaming machine including a setting changing unit that changes setting values in multiple stages based on an external setting changing operation. In the gaming machine as described in JP 2010-200902 A (paragraph 0007), it is necessary to properly determine the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped when changing the setting value. The invention relating to means Q1 to means Q5 is made in view of the above situation, and provides a gaming machine that appropriately determines the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped when changing the set value. To do.

The gaming machine of means Q1
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing control (big hit determination processing in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to a set value (6 steps of different set values 0 to 5 with different ranges for big hit determination random numbers) ,
A setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM4530 to step S21TM4620) capable of controlling a setting change mode capable of changing a set value,
Specific information storage means for storing specific information capable of specifying that the setting change mode has been controlled (the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4580 based on the shift to the setting change mode, and the setting change mode ends. Based on this, the game control microcomputer 100) which clears the setting change flag in step S21TM4720,
The specific information storage means can store the specific information even after the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped (the value of the setting change flag is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102),
The setting change mode control means, when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means when power supply to the gaming machine is started (setting change flag is set in step S21TM4030 at power restoration). When it is determined that it is set), it controls to the setting change mode (when the power is turned on, the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch (Setting switch) Automatically controls the setting change mode regardless of whether or not the condition for shifting to the setting change mode, that is, the 21TM052 is in the ON state, is satisfied.)
It is characterized by
According to this, when the power supply is stopped in the setting change mode accompanied by the initialization of the game state, the state of the gaming machine can be appropriately determined.
It should be noted that the gaming machine of the means Q1 initializes the gaming state corresponding to the control of the setting change mode (for example, RAM is set based on the RAM clear flag being set in step S21TM4050 and step S21TM4150). The game control microcomputer 100 for executing the clear (step S21TM1410) may be further provided.

The gaming machine of means Q2 is
A gaming machine of means Q1,
The setting change mode control means is based on that the setting change condition is satisfied when the specific information is not stored in the specific information storage means when power supply to the gaming machine is started. When the setting change mode is controlled (when the setting change flag is not set when the power is turned on (NO in step S21TM4030), the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state and the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state. Yes, and the RAM clear flag is 1 (RAM clear is executed after the setting change mode ends because the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state). If the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means, the setting change condition is satisfied regardless of whether or not the setting change condition is satisfied. Control to the setting change mode (when the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM4030), regardless of whether the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is satisfied or not) (Automatically controls the setting change mode)
It is characterized by
According to this, when the power is cut off during the control of the setting change mode, the setting information is stored in the setting change mode even when the setting change condition is not satisfied. Since it is controlled, workability can be improved.

The gaming machine of means Q3
A gaming machine of means Q1 or means Q2,
The setting change mode control means, when the power supply to the gaming machine is started, the transition operation (when the setting change flag is not set when the power is turned on (NO in step S21TM4030), the gaming machine frame 3 Is in the open state, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the RAM clear flag is 1 (the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state, so the RAM is cleared after the setting change mode ends. Is executed), the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is satisfied), and it is possible to control the setting change mode based on It is possible to end the setting change mode based on a specific operation (confirmed that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in step S21TM4680),
The specific information storage means stores the specific information when being controlled to the setting change mode (sets a setting change flag at the timing of step S21TM4580 when control of the setting change mode is started), and performs the specific operation. The specific information is erased when the setting change mode ends based on the above (the setting change flag is cleared at the timing of step S21TM4720 when the control of the setting change mode ends),
The setting change mode control means, when power supply to the gaming machine is started, when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means, regardless of whether or not the shift operation is performed, When the setting change mode is controlled (when the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM4030), regardless of whether or not the condition for changing to the setting change mode is satisfied, The setting change mode is automatically controlled), and the setting change mode is ended based on the specific operation (the setting change mode is ended based on the confirmation that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in step S21TM4680). Let)
It is characterized by
According to this, the condition for ending the control of the setting change mode can be appropriately determined.

The gaming machine of means Q4 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means Q1 to means Q3,
A setting value storage means (setting value storage area of the RAM 102 for storing the setting values) for storing the setting values (six stages of setting values 0 to 5 having different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination),
It is possible to execute a control (a big hit determination process in a special symbol process process, etc.) according to the set value stored in the set value storage means,
The setting value stored in the setting value storage means is changed based on the changing operation when the setting change mode is controlled (when the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated in step S21TM4610). Change the setting value stored in the setting value storage area),
The setting change mode control means ends the setting change mode based on a specific operation when the setting change mode is controlled (in step S21TM4680, it is confirmed that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off). Based on the setting change mode),
The set value storage means is changed by the change operation in the setting change mode when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped without performing the specific operation when controlled in the setting change mode. The set value after the setting is continuously stored (the set value storage area is formed in the backup area of the RAM 102, and when the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated in the setting change mode, the set value storage area is stored. Since the set value stored in is changed, the set value after being changed by the change operation is retained even if the power is cut off in the setting change mode.)
It is characterized by
According to this, when the power supply is restarted, the set value after being changed by the change operation in the setting change mode before the power failure occurs is stored in the set value storage means, and the set value corresponding to the set value is stored. Since control is executed, workability can be improved.

The gaming machine of means Q5 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from means Q1 to means Q3,
A setting value storage means (setting value storage area of the RAM 102 for storing the setting values) for storing the setting values (six stages of setting values 0 to 5 having different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination),
It is possible to execute a control (a big hit determination process in a special symbol process process, etc.) according to the set value stored in the set value storage means,
The setting change mode control means stores the change operation under the control of the setting change mode and the setting value storage area when the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated in the setting change mode. Change only the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area, not the existing setting value), and change the setting value stored in the setting value storage means based on the specific operation after the changing operation. The setting change mode is terminated (the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area at that time is stored in the setting value storage area based on the confirmation that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in the setting change mode. To confirm it as a valid setting value and end the setting change mode),
The set value storage means performs the change operation in the setting change mode when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped without performing the specific operation when controlled in the setting change mode. The set value before being stored is stored (even when the setting switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated during the setting change mode, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is not changed unless the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off. Is not changed, so if the power is cut off in the setting change mode, the setting value before being controlled in the setting change mode is retained.)
It is characterized by
According to this, when the power supply is stopped in the unstable state where the setting change mode is not finished, the change of the set value can be limited.

(Explanation regarding the characteristic part 026IW)
Next, the characteristic unit 026IW will be described. First, a game state in the characteristic unit 026IW will be described. First, the gaming state in the characteristic unit 026IW includes a normal state (low probability/non-KT state) and a KT state (so-called small hit time) in which a small hit is more likely than in the normal state. Furthermore, there are two types of KT states, a first KT state and a second KT state, and in this feature section 026IW, the gaming state is a low probability state and a non-KT state (low probability/non-KT state: normal state). There is a case of being controlled, a case of being controlled to a low probability and a first KT state (low probability/first KT state), and a case of being controlled to a high probability and a first KT state (high probability/first KT state). In some cases, the probability is high and the second KT state (high probability/second KT state) is controlled.

In the first KT state among the KT states, as will be described later, although a small hit is likely to occur and the special variable winning ball device 17 is likely to be in an open state, the open time of the variable winning ball device 6B on the upstream side is extremely long and the small hit. Even if occurs, there are very few cases where the game balls are won in the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side (for example, about 100 balls per 100 fluctuations). Specifically, in the first KT state, it is controlled to a state in which a small hit is likely to occur and is also controlled to a high base state so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a long time. As will be described later, the second KT state in the KT state has a short opening time of the upstream side variable winning ball device 6B, and when a small hit occurs, the game ball is transferred to the downstream special variable winning ball device 17. Easy to win. Specifically, in the second KT state, it is controlled to a state in which a small hit is likely to occur and is also controlled to a low base state to shorten the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B.

Also, the KT state is a gaming state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state (low probability/non-KT state). Specifically, in the characteristic portion 026IW, the probability that the variable winning ball device 6B will be in the open state at the time of a normal drawing is higher in the KT state than in the normal state. And, while the ratio of small hits is low when the first special symbol changes, the ratio of small hits is high when the second special symbol changes (however, it will be described later. Therefore, the KT state is set to a gaming state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state. As a result, in the KT state, a small hit is frequently generated by mainly changing the second special symbol, which is a game state advantageous to the player.

It should be noted that the configuration for setting the KT state in the gaming state in which a small hit is more likely than in the normal state is not limited to this. For example, even in the KT state, the probability that the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state is the same as that in the normal state (for example, 10% or 100%), but when the second special symbol changes. By configuring the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern to be selected in the KT state to be shorter than in the normal state, the ratio of the number of fluctuations to the constant time in the KT state is higher than in the normal state, and the KT state is changed to the normal state. It may be a game state in which a small hit is more likely to occur.

In addition, the characteristic portion 026IW is configured such that the time required for the game ball to pass through the passage gate 41 and reach the variable winning ball device 6B is 0.6 seconds or more. Specifically, it is adjusted by the installation positions of the passage gate 41 and the variable winning ball device 6B, and the group of nails forming the flow path of the game ball. As will be described later in detail, in the characteristic part 026IW, the variable winning ball device 6B can be controlled to be in an open state based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41. In the first KT state described later, the game ball passes. The time from the passage of the gate 41 until the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the open state is 0.5 seconds, and the game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B after passing through the passage gate 41. Since it is shorter than the required time of 0.6 seconds, when one gaming ball passes through the passage gate 41 in the first KT state, the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to be in the open state. The game balls can be won as they are in the variable winning ball device 6B.

(Big hit probability, small hit probability)
9-1 and 9-2 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the big hit probability and the small hit probability for each set value. Among these, FIG. 9-1 has shown the big hit probability and the small hit probability when the variable display of a 1st special symbol is performed. In addition, FIG. 9-2 shows a big hit probability and a small hit probability when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-1 and 9-2, in this example, a case is shown in which the setting can be changed in six stages of setting values “1” to “6”. In addition, it is not limited to the case where the setting can be changed in 6 steps, and for example, the setting can be changed in 2 to 5 steps or the setting can be changed in 7 or more steps.

First, with reference to FIG. 9-1, the big hit probability and the small hit probability when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 9A, in the non-probable change state (low probability state), the setting value “1” has the lowest jackpot probability “205/65536”, which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. ing. Then, the jackpot probability becomes higher in the order of the set value “2”, the set value “3”, the set value “4”, and the set value “5”, and the set value “6” is the largest jackpot probability “247/65536”. High, it is the most advantageous setting for the player. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 9-1(B), in the probability variation state (high-probability state), the winning probability of the jackpot is 10 times larger than that in the non-probability variation state (low-probability state). When the value is "1", the jackpot probability is "2050/65536", which is the lowest, which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. Then, the jackpot probability becomes higher in the order of the set value “2”, the set value “3”, the set value “4”, and the set value “5”, and the set value “6” is the largest jackpot probability “2470/65536”. High, it is the most advantageous setting for the player.

On the other hand, regarding the small hit, as shown in FIGS. The small hit probability is constant at "6298/65536" regardless of whether it is a state) or a probability change state (high probability state). That is, in this example, the determination value for the small hit determination is common regardless of the set value, and is also common to the non-probability variation state and the probability variation state. Even when the big hit probability is made different according to the set value, while the small hit probability is constant, as shown in FIGS. May be configured to be different for the set values "1" to "6" so that the number of determination values for each set value is matched.

Next, with reference to FIG. 9-2, the big hit probability and the small hit probability when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 9-2(A), in the non-probable variation state (low probability state), the setting value "1" is the lowest with the jackpot probability "205/65536", which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. ing. Then, the jackpot probability becomes higher in the order of the set value “2”, the set value “3”, the set value “4”, and the set value “5”, and the set value “6” is the largest jackpot probability “247/65536”. High, it is the most advantageous setting for the player. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 9-2(B), in the probability variation state (high probability state), the winning probability of the jackpot is 10 times as large as that in the non-probability variation state (low probability state). When the value is "1", the jackpot probability is "2050/65536", which is the lowest, which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. Then, the jackpot probability becomes higher in the order of the set value “2”, the set value “3”, the set value “4”, and the set value “5”, and the set value “6” is the largest jackpot probability “2470/65536”. High, it is the most advantageous setting for the player.

On the other hand, with regard to the small hit, as shown in FIGS. 9-2(A) and 9(B), regardless of whether the setting value is “1” to “6”, the uncertain variation state (low probability The small hit probability is constant as “62986/65536” regardless of whether it is a state) or a probability change state (high probability state). That is, in this example, the determination value for the small hit determination is common regardless of the set value, and is also common to the non-probability variation state and the probability variation state. However, in this example, in the case of the variable display of the second special symbol (see FIG. 9-2 ), compared to the case of performing the variable display of the first special symbol (see FIG. 9-1 ), a small hit The winning probability is about 10 times (that is, the number of judgment values for the small hit determination when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the small hit when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. More than the number of judgment values for judgment). Even if the big hit probability is made different according to the set value, while the small hit probability is constant, as shown in FIGS. May be configured to be different for the set values "1" to "6" so that the number of determination values for each set value is matched.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 9-1 and 9-2, the determination value corresponding to the deviation is included in the determination values corresponding to all the set values “1” to “6” (FIG. 9). -1 and FIG. 9-2, there is no set value at which the outlier probability becomes 0). The determination value corresponding to the deviation is different according to the set value (depending on which of the set values "1" to "6" as shown in FIGS. 9-1 and 9-2). , The outliers are different).

Note that the present invention is not limited to the mode shown in this example, and for example, the deviation probability may be 0 (that is, a set value that does not include the determination value corresponding to the deviation). For example, at the setting value “6” having the highest advantage (the highest jackpot probability), the outfall probability becomes 0, and the determination value corresponding to the outfall may not be included.

Further, the present invention is not limited to the mode shown in this example, and for example, the small hit probability may be 0 (that is, the judgment value does not include the judgment value corresponding to the small hit). For example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed (FIG. 9-1), the small hit probability is uniformly set to 0, and the determination value for the small hit may not be included. Good.

Note that in FIGS. 9-1(A) and (B) and FIGS. 9-2(A) and (B), the small hit probability is the same in the probability variation state (high probability state) and the non-variance probability state (low probability state). Although the probability of deviation is different, the probability of big hit in the probability change state (high probability state) is higher than the probability of non-probability change state (low probability state). It is also possible to reduce and match the outlier probabilities. Further, even if the set values are different values, for example, "1" and "2", the big hit probability and the small hit probability may be matched. As a result, in a gaming machine in which the number of stages that can be substantially set is less than 6, or in a gaming machine in which there is no difference in advantage due to the setting changing function, a type of gaming machine having a 6-step setting changing function and a hardware/software configuration The manufacturing cost can be reduced.

(Big hit type determination table)
FIGS. 9-3(A) and 9(B) are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot pattern, the jackpot type is "2R normal jackpot", "2R certainty variation jackpot", "based on the random number for jack type determination. It is a table referred to in order to determine any one of "6R regular big hit", "6R certainty big hit", "9R certainty big hit", or "16R certainty big hit".

As shown in FIG. 9-3(A), in the feature unit 026IW, regardless of whether the setting value is "1" to "6", when performing variable display of the first special symbol, There is a 9% probability of being determined as a “16R probability variation jackpot”, a 56% probability of being determined as a “6R probability variation jackpot”, and a 35% probability of being determined as a “6R regular jackpot”. Further, as shown in FIG. 9-3(B), in the feature unit 026IW, regardless of which of the setting values “1” to “6”, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. Has a probability of 10%, is determined to be a “16R probability variation jackpot”, has a probability of 50% to be determined to be a “9R probability variation jackpot”, has a probability of 5% to be determined to be a “2R probability variation jackpot”, and has a probability of 35% to be determined. 2R normal big hit” is decided.

The "16R probability variation big hit" is a big hit that is controlled to a big hit game state of 16 rounds and is shifted to a high probability state after the end of the big hit game state. In addition, "9R probability variation big hit" is a big hit that is controlled to a big hit game state of 9 rounds and is shifted to a high probability state after the end of the big hit game state. Further, the "6R probability variable big hit" is a big hit that is controlled to a big round gaming state of 6 rounds, and is shifted to a high probability state after the end of the big winning gaming state. Further, the "2R probability variation big hit" is a big hit which is controlled to a big hit game state of two rounds and is shifted to a high probability state after the end of the big hit game state.

The "6R normal big hit" is a big hit that is controlled to a big round gaming state for 6 rounds and is shifted to a low probability state after the big hit gaming state ends. Further, the "2R normal big hit" is a big hit which is controlled to a big hit game state of two rounds and is controlled to a low probability state after the end of the big hit game state.

In this characteristic part 026IW, when "16R certainty variation jackpot", "9R certainty variation jackpot", "6R certainty variation jackpot", and "6R regular jackpot", a predetermined period (in this example, in each round of the jackpot game) The special winning opening is controlled in an open state until 30 seconds) elapses or a predetermined number (10 in this example) of game balls are won, and it is possible to win a maximum of 10 large winning openings in each round. Is. On the other hand, in the case of "2R probability variable big hit" and "2R normal big hit", the big winning opening is controlled to be in an open state only for a short period (1.8 seconds in this example) in each round of the big hit game. The number of prizes that can be won in each round is about two to three.

Further, in this characteristic unit 026IW, when the big hit game is finished, it is controlled to any of the first KT state, the second KT state or the non-KT state according to the game state before the big hit game and the big hit type, How to transition the game state after the big hit game will be described later (see FIG. 9-28).

(Small hit type judgment table)
9-4(A) and 9(B) are explanatory diagrams showing the small hit type determination table stored in the ROM 101. The small hit type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a small hit pattern, based on the random number for the small hit type determination, the small hit type is "small hit A", "small hit B". , Or “Small hits C”.

As shown in FIG. 9-4(A), in the feature unit 026IW, regardless of whether the setting value is "1" to "6", when performing variable display of the first special symbol, 100% of the time, it is decided as "small hit A". Further, as shown in FIG. 9-4(B), in the feature unit 026IW, regardless of whether the setting value is "1" to "6", when performing variable display of the second special symbol, Is determined to be a “small hit B” with a probability of 70%, and is determined to be a “small hit C” with a probability of 30%.

In this example, as will be described later, in the case of "small hit A", the special winning opening is opened only for a very short 0.2 seconds during the small hit game (see FIG. 9-9), and the small hit game You can hardly expect to win a game ball to the special prize hole. Also, in the case of "small hit B", the special winning opening is opened for 0.8 seconds during the small hit game (see Fig. 9-10), and the winning of the game ball to the special winning opening during the small hit game. Can be expected to some extent. In the case of "small hit C", the special winning opening is opened for 1.8 seconds during the small hit game (see Fig. 9-11), and the game ball is won into the special winning opening during the small hit game. Can be most expected.

(Variation pattern table)
FIGS. 9-5 to 9-7 are explanatory views showing a variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol and the decorative symbol used in the characteristic part 026IW. EXT shown in FIGS. 9-5 to 9-7 is the second byte data of the effect control command (2-byte configuration) corresponding to each variation pattern.

In the example shown in FIGS. 9-5 to 9-7, nine types of first variation patterns #01 to #09 for the first special symbol and the decorative symbol, and a second variation pattern for the second special symbol and the decorative symbol. 34 types of #01 to #34 are used. Hereinafter, for example, the variation pattern #n (n=01 to 09 or 01 to 34) means both the first variation pattern #n and the second variation pattern #n.

When performing the variable display of the first special symbol, in the non-KT state (low probability/non-KT state), the variation pattern for the first special symbol for non-KT time shown in FIG. 9-5(A) The table is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 9-5(A), when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, it is determined to be one of the first variation patterns #01 to #06.

When executing the variable display of the first special symbol, in the KT state (low probability/first KT state, high probability/first KT state, high probability/second KT state), in FIG. 9-5(B) The variation pattern table for the first special symbol for KT shown is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 9-5(B), when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in the KT state, it is determined to be one of the first variation patterns #07 to #09.

When performing the variable display of the second special symbol, in the non-KT state (low probability/non-KT state), the variation pattern for the second special symbol for non-KT time shown in FIG. 9-6(C) The table is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 9-6(C), when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns #01 to #03. Specifically, when it is determined to be off, the second variation pattern #01 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a long period of 15 minutes. In addition, the second variation pattern #02 is determined even when it is determined to be a small hit, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a long period of 15 minutes. In addition, when it is determined to be a big hit, the second variation pattern #03 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a certain long period of 5 minutes.

In this characteristic part 026IW, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed even in the non-KT state and a small hit occurs, a situation in which a certain amount of prize balls can be expected due to the prize of the game ball to the special winning opening occurs. Will end up. Therefore, in this characteristic unit 026IW, as shown in FIG. 9-6(C), even if the variable display of the second special symbol is executed during the non-KT state, the variable time is extremely lengthened and the frequency of execution of the variable display is increased. The number of small hits is reduced to reduce the occurrence frequency of the small hits, thereby preventing a situation in which the small hits are aimed at to obtain a prize ball even in the non-KT state. In the characteristic part 026IW, the “frequent occurrence of small hits” is, for example, the occurrence rate of small hits per unit time (for example, 1 minute), and in the KT state, for example, small hits per unit time. Is higher than in the normal state.

In this characteristic part 026IW, as shown in FIG. 9-6(C), when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, the variation time is obtained even when it is a big hit. By relatively lengthening to 5 minutes, it is possible to prevent the act of unreasonably aiming at a prize ball due to winning in the special winning opening during the non-KT state. However, in the case of a big hit, it is not necessary to lengthen the first reserved memory in comparison with the case of a small hit. There is.

When executing the variable display of the second special symbol, in the case of low probability/first KT state, the big hit game based on 6R normal big hit or 2R normal big hit that triggered the low probability/first KT state is ended. A fluctuation pattern table is selected according to the number of fluctuations since then. In this case, if the variation display of the first variation is executed, the low probability/first KT shown in FIG. 9-6(D) and the second special symbol variation pattern table for the first variation are selected and varied. The pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 9-6(D), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the first variation of the low probability/first KT state, one of the second variation patterns #04 to #06. Is decided.

As shown in FIG. 9-6(D), when it is determined that the first change of the low probability/first KT state is the deviation, the change time is shortened to 5 seconds and the second change pattern #04 of the shortened change is set. It is determined. Further, when it is determined that a small hit is the first change in the low probability/first KT state, the second change pattern #05 (the second start winning opening is opened) is a relatively long change time of 7 seconds for the small hit. (Variation pattern for preparation). As described above, in the characteristic part 026IW, when the first KT state is controlled, although the frequency of small hits increases, the variable winning ball device 6B is actually opened to increase the opening time of the special winning ball. The special winning opening in the ball device 17 is set so as to rarely win a prize. However, in a state immediately after shifting to the low probability/first KT state, there is a possibility that a certain amount of game balls are accumulated on the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B or the special variable winning ball device 17, and the special variable winning ball is immediately generated. If the device 17 is controlled to be in the open state, a considerable number of game balls may win the special winning opening. Therefore, in this characteristic portion 026IW, in the first variation of the first KT state, by securing a variation time of at least 7 seconds, the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 before the transition to the first KT state. By controlling the special variable winning ball device 17 to the open state after a sufficient time has passed until all the game balls accumulated on the bottom member are allowed to enter the special winning opening, This prevents the situation where a prize ball more than expected is obtained in the 1KT state. Further, when it is determined as a big hit as the first variation of the low probability/first KT state, the second variation pattern #06 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for 2 minutes.

Further, in the case of executing the variable display of 2 to 49 fluctuations after finishing the big hit game based on the 6R normal big hit or the 2R normal big hit that triggered the low probability/first KT state, FIG. 9-6 ( The low probability/first KT time shown in E) and the second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for the 2nd to 49th fluctuations are selected and the fluctuation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 9-6(E), when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed as the 2-49th variation of the low probability/first KT state, the second variation patterns #07 to #13 It is decided to either. Further, as shown in FIG. 9-6(E), when it is determined that the low probability/the second KT state of the 2nd to 49th variation of the first KT state is a deviation, the second variation pattern # of the shortened variation having a short variation time of 5 seconds # 07 or the second fluctuation pattern #08 of the shortened fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 1 second, which is even shorter, may be determined. On the other hand, when it is determined that the low probability/the 2nd to 49th fluctuations of the first KT state are deviations, the second fluctuation pattern #09 with reach may be determined. Further, when the small probability is determined as the second to 49th fluctuations of the low probability/first KT state, the fluctuation time is as short as 5 seconds and the second fluctuation pattern #10 of the shortened fluctuation or the fluctuation time is as short as 1 second. The second variation pattern #11 of shortening variation may be determined. On the other hand, when it is determined as the small hit as the 2-49th variation of the low probability/first KT state, the second variation pattern #12 with reach may be determined. The second fluctuation patterns #07 and #10 are fluctuation patterns that can be selected only when the second reserved memory is not stored, and the second fluctuation patterns #08 and #11 are stored when one or more second reserved memories are stored. This is a variation pattern that can be selected only when As a result, the pending storage is quickly consumed and the operating rate is increased. Further, when it is determined that the big hit is the second to 49th variation of the low probability/first KT state, the second variation pattern #13 with reach is determined.

Also, after the big hit game based on the 6R normal big hit or the 2R normal big hit that triggered the low probability/first KT state, the 50th fluctuation display (that is, the low probability/final change in the first KT state) is executed. If yes, the low probability/first KT time and the 50th variation second special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9-6(F) are selected, and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 9-6(F), when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed as the 50th variation of the low probability/first KT state, one of the second variation patterns #14 to #16. Is decided.

In the characteristic part 026IW, when the low probability/first KT state is controlled, for example, a character display such as “during chance time” is displayed on the image display device 5. As shown in FIG. 9-6(F), when it is determined that the 50th variation of the low probability/first KT state is a deviation or a small hit, a character display such as “end of chance time!!” is displayed on the image display device 5. The second variation pattern #14 or the second variation pattern #15 accompanied by the end display is performed. Further, as shown in FIG. 9-6(F), when it is determined that the 50th variation of the low probability/first KT state is a big hit, the image display device 5 displays a character display such as “end of chance time!!”. The second variation pattern #16 with a predetermined restoration display after the completion display to be performed is determined.

In addition, in this characteristic part 026IW, as shown in FIG. 9-5, when it is a big hit in the variable display of the first special symbol during the KT state, the first variation pattern #07 with a variation time of 10 seconds is displayed. Is configured to determine. This is a case where a big hit occurs immediately in the change display of the first special symbol immediately after the transition to the second KT state, and if the change time of the big hit change of the first special symbol is set to a long change time, Since the variation of the second special symbol executed during the big hit variation of the first special symbol is configured to be a forced outfall, the forced outfall frequently occurs even though the second KT state and the player is a small hit. You will not be able to receive any profit from. Therefore, in this feature unit 026IW, by changing the variation time of the big hit variation of the first special symbol to a short variation time, the big hit game state based on the variation of the first special symbol is generated before the frequent occurrence of forced deviation. It is configured.

Note that, unlike the feature unit 026IW, even when the variation of the second special symbol is started during the big hit variation of the first special symbol, the variation of the second special symbol is not forced to fall off (for example, the first Special symbol big hit symbol When the second special symbol is changing at the time of stop, if the gaming machine of the second special symbol is forced out), the variation time of the first special symbol big hit in the KT state May be a long fluctuation time (for example, 1 minute). This is a case where a big hit occurs immediately in the change display of the first special symbol immediately after the transition to the second KT state, and if the change time of the big hit is the same short change time as the deviation, the player You will not be able to receive any profit from the small hit. Therefore, if the variation time of the big hit of the first special symbol in the KT state is a long variation time (for example, 1 minute), even in such a case, a sufficient time that at least a plurality of small hits can occur. (For example, 1 minute) is ensured.

When executing the variable display of the second special symbol, if it is in the high probability/first KT state, the jackpot game based on the 6R certainty variation jackpot or the 9R certainty variation jackpot that triggered the high probability/first KT state is finished. A fluctuation pattern table is selected according to the number of fluctuations since then. In this case, if the variation display of the first variation is executed, the high probability/first KT shown in FIG. 9-7(G) and the second special symbol variation pattern table for the first variation are selected and varied. The pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 9-7(G), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the first variation of the high probability/first KT state, one of the second variation patterns #17 to #21. Is decided.

As in the case of the first change in the low probability/first KT state, as shown in FIG. 9-7(G), the change time is also determined when the deviation is determined as the first change in the high probability/first KT state. The second variation pattern #17 with a shortened variation as short as 5 seconds may be determined. On the other hand, when the first variation of the high probability/first KT state is determined to be a deviation, the second variation pattern #18 with reach may be determined. Also, when the small hit is determined as the first variation of the high probability/first KT state, the variation pattern (second variation pattern #19) for the second start winning opening opening preparation may be determined. On the other hand, when the small hit is determined as the first variation of the high probability/first KT state, the second variation pattern #20 with reach may be determined. Further, as shown in FIG. 9-7(G), when it is determined that the first change of the high probability/first KT state is a big hit, the second change pattern #21 with reach is determined.

Further, in the case of executing the variation display after the second variation after the jackpot game based on the 6R certainty variation jackpot and the 9R certainty variation jackpot that triggered the high probability/first KT state, if the variation display after the second variation is executed, FIG. 9-7 (H ) High probability / at the time of the first KT and the second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for the second fluctuation and thereafter is selected and the fluctuation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 9-7(H), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the second variation after the high probability/first KT state, any of the second variation patterns #22 to #28. Will be decided.

Note that, as in the case of the 2nd to 49th fluctuations of the low probability/first KT state, as shown in FIG. In some cases, the second variation pattern #22 of a shortened variation with a variation time of as short as 5 seconds or the second variation pattern #23 of a shortened variation with a variation time of as short as 1 second may be determined. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is a deviation after the second variation of the high probability/first KT state, the second variation pattern #24 with reach may be determined. In addition, when it is determined that the small hit is the second variation of the high probability/first KT state and thereafter, the variation time is shortened to 5 seconds and the second variation pattern #25 of the variation or the variation time is shortened to 1 second. The second fluctuation pattern #26 of fluctuation may be determined. On the other hand, when it is determined that the small hit has occurred after the second variation of the high probability/first KT state, the second variation pattern #27 with reach may be determined. The second fluctuation patterns #22 and #25 are fluctuation patterns that can be selected only when the second reserved memory is not stored, and the second fluctuation patterns #23 and #26 are stored when one or more second reserved memories are stored. This is a variation pattern that can be selected only when As a result, the pending storage is quickly consumed and the operating rate is increased. In addition, when it is determined that the big hit is the second variation after the high probability/first KT state, the second variation pattern #28 with reach is determined.

When performing the variable display of the second special symbol, if the high probability / second KT state, the high probability / second KT variation pattern table for the second high probability shown in FIG. 9-7 (I) The variation pattern is selected and determined. As shown in FIG. 9-7(I), when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability/second KT state, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns #29 to #34. ..

As shown in FIG. 9-7(I), when it is determined that there is a deviation in the high-probability/second KT state, the variation time is determined to be the second variation pattern #29 with a short variation of 1.5 seconds. In some cases, the second fluctuation pattern #30, which is a normal fluctuation having a fluctuation time of 5 seconds, may be determined. On the other hand, when the high probability/second KT state is determined to be a deviation, the second variation pattern #31 with reach may be determined. In addition, when it is determined as a small hit in the high probability/second KT state, when the variation time is determined to be the second variation pattern #32 with a short variation time of 1.5 seconds, or when the variation time is usually 5 seconds. The second fluctuation pattern #33 of fluctuation may be determined. Further, when it is determined that the big hit in the high probability/second KT state, the second variation pattern #34 with reach is determined.

When determining the variation pattern, more specifically, depending on which variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is to be executed, the current game state, and the variable display result. Using the fluctuation pattern table, a lottery process is performed based on the random number for fluctuation pattern determination, and which fluctuation pattern is to be determined. 9-8, in order to determine the variation pattern when the variable display result is a small hit in the variation pattern table for the second special symbol for high probability/second KT time shown in FIG. 9-7(I) It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the variation pattern table for small hits.

As shown in FIG. 9-8, in the feature unit 026IW, when performing variable display of the second special symbol during the high probability/second KT state, when performing variable display that is a small hit, Regardless of which of the set values is "1" to "6", the second variation pattern #32 is determined with a probability of 70% and the second variation pattern #33 with a probability of 30%. Therefore, in this example, in the case of the second KT state, there is a high probability that the fluctuation pattern of the shortened fluctuation of 1.5 seconds will be selected.

In addition, in FIG. 9-8, as an example, the variation pattern table when executing the small hit variation of the second special symbol during the high probability/second KT state is shown, but in FIG. 9-5 to FIG. 9-7. The other variation pattern tables shown are similarly configured, and each variation pattern is determined with the same probability regardless of which of the set values “1” to “6” is set.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 9-6 to 9-8, the shortening fluctuation of 5 seconds or 1 second is executed in the case of the first KT state, and the shortening fluctuation of 1.5 seconds is high in the case of the second KT state. However, the present invention is not limited to such an aspect. For example, a shortened fluctuation of 5 seconds or 1 second may be executed in the low probability state, and a shortened fluctuation of 1.5 seconds may be executed in the high probability state.

Next, the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the KT state will be described. 9-9 to 9-11 are explanatory views for explaining the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the KT state. Of these, FIG. 9-9 shows an opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the case of the small hit A. 9-10 shows the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the case of the small hit B. 9-11 shows the open patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the case of a small hit C. Further, FIGS. 9-9(1) to 9-11(1) respectively show open patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the first KT state, and FIG. 9-9(2). 9 to 11 (2) show open patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the second KT state, respectively.

First, the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the first KT state will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-9(1) to 9-11(1). As shown in FIGS. 9-9(1) to 9-11(1), when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 and the game ball is detected by the gate switch 21, the normal symbol display 20 is normally displayed. The variable display of the symbol is executed, and when it is determined to be a normal symbol, the hit symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display device 20, and when it is determined to be out, the deviating symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display device 20. To be done. In this characteristic unit 026IW, as shown in FIGS. 9-9(1) to 9-11(1), the variation time of the normal symbol is 0.2 seconds, and the symbol determination for deriving and displaying the winning symbol or the deviating symbol is determined. The time is 0.2 seconds. When the winning symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIGS. 9-9(1) to 9-11(1), after the symbol fixing time of 0.2 seconds has elapsed, the second starting winning opening is opened. After the pre-processing time of 0.1 seconds has passed, the variable winning ball apparatus 6B is opened for 5.5 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the second start winning hole.

When the game ball is won in the second start winning hole when the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, and when it is determined to be a small hit, The small hitting symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B. Then, when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, in the case of the small hit A, the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 0.2 seconds as shown in FIG. 9-9(1). In the case of small hit B, as shown in FIG. 9-10(1), the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 0.8 seconds, and in the case of small hit C, FIG. As shown in -11 (1), the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 1.8 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the special winning opening (however, in the case of the small hit A. , Because the special variable winning ball device 17 opens only for an extremely short 0.2 seconds, almost no winning can be expected. However, in the first KT state, as shown in FIG. 9-9(1), the opening time of the downstream special variable winning ball device 17 is as short as 0.2 seconds, 0.8 seconds or 1.8 seconds. In contrast, the open time of the variable winning ball device 6B on the upstream side is as long as 5.5 seconds. Therefore, in the first KT state, although a small hit is likely to occur, it is extremely rare that a game ball is won in the special winning opening (for example, about 1 ball for every 100 variable displays).

In the first KT state, as shown in FIGS. 9-9(1) to 9-11(1), after the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B is completed, the next variable winning ball device 6B can be opened. After the at least 0.5 seconds, which is the sum of the following variation time of the ordinary symbol of 0.2 seconds, symbol determination time of 0.2 seconds, and second starting winning opening opening pretreatment time of 0.1 seconds, is there. Therefore, in the characteristic portion 026IW, in the first KT state, a closing period of at least 0.5 seconds is provided as an interval period after the variable winning ball device 6B is opened.

Further, in the present characteristic unit 026IW, in the first KT state, after the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41 in a state where the normal symbol is not changed, the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to be in an open state. After 0.5 seconds which is the sum of the variation time of the normal symbol 0.2 seconds, the symbol confirmation time 0.2 seconds and the second starting winning opening opening pre-processing time 0.1 seconds, the game ball is The time required from passing through the passage gate 41 to reaching the variable winning ball apparatus 6B is about 0.6 seconds. In this way, in the first KT state, the time from when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 to when the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to be in an open state in a state where the normal symbol is not changed, Normally, the variable winning ball device 6B is already opened because it is shorter than the time it takes for the gaming ball to reach the variable winning ball device 6B after the gaming ball passes through the passing gate 41 in a state where the symbols are not changed. The game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B while being controlled to the state. Therefore, in the first KT state, the game balls that have passed through the passage gate 41 in a state where the normal symbols are not changed are easy to win in the variable winning ball device 6B.

Next, the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 17 in the second KT state will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-9(2) to 9-11(2). As shown in FIGS. 9-9(2) to 9-11(2), when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 and the game ball is detected by the gate switch 21, the normal pattern display 20 is normally displayed. The variable display of the symbol is executed, and when it is determined to be a normal symbol, the hit symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display device 20, and when it is determined to be out, the deviating symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display device 20. To be done. In this characteristic part 026IW, as shown in FIGS. 9-9(2) to 9-11(2), the variation time of the normal symbol is set to 1.0 second, and the symbol determination for deriving and displaying the hit symbol or the deviating symbol is determined. The time is 0.2 seconds. Then, when the winning symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIGS. 9-9(2) to 9-11(2), after the symbol fixing time of 0.2 seconds has passed, the second starting winning opening is opened. After the pre-processing time of 2.6 seconds elapses, the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for 0.2 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the second starting winning port.

When the game ball is won in the second start winning hole when the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, and when it is determined to be a small hit, The small hitting symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B. Then, when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, in the case of the small hit A, as shown in FIG. 9-9(2), the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 0.2 seconds. In the case of small hit B, as shown in FIG. 9-10(2), the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 0.8 seconds, and in the case of small hit C, FIG. As shown in -11 (2), the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened for 1.8 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the special winning opening.

In the second KT state, unlike the first KT state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is extremely short at 0.2 seconds. Further, in the characteristic part 026IW, in the second KT state, at least 3.8 seconds (variation time of normal symbol 1.0 seconds + symbol determination time 0 as an interval period (closing period) after the variable winning ball device 6B is opened. A relatively long period of 2 seconds + the time before the second start winning opening opening process is 2.6 seconds) is secured. Therefore, in the second KT state, as shown in FIGS. 9-9(2) to 9-11(2), the open time of the variable winning ball device 6B on the upstream side is short and the interval period (closed period) is long. As compared with the first KT state, the game ball easily enters the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side, and the game ball easily enters the special winning opening. However, in the case of a small hit A, the special variable winning ball device 17 opens only for an extremely short 0.2 seconds, so that the winning of the game ball into the special winning opening can hardly be expected even in the second KT state.

In the second KT state, since a game ball can easily enter the special winning opening and a prize ball is easily obtained, this example is also called "small hit RUSH". In the second KT state, "small hit RUSH" Characters such as “” are displayed.

In this example, the opening time of the special variable winning a prize ball device 17 (special winning opening) is changed depending on whether the small hit type is a small hit A to C. I can't stop. For example, the number of times of opening the special variable winning ball device 17 may be changed depending on which of the small hit types A to C. In this case, for example, in the case of the small hit A, the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened only once during the small hit game, whereas in the case of the small hit B or the small hit C, during the small hit game. The special variable winning ball device 17 may be configured to be opened 2 to 11 times. Further, for example, even if the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 17 is somewhat short, by opening the special variable winning ball device 17 for 0.4 seconds four times, the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning opening ) May be provided with a small hit type in which a game ball can be won to some extent, and various modes are conceivable. Further, in this example, the case where the small hit types are three kinds of small hits A to C is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode, and for example, four or more small hit types may be provided. Good.

Further, in the characteristic portion 026IW, in the second KT state, after the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41 in a state where the normal symbol is not changed, the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to be in an open state. It is after the total of 3.8 seconds which is the total of the variation time of the normal symbol of 1.0 second, the symbol fixing time of 0.2 seconds and the second starting winning opening opening pre-processing time of 2.6 seconds, and the game ball is The time required from passing through the passage gate 41 to reaching the variable winning ball apparatus 6B is about 0.6 seconds. In this way, in the second KT state, the time from when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 to when the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to be in an open state in a state where the normal symbol is not changed, Normally, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state because it is longer than the time it takes for the gaming ball to reach the variable winning ball device 6B after the gaming ball passes through the passage gate 41 in a state where the symbols are not changed. The game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 6B before being controlled to. Therefore, in the second KT state, the game balls that have passed through the passage gate 41 in a state where the normal symbols are not changed are difficult to win in the variable winning ball device 6B.

In addition, in this characteristic part 026IW, the process of executing the variable display of the normal symbols and controlling the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B is a normal symbol process process by the game controlling microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103). This is performed by executing (see step S26). Further, the game control microcomputer 100, in the normal symbol process process of step S26, whether the game state is a probability change state (high probability state), whether in the non-KT state, the first KT state or the second KT state. Regardless of whether there is a big hit game state or not, it is determined with the same probability (for example, 10% or 100%) whether or not to be a normal figure hit.

In the characteristic part 026IW, in the first KT state and the second KT state, the variation time of the normal symbol and the symbol determination time are the same at 0.2 seconds each, and the second starting winning opening opening pre-processing time is the second. A case has been shown in which the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball apparatus 6B is made different by shortening it to 0.1 seconds in the 1KT state and lengthening it to 2.6 seconds in the second KT state. I can't. For example, the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball apparatus 6B may be different by changing the variation time and the symbol determination time between the first KT state and the second KT state. Further, for example, the time after the second starting winning opening opening processing after closing the variable winning ball device 6B is configured to be controllable, and if the second starting winning opening opening processing time is different between the first KT state and the second KT state. The variable winning ball apparatus 6B may be configured to have a different closing period (interval period). Particularly, if the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 6B in the first KT state is shortened by any of the above methods, the winning of the special winning opening in the first KT state can be suppressed. .

As will be described later, in the characteristic unit 026IW, in the first KT state, by setting the high base flag indicating the high base state to control the high base state, the characteristics shown in FIGS. As shown in 9-11 (1), the variable winning ball apparatus 6B is controlled to be opened for a long time. In addition, in the second KT state, by controlling the low base state without setting the high base flag, the variable winning ball device 6B is opened as shown in FIGS. 9-9(2) to 9-11(2). It is controlled to shorten the time.

In addition, for example, a special flag (open extension flag) indicating that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is extended is provided, and if the special flag is set, it is shown in FIGS. 9-9(1) to 9- The variable winning ball device 6B as shown in FIG. 11(1) is controlled by the first opening pattern (long opening) that opens for a long time, and if the special flag is not set, FIG. 9-9(2) to FIG. 9-11. The variable winning ball device 6B shown in (2) may be configured to be controlled by a second opening pattern (short opening) that opens for a short time. That is, the special flag may be set only in the first KT state, and the special flag may be set not to be set in other states including the big hit game state.

Further, even in the first KT state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B may be shortened when the low-probability/last variation display in the first KT state is executed. For example, in the shortened variation period of the special symbol of 50 times of the low probability/first KT state, the above-mentioned special flag may be erased in response to the 49th variation stop of the special symbol. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the long open of the variable winning ball device 6B when performing the left-handed notification after the end of the low probability/first KT state. be able to.

As described above, in the case of configuring the variable winning ball device 6B using the opening control flag (special flag) of the variable winning ball device 6B, a flag for shortening fluctuation of the variable display of the special symbol is further used. The variable display of the special symbol may be controlled in this case, and in this case, the special flag and the flag for shortening variation may be separately managed and controlled.

Further, the variable winning ball device 6B may be configured to be short-circuited open during the low probability/non-KT state. With such a configuration, when the probability of opening the variable winning ball device 6B is high in the low probability/non-KT state (left hit state), only a few game balls are operated to be fired. Thus, it is possible to prevent the variable winning ball device 6B from winning, and it is possible to prevent the right hitting operation from being performed during the low probability/non-KT state.

In this characteristic part 026IW, as shown in FIGS. 9-9 to 9-11, the variation time of the normal symbol is set to a short time of 0.2 seconds. This is, for example, in the case where the variable display of the second special symbol having a relatively long variation time is executed in the first KT state, the variable winning ball is in a state in which the normal symbol is in a variation stop and the normal symbol is not stored. This is because the device 6B is in a closed state, and it is possible to capture with the aim of the variation stop timing of the second special symbol (in the case of a small hit, if the variation time of the normal symbol is long, the passage gate). The variable winning ball device 6B does not open by the time the game ball that has passed through 41 reaches the variable winning ball device 6B or the special variable winning ball device 17, and the special winning opening can be won. On the other hand, in this characteristic part 026IW, by shortening the variation time of the normal symbol, the variable winning ball device 6B is opened before the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 and before reaching the variable winning ball device 6B. Since it is set to be started, it is possible to eliminate the capture element by the firing operation aiming at the small hit occurrence timing based on the variable display of the second special symbol in the first KT state.

9-12 and 9-13 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the content of the effect control command sent to the effect control CPU 120. In the example shown in FIG. 9-12, commands 8000 (H) to 8009 (H) and 8011 (H) to 8032 (H) are decorations that are variably displayed on the image display device 5 in correspondence with the variable display of special symbols. It is a production control command (fluctuation pattern command) for designating a variation pattern of a symbol. The effect control command for designating the variation pattern is also a command for designating the variation start. Therefore, when the effect control CPU 120 receives any of the commands 8000 (H) to 8009 (H) and 8011 (H) to 8032 (H), the image display device 5 starts variable display of decorative symbols. Control.

The command 9001 (H) is a production control command (display result 1 designation command) (deletion designation command) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is designated as a margin. Command 9002 (H) is a production control command (display result 2 designation command (16R probability variation big hit designation command)) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is 16R probability variation big hit. .. Command 9003 (H) is a production control command (display result 3 designation command (9R probability variation big hit designation command)) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is 9R probability variation big hit. . Command 9004 (H) is a production control command (display result 4 designation command (6R probability variation big hit designation command)) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is 6R probability variation big hit. . Command 9005 (H) is a production control command (display result 5 designation command (6R normal jackpot designation command)) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is 6R normal jackpot. . Command 9006 (H) is a production control command (display result 6 designation command (2R probability variation big hit designation command)) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is 2R probability variation big hit. . Command 9007 (H) is a production control command (display result 7 designation command (2R normal jackpot designation command)) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is 2R normal jackpot. . The command 9008 (H) is an effect control command (display result 8 designation command (small hit designation command)) that designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is a small hit.

Hereinafter, the display result 1 designation command to the display result 8 designation command may be referred to as a display result designation command. In this characteristic unit 026IW, since the game control microcomputer 100 transmits the display result designation command immediately before the variation pattern command, the display control instruction command received by the production control CPU 120 immediately before the first variation pattern command is It can be determined that it is a display result designation command for the first special symbol, and the display result designation command received immediately before the second variation pattern command can be determined to be a display result designation command for the second special symbol, so the display result Although the designation command can be combined for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the display result designation command for the first special symbol and the display result designation command for the second special symbol may be different.

Further, the game control microcomputer 100 does not send the display result designation command, but each of 15R probability variation big hit/9R probability variation big hit/6R probability variation big hit/6R normal big hit/2R probability variation big hit/2R normal big hit/small hit/out The variation pattern command may be determined corresponding to, and the production control CPU 120 may determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol based on the received variation pattern command.

Command 9C00 (H) is a production control command (right-handed lighting end designation command) that specifies that the right-handed indicator 26 has finished lighting. Command 9C01 (H) is a production control command (right-handed lighting start designation command) that specifies that the right-handed indicator 26 has started lighting.

Command A000 (H) is a production control command (first symbol confirmation designation command) that can specify the stop of the variable display of the first special symbol. Command A001 (H) is a production control command (second symbol confirmation designation command) that can specify the stop of the variable display of the second special symbol.

Command A002 (H) is a production control command (first compulsory symbol confirmation designation command) that can specify to forcibly stop the variable display of the first special symbol. Command A003 (H) is a production control command (second forced symbol confirmation designation command) that can specify that the variable display of the second special symbol is forcibly stopped.

Command BXXX (H) (X = arbitrary hexadecimal number) is a production control command sent from the start of the big hit game to the end of the big hit game. Among them, B000 (H) is an effect control command (first jackpot start designation command: first fanfare designating command) that designates the start of the first jackpot game. B001 (H) is an effect control command (first jackpot end designation command: first ending designation command) that designates the end of the first jackpot game. B002 (H) is a production control command (second jackpot start designation command: second fanfare design command) that designates the start of the second jackpot game. B003 (H) is an effect control command (second jackpot end designation command: second ending designation command) that designates the end of the second jackpot game. B004 (H) is an effect control command (small hit start designation command) for designating the start of the small hit game. B005 (H) is an effect control command (small hit end designation command) that specifies the end of the small hit game.

The command B1XX(H) is a production control command (a special winning opening open display command) that specifies the display during the round during the big hit game. The number of rounds displayed in "XX" is set. The command B2XX(H) is an effect control command (display command after opening the special winning opening) that specifies the display after the round during the big hit game (display of the interval between the rounds).

The command B400 (H) is an effect control command (a special winning opening winning designation command) that specifies that the game ball has won the big winning opening. Command B401 (H) is an effect control command (special winning a prize winning designation command) that specifies that a game ball has won a special winning opening.

The command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first effective start winning award designation command) indicating that the game ball has won the first starting winning opening in a state where the first reserved memory number has not reached 4. The command C001 (H) is an effect control command (second effective start winning award designation command) indicating that the game ball has won in the second starting winning opening in a state where the second reserved memory number has not reached 4. It should be noted that a command indicating the first reserved memory number may be transmitted as the first valid start winning combination designation command, and a command indicating the second reserved memory number may be transmitted as the second valid start winning combination designation command. Then, the first effective start winning award designating command and the second effective starting award winning designating command are commands indicating that there is a starting winning.

Command C801 (H) is a production control command (gate passage designation command) that designates that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41.

Command D000 (H) is a production control command (first customer) that specifies that it is in the first customer waiting state (the state in which the first special symbol is not changed and the first reserved memory is not stored). Waiting demo display designation command). Command D001 (H) is a production control command (second customer) that specifies that it is in the second customer waiting state (the state in which the second special symbol is not changed and the second hold memory is not stored). Waiting demo display designation command). The first customer waiting demo display designation command may be a command that can be transmitted only in the normal state. Further, the second customer waiting demonstration display designation command may be a command that can be transmitted only in the KT state.

The command E000(H) is an effect control command (low probability/non-KT background designating command) for designating the background display when the game state is the low probability/non-KT state. Command E001 (H) is a production control command (low probability/first KT background designating command) that designates background display when the gaming state is low probability/first KT state. The command E002(H) is a production control command (high accuracy/first KT background designating command) for designating the background display when the gaming state is the high probability/first KT state. The command E003 (H) is a production control command (high-accuracy/second KT background designation command) for designating the background display when the gaming state is the high probability/second KT state.

Command E1XX (H) is a production control command (setting value command) that specifies the setting value that is currently set. The set value is set to "XX". For example, when the set value is set to "1", the command E101(H) is transmitted as the set value command. Further, for example, when the set value is set to "6", the command E106(H) is transmitted as the set value command.

When the effect control CPU 120 (specifically, the effect control CPU 120) mounted on the effect control board 12 receives the effect control command described above from the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11, 9-12 and the display state of the image display device 5 according to the contents shown in FIG. 9-13, the display state of the lamp is changed, and the sound number data is output to the voice control board 13. Note that production control commands other than the production control commands shown in FIGS. 9-12 and 9-13 are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. For example, more detailed effect control commands related to the big hit game and effect control commands indicating the game state (for example, effect control commands indicating initialization commands) are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

9-14 is a flowchart showing a first special symbol normal process (step S110A) in the first special symbol process process. The state where the first special symbol normal process is executed is a case where the value of the first special symbol process flag is the value indicating step S110A. In addition, when the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S110A, in a state in which the variable display of the first special symbol is not made in the first special symbol display device 4A, and, This is a case where neither the first big hit game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined number of times) nor the small hit game (the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened) is being played.

In the first special symbol normal processing, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first confirms the value of the first reserved storage number (step 026IWS51A). Specifically, the count value of the first reserved storage number counter is confirmed.

If the first number of reserved storages is 0, the first customer waiting demonstration display designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 026IWS52A).

If the first reserved storage number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 100 reads each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number=1 in the first reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 102, and the RAM 102. In the first random number buffer area (step 026IWS53A), decrement the value of the first reserved memory number by 1 (decrement the value of the first reserved memory number counter by 1), and shift the contents of each storage area. (Step 026IWS54A). That is, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number=n (n=2, 3, 4) in the first reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 102 is calculated as follows: Stored in the storage area corresponding to 1. Therefore, the order in which the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective first reserved storage numbers are always the same as the order of the first reserved storage numbers=1, 2, 3, 4. It is like this. That is, in this example, the content of each storage area is shifted each time the variable display start condition is satisfied, so that the order in which each random value is extracted can be specified. In this example, the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the first reserved storage number and the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the second reserved storage number are The extraction order is also saved so that it can be specified.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 performs control to transmit a set value command indicating the set value set in the RAM 102 to the effect control board 12 (step 026IWS55A). In this example, the setting value command is transmitted every time the variable display is started by executing the process of step 026IWS55A. However, the setting change process (the process of changing the setting value) is performed when the power is turned on. The set value command is also sent when is executed.

The timing for transmitting the set value command is not limited to that shown in this example.For example, the set value command may be transmitted at each end of the variable display, or the set value command may be transmitted during the variable display. It may be configured to do so.

After that, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a background designation command according to the current game state to the effect control CPU 120 (step 026IWS56A). Specifically, when the probability variation flag and the high base flag are off, it is determined that the probability is low/non-KT state and the low probability/non-KT background designation command is issued, and the probability variation flag is off and the high base flag is on. In some cases, the low probability/first KT state is determined, and the low probability/first KT background designation command is set. When the probability variation flag is on and the high base flag is on, it is high probability/first KT state. If the probability variation flag is on and the high base flag is off, the high probability/second KT background designation command is determined to be the high probability/second KT state, and the high precision/second KT background designation command is determined. Send.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the big hit of the second special symbol is changing (step 026IWS57A). Specifically, when the second big hit flag indicating that the big hit is set based on the variable display of the second special symbol is set, it is determined that the big hit of the second special symbol is changing. When it is determined that the big hit of the second special symbol is changing, the process proceeds to step 026IWS69A without performing the processing from step 026IWS58A. As a result, when the variation of the first special symbol is started during the variation of the big bonus of the second special symbol, it is configured to be forcibly disregarded regardless of whether or not the jackpot determination value is stored.

The method of forcibly disengaging is not limited to the above. For example, when the big hit of the second special symbol is changing in step 026IWS57A, a process of setting a random number value (fixed value) that is out of sync with the random number for hit determination is performed, and the process proceeds to step 026IWS59A, at the time of starting winning. It may be forcibly disregarded regardless of which random number for hit determination has been acquired.

Also, for example, when the big hit of the second special symbol is changing in step 026IWS57A, a random number value (fixed value) that is out of alignment is set as the hit determination random number without performing the processing of steps 026IWS58A to S63A, and the small value is set. By making the hit determination, the hit determination may be forcibly disregarded regardless of which random number for the hit determination is obtained at the time of winning the start prize.

When the big hit of the second special symbol is not changing, the game controlling microcomputer 100 reads the hit judging random number from the first random number storing buffer (step 026IWS58A), and executes the big hit judging module (step 026IWS59A). The big hit determination module is a program that decides to make a big hit if the random number for hit determination matches a predetermined big hit determination value. When it is determined to be a big hit (step 026IWS60A), the game controlling microcomputer 100 sets a first big hit flag indicating that the big hit is to be made based on the variable display of the first special symbol (step 026IWS61A). .. Then, based on the hit type determination random number, it is determined whether the big hit type is a 16R sure change big hit, a 6R sure change big hit, or a 6R normal big hit (step 026IWS62A), and the big hit type is stored (step 026IWS63A), step 026IWS69A. Move to.

If the big hit is not made in step 026IWS60A, the game control microcomputer 100 executes the small hit determination module (step 026IWS64A). The small hitting determination module is a program that decides to make a small hit if the random number for hitting determination (or a random number for small hitting determination) matches a predetermined small hitting determination value. When it is determined to be a small hit (step 026IWS65A), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a first small hit flag indicating that a small hit will be made based on the variable display of the first special symbol ( Step 026IWS66A). Further, the game control microcomputer 100 judges the small hit type based on the random number for judging the hit type (step 026IWS67A), and stores the small hit type (step 026IWS68A). In this example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the small hit type is determined to be the small hit A (see FIG. 9-4(A)). Then, the process proceeds to step 026IWS69A.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the value of the high base number counter indicating the remaining number of times of the high base state is "0" (step 026IWS69A), and if it is "0", step 026IWS75A. Move to. If the value of the high base number counter is not "0", that is, if it is in the low probability/first KT state, the game control microcomputer 100 subtracts "1" from the value of the high base number counter (step 026IWS70A), It is determined whether or not it has become “0” (step 026IWS71A). When the value of the high base number counter does not become "0", the process proceeds to step 026IWS75A. When the value of the high base number counter becomes “0”, the game control microcomputer 100 resets the high base flag indicating that it is in the high base state (step 026IWS72A), and shortens the variable display of the special symbol. The special figure time saving flag indicating that control is in progress is reset (step 026IWS73A). In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a lighting extension flag (state extension flag) indicating that the lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 is extended to the end of fluctuation (step 026IWS74A). Then, the process proceeds to step 026IWS75A.

In this characteristic part 026IW, as will be described later, the high base flag is set, and the number of times of execution of the variable display in the high base state is managed. It is low probability at the end of the big hit game based on the 6R normal big hit or the 2R normal big hit. / It is a case where it is controlled to a high base state (low probability/first KT state) and variable display is executed 50 times. In the case of the low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state), when the 50th variation display is started, it is determined as Y in steps 026IWS71A and S71B, and the high base flag is set in steps 026IWS72A and S72B. At the same time as the reset, the special figure time saving flag is also reset in steps 026IWS73A and S73B, and the low probability/low base state (normal state (non-KT state)) is entered.

In addition, the lighting extension flag (state extension flag) is for continuing the right hitting state by continuing the right hitting notification, and as the gaming state, the high base state has ended, but the variation reduction common to the first KT state is shortened. It is a flag for setting the state and making it a production background common to the first KT state.

Then, in step 026IWS75A, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first fluctuation pattern setting processing (step 026IWS75A). Although illustration is omitted, the symbol to be stopped is determined immediately before step 026IWS75A.

In addition, in step 026IWS59A, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit by using either the non-probability variation big jackpot determination table or the probability variation big jackpot determination table in consideration of the game state.

FIG. 9-15 is a flowchart showing a first variation pattern setting process (step S111A) in the first special symbol process process. In the first variation pattern setting process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first determines whether or not the special symbol time saving flag indicating that the variation display of the special symbol is under shortening control is set. It is confirmed (step 026IWS1700A). In this example, the special symbol time saving flag is set and the shortening control of the variable display of the special symbol is performed, which makes it advantageous to execute the variable display of the second special symbol (Fig. 9-5). (See FIGS. 9-7), since a small hit is likely to occur, the KT state is controlled. If the special time saving flag is not set (that is, not in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 is a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern, which is not shown in FIG. 9-5(A). The variation pattern table for the first special symbol for KT time is selected (step 026IWS1701A). If the special drawing time saving flag is set (that is, in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 shows a KT shown in FIG. 9-5(B) as a fluctuation pattern table for determining the fluctuation pattern. The variation pattern table for the first special symbol for time is selected (step 026IWS1702A).

Next, the game control microcomputer 100, based on the variation pattern table determined to be used in step 026IWS1701A, S1702A, and the variation pattern determination random number stored in the first special symbol determination buffer, Which of the fluctuation patterns shown in FIG. 9-5 is to be determined is determined (step 026IWS1703A). In this example, the variation time of the first special symbol is determined by determining the variation pattern. Further, after determining the variation time, the variation pattern in which the determined variation time is set may be selected from a plurality of variation patterns.

When the variation pattern is determined, the game control microcomputer 100 performs control to transmit a variation pattern command indicating the determined variation pattern to the effect control CPU 120 (step 026IWS1704A).

In addition, when the variation time (variation pattern) of the first special symbol is determined in step 026IWS1703A, the game control microcomputer 100 sets variation time data indicating the determined variation time in the first variation time timer and the variation time. While starting the measurement of (step 026IWS1705A), the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A is started (step 026IWS1706A). Then, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol variation process (step 026IWS1707A).

9-16 is a flowchart showing a first special symbol variation process (step S112A) in the first special symbol process process. In the first special symbol variation process, the CPU 103 first, if not yet transmitted, based on the determination result of whether or not to be a big hit, and the determination result of the big hit type, one of the display result designation command (display result 1 control command, display result 2 designation command, display result 4 designation command, display result 5 designation command) is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 026IWS1120A).

Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the first variation time timer (step 026IWS1121A), and when the first variation time timer times out (step 026IWS1122A), performs control to transmit the first symbol determination designation command to the effect control CPU 120 ( Step 026IWS1123A). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop process (step S113A) (step 026IWS1127A).

If the first fluctuation time timer has not timed out, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the big hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 026IWS1124A). Whether or not the big hit symbol is displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is, for example, the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop process, It can be determined by checking whether or not the second big hit flag indicating that the big hit is to be set based on the variable display of the second special symbol.

If the big hit symbol is not derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 026IWS1125A). In addition, whether or not the small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B, for example, the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop process. , It can be determined by checking whether or not the second small hit flag indicating that a small hit is set based on the variable display of the second special symbol.

If the big hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (Y of step 026IWS1124A) or if the small hit symbol is derived and displayed (Y of step 026IWS1125A), the CPU 103 determines the effect control CPU 120. The control for transmitting the first compulsory symbol confirmation designation command is performed (step 026IWS1126A). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop process (step S113A) (step 026IWS1127A).

By performing the processing of step 026IWS1124A, S1125A, in this characteristic portion 026IW, if the variable display of the second special symbol is a big hit or a small hit during the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol, the first special symbol The variable display of is forcibly stopped so that a big hit or a small hit does not occur at the same time in the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In this case, on the CPU 120 side for effect control, when the variable display of the first special symbol is forcedly disengaged, the variable display result of the decorative symbol is based on the display result 1 designation command transmitted in step 026IWS1124A. As for, it is forcibly disengaged and controlled to stop and display the design.

If neither the big hit symbol nor the small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (N in step 026IWS1124A, N in step 026IWS1125A), the process is ended as it is.

FIG. 9-17 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol stop processing. In the first special symbol stop processing, first, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the lighting extension flag is set (step 026IWS2010A). If the lighting extension flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the lighting extension flag that has been set (step 026IWS2011A). Further, the CPU 103 controls to end the lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 (step 026IWS2012A) and also controls to send a right-handed lighting end designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 026IWS2013A).

In this example, since the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning port) is provided on the right side of the game area, if the game state is controlled to the KT state, the person who has performed the right hitting operation. Is advantageous to the player, and the right-handed indicator 26 is turned on. Therefore, in this example, the right-handed indicator 26 is turned on during the low probability/first KT state, but the 50th variation display is performed by executing the processing of steps 026IWS69A to S74A and S69B to S74B. When the start, the low probability/first KT state is ended, the state is shifted to the normal state (non-KT state), and the processing of steps 026IWS2010A to S2013A and S2010B to S2013B is executed, thereby ending the 50th variation display. The right-handed indicator 26 is turned off when the operation is performed.

Then, the CPU 103 derives and displays the stop symbol of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A (step 026IWS2014A). Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first big hit flag is set (step 026IWS2015A). When the first big hit flag is set, the CPU 103 indicates that the big hit signal 1 (a signal indicating that the big hit game is being performed) and the big hit signal 2 (a signal indicating that the player is in a long game) are externally output. The big hit signal output flag is set (step 026IWS2017A). In the feature part 026IW, the information output process (step S23) is executed based on the big hit signal output flag being set in step 026IWS2017A, and the big output signal 1 is started to be output to the hall computer, and the big hit signal 2 is output. If it is not during the external output of, the external output of the jackpot signal 2 to the hall computer is started.

Next, the CPU 103 sets a special winning opening pre-opening timer (step 026IWS2018A), sets round 1 opening pattern data according to the kind of big hit (step 026IWS2019A), and sets "1" to a round number counter indicating the number of rounds of big hits. Is set (step 026IWS2020A).

Next, the CPU 103 controls to start the lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 (step 026IWS2021A) and also controls to send a right-handed lighting start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 026IWS2022A).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the first special figure process flag to a value corresponding to the first gate passage waiting process (step 026IWS2023A).

By executing the processing of step 026IWS2021A, S2022A, in this example, when the big hit in the variable display of the first special symbol, the right-handed indicator 26 is turned on. That is, in this example, since the special variable winning ball device 7 (big winning hole) is provided on the right side of the game area in this example, it is advantageous for the player to perform a right-handed operation during the big hit game. Therefore, the right-handed indicator 26 is turned on.

In this example, after the big hit symbol is derived and displayed, the big hit game is started based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, so the right hit is made at the timing when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41. The display 26 may be configured to start lighting.

When the first big hit flag is not set (N in step 026IWS2015A), the CPU 103 determines whether the first small hit flag is set (step 026IWS2024A). When the first small hit flag is set, control is performed to send a small hit start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 026IWS2025A). Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the first special figure process flag to a value corresponding to the first small hit opening preprocessing (step 026IWS2029A).

In this example, since the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area, it is originally advantageous for the player to perform a right hitting operation during the small hit game. However, as already explained, when the small hit in the variable display of the first special symbol is only the small hit type is the small hit A, the prize of the game ball to the special winning opening can hardly be expected. Therefore, in this example, when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the first special symbol, the right-handed indicator 26 is not turned on and the right-handed lighting start designation command is not transmitted.

If the first small hit flag is not set (N in step 026IWS2024A), the CPU 103 sets the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol normal processing (step 026IWS2030A).

In this example, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol, the right hit notification for prompting the player to shoot a game ball to the right of the game area can be executed. There is. In addition, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed with the first special symbol, as a right hit notification, it is possible to execute a launch promotion alert that prompts the player to shoot the game ball aiming at the passage gate 41. May be.

Also, in the state where the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the second special symbol, right-handing notification and launch promotion information are not executed, and in that state when the game ball wins the first start winning opening, right-handing notification and launch promotion information (In this case, because it is in the gate passage waiting state, even if the game ball wins the first starting winning opening, the variable display of the first special symbol does not start immediately and becomes the first reserved memory) You may comprise.

On the other hand, when the passage of the game ball at the passage gate 41 is detected in the normal state (low probability/non-KT state), the degree of recognition is low (for example, sound output of small volume or small screen display). Thus, it may be configured to perform a left-hand hit notification that prompts the player to shoot a game ball to the left of the game area. On the other hand, in the normal state (low probability/non-KT state), when the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening or the special winning opening is detected, a mode in which the degree of recognition is high (for example, a loud sound output or A left-handed notification may be provided by a large screen display). With such a configuration, it is possible to accurately notify the launch. In particular, with the above configuration, for the player who accidentally shoots the game ball to the right of the game area, while performing a slight left-handing notification while the degree of recognition to the surroundings of the game machine is low. For a player who intentionally performs a right-handed operation, left-handed notification may be performed in a manner in which the degree of recognition of the surroundings of the gaming machine is high. With such a configuration, the player who intentionally performs the right-handed operation can be urged by the clerk of the game store to return to the left-handed operation.

Further, in the above case, the left-handed notification may be performed when the number of game balls detected at the passage gate 41, the second starting winning opening, and the special winning opening reaches a certain number. In addition, in the passage gate 41, when the game ball is detected a plurality of times (for example, 5 times) within a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute), a left-handed notification is given, and the second start winning opening and the special winning opening are more than a predetermined number. Even if a small number (eg, one) of gaming balls is detected, a left hit notification may be performed.

Further, for example, while the external signal is not output when the game ball is detected at the passage gate 41, the external signal is output when the game ball is detected at the second start winning opening or the special winning opening. May be.

The characteristic part 026IW displays a demo when a specific condition is satisfied. However, when the demo is displayed in the normal state, the passage gate 41, the second starting winning opening or the special winning opening is displayed. When the winning of the game ball is detected, the execution of the demonstration display that has been executed may be ended and the left-handed notification may be performed.

FIG. 9-18 is a flowchart showing the first gate passage waiting process (step S114A) in the first special symbol process process. In the first gate passage waiting process, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the detection signal from the gate switch 21 is input (step 026IWS2501A). If the detection signal from the gate switch 21 has not been input, the processing ends. If the detection signal from the gate switch 21 is input, the CPU 103 resets the probability variation flag indicating the probability variation state, the high base flag, and the special drawing time saving flag if set, and sets the high base number counter. Is cleared to 0 (step 026IWS2504A). Next, the CPU 103 transmits a first big hit start designation command (step 026IWS2505A) and sets the value of the first special figure process flag to a value corresponding to the first big hit opening preprocessing (step 026IWS2506A).

In this feature unit 026IW, the first gate passage waiting process is executed, so that the big hit game is not started immediately when the big hit symbol is derived and displayed as the variable display result of the first special symbol, but the passage gate 41 The game ball has passed, and is configured to shift to the big hit game on condition that it is detected by the gate switch 21.

9-19 and FIG. 9-20 are flowcharts showing the first jackpot end processing (step S118A) in the first special symbol process processing. In the first big hit ending process, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the big hit end display timer is set (step 026IWS2200A), and when the big hit end display timer is set, moves to step 026IWS2204A. When the big hit end display timer is not set, the first big hit flag is reset (step 026IWS2201A), and control for transmitting the first big hit end designation command is performed (step 026IWS2202A). Then, the jackpot end display timer is set to a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time when the jackpot end display is being performed on the image display device 5 (big hit end display time) (step 026IWS2203A), and the process is ended.

In step 026IWS2204A, the value of the jackpot end display timer is decremented by 1 (step 026IWS2204A). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the big hit end display timer is 0, that is, whether the big hit end display time has elapsed (step 026IWS2205A). If not, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (Y in step 026IWS2205A), the CPU 103 checks whether or not the type of the jackpot that has ended this time is the 16R certainty variation jackpot (step 026IWS2206A). Whether or not the 16R probability variation big hit can be determined by, for example, checking the big hit type stored in step 026IWS63A of the first special symbol normal process. If the 16R probability variation big hit, the CPU 103 sets the probability variation flag indicating that it is a probability variation state and shifts to the probability variation state (high probability state) (step 026IWS2207A), and is in the control of shortening the variation display of the special symbol. A special figure time saving flag indicating that is set and the state shifts to the KT state (step 026IWS2208A). Then, the process proceeds to step 026IWS2223A. In the case of the 16R probability variation big hit, since the high base flag is not set, the high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state) is controlled.

If it is not the 16R certainty variation jackpot, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the type of the jackpot finished this time is the 6R certainty variation jackpot (step 026IWS2209A). Whether or not the 6R certainty variation big hit can be determined by, for example, checking the big hit type stored in step 026IWS63A of the first special symbol normal processing. If the 6R probability variation big hit, the CPU 103 sets the probability variation flag to shift to the probability variation state (high probability state) (step 026IWS2212A), and sets the high base flag to shift to the high base state (step 026IWS2213A), Further, the special drawing time saving flag is set to shift to the KT state (step 026IWS2214A). Then, the process proceeds to step 026IWS2223A. Therefore, in the case of the 6R certainty variation jackpot, it is controlled to a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state).

In the case of a 6R probability variation big hit, only the high base flag is set and the high base number counter is not set. In this case, since the high base number counter is reset to 0 when the big hit game is started (see step 026IWS2504A of the first gate passage waiting process), the value of the high base number counter remains 0. Therefore, after the jackpot game based on 6R probability variation jackpot is controlled to a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state), and since the value of the high base number counter is 0 in the variable display thereafter, It is determined as Y in step 026IWS2010A of the first special symbol stop processing, and the subtraction processing of the high base number counter of step 026IWS2011A is not performed. Then, the high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state) is maintained until the next big hit occurs.

If it is not the 6R probability variation big hit (that is, if it is the 6R normal big hit), the CPU 103 sets the high base flag and shifts to the high base state (step 026IWS2219A), and sets the special figure time saving flag to the KT state. The process moves (step 026IWS2220A). Further, the CPU 103 sets “50” in the high base number counter (step 026IWS2221A). Then, the process proceeds to step 026IWS2223A. Therefore, in the case of a 6R normal big hit, it is controlled to a low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol normal process (step S110A) (step 026IWS2223A).

9-21 is a flowchart showing a first small hitting end process (step S121A) in the first special symbol process process. In the first small hit completion processing, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the small hit completion display timer is set (step 026IWS2300A), and when the small hit completion display timer is set, shifts to step 026IWS2304A. When the small hit end display timer is not set, the first small hit flag is reset (step 026IWS2301A), and control for transmitting the small hit end designation command is performed (step 026IWS2302A). Then, the small hit end display timer is set to a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the small hit end display is performed on the image display device 5 (small hit end display time) (step 026IWS2303A), and the process is executed. finish.

In step 026IWS2304A, the value of the small hit end display timer is decremented by 1 (step 026IWS2304A). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the small hit end display timer is 0, that is, whether the small hit end display time has elapsed (step 026IWS2305A). If not, the process ends.

If the small hit end display time has elapsed (step 026IWS2305A Y), the CPU 103 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol normal process (step S110A) (step 026IWS2309A). ).

9-22 is a flowchart showing a second special symbol normal process in the second special symbol process process. The state in which the second special symbol normal processing is executed is a case where the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating the second special symbol normal processing. In addition, when the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating the second special symbol normal processing, it is a state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is not made in the second special symbol display device 4B. In addition, it is a case where neither the second big hit game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined number of times) nor the small hit game (the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened) is being played.

In the second special symbol normal processing, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first confirms the value of the second reserved storage number (step 026IWS51B). Specifically, the count value of the second reserved storage number counter is confirmed.

If the number of second reserved memories is 0, the second customer waiting demonstration display designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 026IWS52B).

If the second reserved memory number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 100 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved memory number=1 in the second reserved memory number buffer of the RAM102, and the RAM102. In the second random number buffer area (step 026IWS53B), decrement the value of the second reserved storage number by 1 (subtract the count value of the second reserved storage number counter by 1), and shift the contents of each storage area. (Step 026IWS54B). That is, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number=n (n=2, 3, 4) in the second reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 102 is set to the second reserved storage number=n−. Stored in the storage area corresponding to 1. Therefore, the order in which the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective second reserved storage numbers are extracted always matches the order of the second reserved storage numbers=1, 2, 3, 4. It is like this. That is, in this example, the content of each storage area is shifted each time the variable display start condition is satisfied, so that the order in which each random value is extracted can be specified.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 performs control to transmit a setting value command indicating the setting value set in the RAM 102 to the effect control board 12 (step 026IWS55B). In this example, the setting value command is transmitted every time the variable display is started by executing the process of step 026IWS55B. However, the setting changing process (the process of changing the setting value) is performed when the power is turned on. The set value command is also sent when is executed.

After that, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a background designation command according to the current game state to the effect control CPU 120 (step 026IWS56B). The specific method of transmitting the background designation command is the same as the processing shown in step 026IWS56A of the first special symbol normal processing.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the big hit of the first special symbol is changing (step 026IWS57B). Specifically, it is determined that the big hit of the first special symbol is changing when the first big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit based on the variable display of the first special symbol is set. When it is determined that the big hit of the first special symbol is changing, the process proceeds to step 026IWS69B without performing the processing from step 026IWS58B. As a result, when the variation of the second special symbol is started during the variation of the big bonus of the first special symbol, it is forcibly disengaged regardless of whether or not the jackpot determination value is stored.

The method of forcibly disengaging is not limited to the above. For example, when the big hit of the first special symbol is changing in step 026IWS57B, a process of setting a random number value (fixed value) that is out of alignment as a random number for hit determination is performed, and the process proceeds to step 026IWS59B, which causes a start winning prize. It may be forcibly deviated regardless of whether or not the random number for hit determination has been acquired.

Further, for example, when the big hit of the first special symbol is changing in step 026IWS57B, a random number value (fixed value) that is out of alignment is set as the hit determination random number without performing the processing in steps 026IWS58B to S63B and is small. By making the hit determination, the hit determination may be forcibly disregarded regardless of which random number for the hit determination is obtained at the time of winning the start prize.

When the big hit of the first special symbol is not changing, the game controlling microcomputer 100 reads the hit judging random number from the second random number storage buffer (step 026IWS58B), and executes the big hit judging module (step 026IWS59B). The big hit determination module is a program that decides to make a big hit if the random number for hit determination matches a predetermined big hit determination value. When it is determined to be a big hit (step 026IWS60B), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a second big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit based on the variable display of the second special symbol (step 026IWS61B). .. Then, based on the hit type determination random number, it is determined whether the big hit type is a 16R certainty change big hit, a 9R certainty change big hit, a 2R certainty change big hit, or a 2R normal big hit (step 026IWS62B), and the big hit type is stored (step 026IWS63B ), and proceeds to step 026IWS69B.

If the big hit is not made in step 026IWS60B, the game control microcomputer 100 executes the small hit determination module (step 026IWS64B). The small hitting determination module is a program that decides to make a small hit if the random number for hitting determination (or a random number for small hitting determination) matches a predetermined small hitting determination value. When it is determined to be a small hit (step 026IWS65B), the game controlling microcomputer 100 sets a second small hit flag indicating that a small hit will be made based on the variable display of the second special symbol ( Step 026IWS66B). Further, the game control microcomputer 100 determines the small hit type based on the random number for judging the hit type (step 026IWS67B), and stores the small hit type (step 026IWS68B). In this example, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the small hit type is determined to be the small hit B or the small hit C (see FIG. 9-4(B)). Then, the process proceeds to step 026IWS69B.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the value of the high base number counter is "0" (step 026IWS69B), and if it is "0", shifts to step 026IWS75B. When the value of the high base number counter is not "0", that is, when it is in the low probability/first KT state, the game control microcomputer 100 subtracts "1" from the value of the high base number counter (step 026IWS70B), It is determined whether or not it has become "0" (step 026IWS71B). When the value of the high base number counter does not become "0", the process proceeds to step 026IWS75B. When the value of the high base number counter becomes “0”, the game control microcomputer 100 resets the high base flag indicating that it is in the high base state (step 026IWS72B), and shortens the variable display of the special symbol. The special figure time saving flag indicating that control is in progress is reset (step 026IWS73B). Further, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a lighting extension flag (state extension flag) (step 026IWS74B). Then, the process proceeds to step 026IWS75B.

Then, in step 026IWS75B, the value of the second special figure process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the second variation pattern setting process (step 026IWS75B). Although illustration is omitted, the symbol to be stopped is determined just before step 026IWS75B.

In addition, in step 026IWS59B, in consideration of the game state, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit, using either the non-probability change big hit judgment table or the probability change big hit judgment table.

The second variation pattern setting process is the same as the first variation pattern setting process (step S111A) shown in FIG. 9-15. That is, in the first variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 9-15, the second variation pattern process is explained by replacing “first” with “second”. However, in the second variation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 first performs the same process as in step 026IWS1700A, and confirms whether or not the special drawing time saving flag is set. If the special time saving flag is not set (that is, not in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 is a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern, which is not shown in FIG. 9-6(C). The variation pattern table for the second special symbol for KT is selected. If the special figure time saving flag is set (that is, in the KT state), the game control microcomputer 100 changes depending on whether the probability variation flag and the high base flag are set or not, and the number of variations. As the variation pattern table for determining the pattern, the variation pattern table for the second special symbol for any of KT shown in FIGS. 9-6(D) to 9-7(I) is selected. For example, if the probability variation flag is off and the high base flag is on (low probability/first KT state), if it is the first variation, the variation pattern table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 9-6(D) If the 2nd to 49th variation, the second special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9-6(E) is selected. If the 50th variation, the second variation shown in FIG. 9-6(F). Select the variable pattern table for special symbols. Further, for example, if both the probability variation flag and the high base flag are on (high probability/first KT state), if it is the first variation, variation for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 9-7(G) The pattern table is selected, and if it is the second variation or later, the variation pattern table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 9-7(H) is selected. Further, for example, if the probability variation flag is on and the high base flag is off (in the case of high probability/second KT state), the second special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9-7(I) is selected.

The second special symbol variation process is the same as the first special symbol variation process (step S112A) shown in FIG. 9-16. That is, in the first special symbol variation process shown in FIG. 9-16, if the "first" is read as "second", the second special symbol variation process has been described.

Even in the second special symbol variation process, the same process as steps 026IWS1124A to S1126A of the first special symbol variation process is executed to derive and display the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A. If so, the control for transmitting the second forced symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 is performed, and the variable display of the second special symbol is controlled so as to be forced out. With such a configuration, in the normal state after the end of the first KT state (after the end of the time saving state), the remaining second reserved memory can be exhausted, and the occurrence of a big hit at an unintended timing when the player is absent. Can be suppressed.

In addition, it is configured to provide a variable winning ball device for the first special symbol below the winning ball device 6A (first starting winning opening), and a winning ball device for the second special symbol to the right of the game area ( In a gaming machine configured to be provided with a starting winning opening which is not a variable winning ball device) and which is configured to shift to a normal state via the time saving state of the first special symbol after the end of the second KT state (small hit RUSH) As described above, the configuration in which the variable display of the second special symbol is forcibly removed may be applied. In this case, because the variation efficiency of the first special symbol is high, the frequency of small hits based on the variation display of the first special symbol is also high, but the variation display of the second special symbol is forcibly removed accordingly. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of the variable display of the second special symbol based on the second reserved memory in the normal state by increasing the frequency of playing, and further suppress the occurrence of the big hit at an unintended timing when the player is absent. You can

FIG. 9-23 is a flowchart showing a second special symbol stop process. In the second special symbol stop processing, first, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the lighting extension flag is set (step 026IWS2010B). If the lighting extension flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the lighting extension flag that has been set (step 026IWS2011B). Further, the CPU 103 controls to end the lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 (step 026IWS2012B) and also controls to send a right-handed lighting end designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 026IWS2013B).

Then, the CPU 103 derives and displays the stop symbol of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 026IWS2014B). Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second jackpot flag is set (step 026IWS2015B). When the second big hit flag is set, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the special drawing time saving flag is set (step 026IWS2016B). If the special figure time saving flag is not set (that is, not in the KT state), the process directly proceeds to step 026IWS2018B.

If the special figure time saving flag is set (that is, in the KT state), the CPU 103 sets the big hit signal output flag (step 026IWS2017B). In the feature part 026IW, based on the big hit signal output flag being set in step 026IWS2017B, the information output process (step S23) is executed, and the big output signal 1 is externally output to the hall computer, and the big hit signal 2 is output. If it is not during the external output of, the external output of the jackpot signal 2 to the hall computer is started.

Next, the CPU 103 sets a special winning opening pre-opening timer (step 026IWS2018B), sets round 1 opening pattern data according to the big hit type (step 026IWS2019B), and sets "1" to the round number counter (step). 026IWS2020B).

Next, the CPU 103 controls to start the lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 (step 026IWS2021B) and also controls to send a right-handed lighting start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 026IWS2022B).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the second special figure process flag to a value corresponding to the second gate passage waiting process (step 026IWS2023B).

By executing the processing of step 026IWS2021B, S2022B, in this example, when the big hit in the variable display of the second special symbol, the right-handed indicator 26 is turned on. That is, in this example, since the special variable winning ball device 7 (big winning hole) is provided on the right side of the game area in this example, it is advantageous for the player to perform a right-handed operation during the big hit game. Therefore, the right-handed indicator 26 is turned on.

When the second big hit flag is not set (N in step 026IWS2015B), the CPU 103 determines whether the second small hit flag is set (step 026IWS2024B). When the second small hit flag is set, control for transmitting a small hit start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 026IWS2025B).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the special drawing time saving flag is set (step 026IWS2026B). If the special drawing time saving flag is not set (that is, not in the KT state), the CPU 103 performs control to start lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 (step 026IWS2027B), and right with respect to the effect control CPU 120. The control for transmitting the striking and lighting start designation command is performed (step 026IWS2028B).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the second special figure process flag to a value corresponding to the second small hit opening preprocessing (step 026IWS2029B).

By executing the processing of Steps 026IWS2027B and S2028B, in this example, when the small hit occurs in the variable display of the second special symbol, the right hit indicator 26 is turned on. That is, in this example, since the special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning opening) is provided on the right side of the game area in this example, it is better for the player to perform a right-handed operation during the small hit game. Advantageously, the right-handed indicator 26 is illuminated.

However, in the present example, even if the small hit occurs in the variable display of the second special symbol, the right-handed indicator 26 should have already been turned on when the KT state is in effect. Therefore, in this example, by performing the determination process of step 026IWS2026B, when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the second special symbol during the KT state, the right-handed indicator 26 is started to light up in duplicate. Also, the process of transmitting the right-handed lighting start designation command is not performed.

If the second small hit flag is also not set (N in step 026IWS2024B), the CPU 103 sets the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol normal processing (step 026IWS2030B).

FIG. 9-24 is a flowchart showing a second gate passage waiting process in the second special symbol process process. In the second gate passage waiting process, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the detection signal from the gate switch 21 is input (step 026IWS2501B). If the detection signal from the gate switch 21 has not been input, the processing ends. If the detection signal from the gate switch 21 is input, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the special drawing time saving flag is set (step 026IWS2502B). If the special drawing time saving flag is set (that is, if it is in the KT state), the process directly proceeds to step 026IWS2504B.

If the special figure time saving flag is not set (that is, not in the KT state), the CPU 103 sets the big hit signal output flag (step 026IWS2503B). In the characteristic part 026IW, based on that the big hit signal output flag is set in step 026IWS2503B, the information output process (step S23) is executed, the big output signal 1 is started to be output to the hall computer, and the big hit signal 2 is output. If the external output is not being performed, the external output of the jackpot signal 2 to the hall computer is started.

Next, if set, the CPU 103 resets the probability variation flag, the high base flag, and the special drawing time saving flag, and clears the value of the high base number counter to 0 (step 026IWS2504B). Next, the CPU 103 transmits a second big hit start designation command (step 026IWS2505B), and sets the value of the second special figure process flag to a value corresponding to the second big hit opening preprocessing (step 026IWS2506B).

In this feature unit 026IW, the second gate passage waiting process is executed, so that the big hit game is not started immediately when the big hit symbol is derived and displayed as the variable display result of the second special symbol, and the passage gate 41 is started. The game ball has passed, and is configured to shift to the big hit game on condition that it is detected by the gate switch 21.

9-25 and 9-26 are flowcharts showing the second jackpot end process in the second special symbol process process. In the second big hit ending process, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the big hit end display timer is set (step 026IWS2200B), and if the big hit end display timer is set, moves to step 026IWS2204B. When the big hit end display timer is not set, the second big hit flag is reset (step 026IWS2201B), and the control for transmitting the second big hit end designation command is performed (step 026IWS2202B). Then, the jackpot end display timer is set to a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the jackpot end display is being performed on the image display device 5 (big hit end display time) (step 026IWS2203B), and the process is ended.

In step 026IWS2204B, the value of the jackpot end display timer is decremented by 1 (step 026IWS2204B). Then, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the value of the big hit end display timer is 0, that is, whether the big hit end display time has elapsed (step 026IWS2205B). If not, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has passed (Y in step 026IWS2205B), the CPU 103 checks whether or not the type of the jackpot that ended this time is 16R certainty variation jackpot or 2R certainty variation jackpot (step 026IWS2206B). Whether or not it is 16R certainty variation big hit or 2R certainty variation big hit can be determined, for example, by confirming the big hit type stored in step 026IWS63B of the second special symbol normal processing. If the 16R probability variation big hit or the 2R probability variation big hit, the CPU 103 sets the probability variation flag and shifts to the probability variation state (high probability state) (step 026IWS2207B), and sets the special figure time saving flag to shift to the KT state ( Step 026IWS2208B). Then, the process proceeds to step 026IWS2223B. If the 16R probability variation big hit or the 2R probability variation big hit, the high base flag is not set, so the high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state) is controlled.

If neither the 16R certainty variation jackpot or the 2R certainty variation jackpot, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the type of the big hit that has ended this time is the 9R certainty variation jackpot (step 026IWS2209B). Whether or not it is the 9R certainty variation jackpot can be determined by, for example, checking the jackpot type stored in step 026IWS63B of the second special symbol normal processing. If it is the 9R probability variation big hit, the CPU 103 sets the probability variation flag and shifts to the probability variation state (high probability state) (step 026IWS2212B), and sets the high base flag to shift to the high base state (step 026IWS2213B), Further, the special drawing time saving flag is set and the state shifts to the KT state (step 026IWS2214B). Then, the process proceeds to step 026IWS2223B. Therefore, in the case of the 9R probability variation big hit, the high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state) is controlled.

In the case of a 9R certainty variation big hit, only the high base flag is set and the high base number counter is not set. In this case, since the high base number counter is reset to 0 when the big hit game is started (see step 026IWS2504B of the second gate passage waiting process), the value of the high base number counter remains 0. Therefore, after the jackpot game based on the 9R certainty variation jackpot, it is controlled to a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state), and since the value of the high base number counter is 0 in the variable display thereafter, In the second special symbol stop process, Y is determined in step 026IWS2010B, and the subtraction process of the high base number counter in step 026IWS2011B is not performed. Then, the high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state) is maintained until the next big hit occurs.

If it is not the 9R probability variation big hit (that is, if it is the 2R normal big hit), the CPU 103 sets the high base flag and shifts to the high base state (step 026IWS2219B), and sets the special figure time saving flag to the KT state. The process moves (step 026IWS2220B). Further, the CPU 103 sets “50” in the high base number counter (step 026IWS2221B). Then, the process proceeds to step 026IWS2223B. Therefore, in the case of the 2R normal big hit, it is controlled to a low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol normal process (step 026IWS2223B).

FIG. 9-27 is a flowchart showing a second small hit completion process in the second special symbol process process. In the second small hit completion processing, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the small hit completion display timer is set (step 026IWS2300B), and when the small hit completion display timer is set, the CPU 103 proceeds to step 026IWS2304B. When the small hit end display timer is not set, the second small hit flag is reset (step 026IWS2301B), and control for transmitting the small hit end designation command is performed (step 026IWS2302B). Then, the small hit end display timer is set to a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the small hit end display is performed on the image display device 5 (small hit end display time) (step 026IWS2303B), and the process is executed. finish.

In step 026IWS2304B, the value of the small hit end display timer is decremented by 1 (step 026IWS2304B). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the small hit end display timer is 0, that is, whether the small hit end display time has elapsed (step 026IWS2305B). If not, the process ends.

If the small hit end display time has elapsed (Y in step 026IWS2305B), the CPU 103 checks whether or not the special drawing time saving flag is set (step 026IWS2306B). If the special drawing time saving flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the KT state), the CPU 103 performs control to end the lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 (step 026IWS2307B) and right to the effect control CPU 120. The control for transmitting the striking and lighting end designation command is performed (step 026IWS2308B).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol normal process (step 026IWS2309B).

Here, the transition of the game state in the characteristic unit 026IW will be described. FIG. 9-28 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how to transition a game state in this characteristic unit 026IW. First, in the characteristic part 026IW, in the low probability/low base state (normal state (non-KT state)), the player aims at the left side of the game area to perform a shooting operation (left hit) of the game ball. Therefore, in the normal state, the start winning to the first starting winning opening mainly occurs, and mainly the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. Also, since the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed, when a big hit occurs in a low probability/low base state, mainly a 16R sure change big hit, a 6R sure change big hit, or a 6R normal big hit occurs.

As shown in FIG. 9-28, when the 16R probability variation big hit occurs in the low probability/low base state, the high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state) shifts after the end of the big hit game, The high probability/low base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 026IWS2206A to S2208A). Also, when the 6R certainty variation big hit occurs in the low probability/low base state, after the big hit game is over, the state shifts to the high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state) until the next big hit occurs. The high probability/high base state is maintained (see steps 026IWS2209A, S2212A to S2214A). In addition, when the 6R normal big hit occurs in the low probability/low base state, after the big hit game ends, the low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state) is entered, and the next big hit occurs? The low-probability/high-base state is maintained until the variable display of 50 times is completed (see steps 026IWS2219A to S2221A).

In the case where it is after the transition to the KT state (high-probability/high-base state, low-probability/high-base state, high-probability/low-base state), in this feature 026IW, the player aims at the right side of the game area. And perform the shooting operation (right hit) of the game ball. Therefore, in the KT state, a start winning is mainly generated in the second starting winning opening, and a variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed. Further, since the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed, when a big hit occurs in the KT state, mainly a 16R sure change big hit, a 9R sure change big hit, a 2R sure change big hit, or a 2R normal big hit occurs.

As shown in FIG. 9-28, when a 16R certainty variation jackpot or a 2R certainty variation jackpot occurs in a high-probability/high-base state (high-probability/first KT state), a high-probability/low-base state after the jackpot game ends. (High probability/second KT state), and the high probability/low base state is maintained until the next big hit (see steps 026IWS2206B to S2208B). In addition, when the 9R certainty variation big hit occurs in the high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state), it shifts to the high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state) after the end of the big hit game. , The high probability/high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 026IWS2209B, S2212B to S2214B). In addition, in this characteristic part 026IW, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability that the 9R probability variation big hit is 50% in total (see FIG. 9-3 ), once high probability/high. In the base state, the high probability/high base state is looped at a rate of 50%. Also, when a 2R normal jackpot occurs in a high-probability/high-base state (high-probability/first KT state), it shifts to a low-probability/high-base state (low-probability/first KT state) after the jackpot game is over. , The low probability/high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs or the variable display of 50 times is completed (see steps 026IWS2219B to S2221B).

As shown in FIG. 9-28, when a 16R certainty variation jackpot or a 2R certainty variation jackpot occurs in a low-probability/high-base state (low-probability/first KT state), a high-probability/low-base state after the jackpot game ends. (High probability/second KT state), and the high probability/low base state is maintained until the next big hit (see steps 026IWS2206B to S2208B). In addition, when the 9R certainty variation big hit occurs in the low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state), it shifts to the high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state) after the big hit game ends. , The high probability/high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 026IWS2209B, S2212B to S2214B). Also, when a 2R normal big hit occurs in a low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state), it shifts to a low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state) after the end of the big hit game. , The low probability/high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs or the variable display of 50 times is completed (see steps 026IWS2219B to S2221B). In this characteristic part 026IW, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of being a 2R normal jackpot is 35% (see FIGS. 9-3(D) and (E)), Once the low probability/high base state is reached, the low probability/high base state is looped at a rate of 35%. In addition, when the 6R normal big hit and the 2R normal big hit occur and the low probability/high base state is reached, the next big hit does not occur and the variable display of 50 times is finished, it is shown in FIG. 9-28. As shown, a low probability/low base state (normal state (non-KT state)) is entered (see steps 026IWS2010A to S2014A).

As shown in FIG. 9-28, when 16R certainty variation jackpot or 2R certainty variation jackpot occurs in the high-probability/low-base state (high-probability/second KT state), high-probability/low-base state after the jackpot game is over. (High probability/second KT state), and the high probability/low base state is maintained until the next big hit (see steps 026IWS2206B to S2208B). In the characteristic part 026IW, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of being 16R certainty variation jackpot or 2R certainty variation jackpot is 15 % (See FIGS. 9-3(D) and (E)), once the high probability/low base state is reached, the high probability/low base state loops at a rate of 15%. Also, in the case of a high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state), if a 9R certainty variation big hit occurs, it shifts to a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state) after the big hit game ends. , The high probability/high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see steps 026IWS2209B, S2212B to S2214B). Also, when a 2R normal jackpot occurs in a high-probability/low-base state (high-probability/second KT state), it shifts to a low-probability/high-base state (low-probability/first KT state) after the jackpot game ends. , The low probability/high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs or the variable display of 50 times is completed (see steps 026IWS2219B to S2221B).

In FIG. 9-28, the low probability/low base state (normal state (non-KT state)) describes the case where the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, but the variation of the second special symbol at a low rate. It is possible that the display may be performed. In this case, when the 16R certainty variation big hit or the 2R certainty variation big hit occurs, the state shifts to the high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state). Further, when the 9R certainty variation big hit occurs, the state shifts to a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state). Also, when a 2R normal big hit occurs, it shifts to a low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state), and the low probability/high until the next big hit occurs or the 50 times of variable display is completed. The base state will be maintained.

Further, in FIG. 9-28, the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state) has been described, but the variable display of the first special symbol at a low rate. May be performed. In this case, when the 16R probability variation big hit occurs, the state shifts to a high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state). Further, when the 6R certainty variation big hit occurs, the state shifts to a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state). Also, when a 6R normal big hit occurs, it shifts to a low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state), and the low probability/high until the next big hit occurs or 50 times of variable display is completed. The base state will be maintained.

Further, in FIG. 9-28, the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state) has been described, but the variable display of the first special symbol at a low rate. May be performed. In this case, when the 16R probability variation big hit occurs, the state shifts to a high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state). Further, when the 6R certainty variation big hit occurs, the state shifts to a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state). Also, when a 6R normal big hit occurs, it shifts to a low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state), and the low probability/high until the next big hit occurs or 50 times of variable display is completed. The base state will be maintained.

Further, in FIG. 9-28, the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state) has been described, but the variable display of the first special symbol at a low rate. May be performed. In this case, when the 16R probability variation big hit occurs, the state shifts to a high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state). Further, when the 6R certainty variation big hit occurs, the state shifts to a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state). Also, when a 6R normal big hit occurs, it shifts to a low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state), and the low probability/high until the next big hit occurs or 50 times of variable display is completed. The base state will be maintained.

FIG. 9-29 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an external output signal output from the pachinko gaming machine 1. The prize ball signal is assigned to the terminal 01 of the external output terminal board. The prize ball signal is a signal that is externally output every time a predetermined number (10 in this example) of prize balls are paid out. The jackpot signal 1 is assigned to the terminal 05 of the external output terminal board. The big hit signal 1 is a signal that is continuously output to the outside during the entire big hit game (that is, a signal indicating that the big hit game is being executed). The jackpot signal 2 is assigned to the terminal 06 of the external output terminal board. The big hit signal 2 is a signal that is continuously output to the outside during the entire big hit game and during the KT state (that is, a signal indicating that the player is in a camp). A special winning opening signal is assigned to the terminal 07 of the external output terminal Slope. The special winning opening winning signal is a signal externally output based on the detection of the winning of the game ball into the special winning opening. Further, the expected number of prize balls signal is assigned to the terminal 09 of the external output terminal board. The expected number of prize balls signal is a signal that is externally output each time the expected number of prize balls to be paid out reaches a predetermined number (10 in this example).

Each external signal shown in FIG. 9-29 has, for example, a timing at which 10 prize balls are paid out, a timing at which a big hit occurs, a timing at which a prize is generated at a special winning opening, and the planned number of prize balls reaches 10. A flag (for example, see steps 026IWS2017A, S2017B, and S2503B) or a timer corresponding to the output of the external signal is set at a timing, and the information output process (step S23) is executed based on the setting of the flag or the timer. The output is externally output to a hall computer or the like.

Next, the output timing of the big hit signal 1 and the big hit signal 2 of the external output signals will be described. FIG. 9-30 is an explanatory diagram for explaining output timings of the big hit signal 1 and the big hit signal 2. In this example, the information output process (step S23) is executed based on the jackpot signal output flag being set in steps 026IWS2017A and S2503B when the game state is the normal state, and jackpot signal 1 and jackpot signal 2 The external output of is started. After that, in the information output process (step S23), the external output of the big hit signal 1 is stopped at the timing when the big hit game is finished. Further, in the information output process (step S23), the external output of the big hit signal 2 is stopped at the timing when the KT state is ended. On the other hand, based on the fact that the big hit signal output flag is set in steps 026IWS2017A and S2017B when the game state is the KT state, the information output process (step S23) is executed and the big hit signal 1 is externally output. It In this case, since the KT state is in progress, the big hit signal 2 is continuously output to the outside. After that, in the information output process (step S23), the external output of the big hit signal 1 is stopped at the timing when the big hit game is finished.

First, the output timing of the jackpot signal 1 and the jackpot signal 2 when the game state is the normal state (low probability/non-KT state) will be described with reference to FIG. 9-30(1). As shown in FIG. 9-30(1), when the gaming state is the normal state, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and the big hit symbol is derived and displayed, the big hit symbol is derived and displayed. External output of the big hit signal 1 is started at the same timing, and external output of the big hit signal 2 is started (see step 026IWS2017A). On the other hand, when the gaming state is the normal state, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed and the big hit symbol is derived and displayed, at the timing when the big hit symbol is derived and displayed, the big hit signal 1 and the big hit signal 2 The external output is not started, and the external output of the big hit signal 1 is started and the external output of the big hit signal 2 is started at the timing when the game ball wants to pass through the passage gate 41 (see step 026IWS2503B).

Next, using FIG. 9-30(2), the jackpot signal 1 and the jackpot when the gaming state is the KT state (low probability/first KT state, high probability/first KT state, high probability/second KT state) The output timing of the signal 2 will be described. As shown in FIG. 9-30(2), when the gaming state is the KT state, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and the big hit symbol is displayed in the derived form, the big hit symbol is displayed in the derived form. External output of the jackpot signal 1 is started at the timing (see step 026IWS2017A). Further, when the gaming state is the KT state, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed and the big hit symbol is derived and displayed, the external output of the big jackpot signal 1 is generated at the timing when the big hit symbol is derived and displayed. It is started (see step 026IWS2017B). As shown in FIG. 9-30(2), during the KT state, the big hit signal 2 is continuously output to the outside.

Next, the normal symbol process process (step S29) executed by the game control microcomputer 100 will be described. FIG. 9-31 is a flowchart showing an example of a normal symbol process process. In the normal symbol process process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) detects that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41 and the gate switch 21 has been turned on (step 026IWS5111), The control for transmitting the gate passage designation command to the effect control CPU 120 is performed (step 026IWS5112). Then, the CPU 103 executes the gate switch passage process (step 026IWS5113).

In this characteristic part 026IW, when the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 41 is detected by executing the processing of steps 026IWS5111-S5113, a gate passage designation command is transmitted. In addition, in this characteristic part 026IW, the passage gate 41 is configured as a dual-purpose gate and also plays a role of an operation area, but is it in a gate passage waiting state after the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed and before the big hit game is started? Regardless of whether it is sent or not, the gate passage designation command is transmitted.

Then, the CPU 103 executes any one of the processes shown in steps 026IWS5100 to S5104 according to the value of the normal symbol process flag.

In this characteristic unit 026IW, regardless of whether it is in the gate passage waiting state or not, when the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 41 is detected in Step 026IWS5111, the gate switch passage process of Step 026IWS5113 is executed. Normally, variable display of symbols is executed, but it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, only when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 when not in the gate passage waiting state, the variable display of the normal symbol is executed, and in the state of waiting for the gate passage, the normal symbol even if the game ball passes through the passage gate 41. The variable display may be not executed.

Further, in this characteristic part 026IW, the passage gate 41 is normally used as a combined use gate of the starting region and the operating region, but the special symbol process process (see steps S25A and S25B) is usually within the timer interrupt process. Since it is executed prior to the symbol process process (see step S26), after the passage of the game ball of the passage gate 41 as the normal starting region after the passage of the game ball of the passage gate 41 as the operating region is detected, Detection processing is performed. Therefore, the process for starting the big hit game can be executed quickly.

Gate switch passage processing (step 026IWS5113): The CPU 103 causes the gate passage memory counter (counter for counting the number of game balls passing through the passage gate 41) to have a maximum count value (gate passage memory number) (in this example, " 4”) has been reached. If it has not reached the maximum value, the count value of the gate passage storage counter is incremented by one. It should be noted that the LED of the universal figure reservation display 25C is turned on according to the value of the gate passage storage counter. Then, the CPU 103 performs a process of extracting the value of the random number per ordinary symbol for determination, and storing it in the storage area (normal symbol determination buffer) corresponding to the value of the number of passing memories.

Normal symbol normal processing (step 026IWS5100): CPU103 is a state in which the fluctuation of the normal symbol can be started (for example, if the value of the normal symbol process flag is a value indicating step 026IWS5100, specifically, the regular symbol) If the variable display of the normal symbol is not displayed on the display device 20, and the variable winning ball device 6B is not opened/closed based on the fact that the normal symbol display device 20 hits and displays the symbol), the gate passage memory is stored. Check the value of the number. Specifically, the count value of the gate passage memory number counter is confirmed. If the number of memory passing through the gate is not 0, it is determined whether or not to win (whether or not the stop symbol of the normal symbol is to be the hit symbol). Then, the variable time of the normal symbol is set in the normal symbol process timer, and the timer is started. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically “1”) indicating the normal symbol variation process (step 026IWS5101).

Normal symbol variation process (step 026IWS5101): The CPU 103 confirms whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out. If it has, the normal symbol process timer sets the normal symbol stop symbol display time, and starts the timer. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically “2”) indicating the normal symbol stop process (step 026IWS5102).

Normal symbol stop processing (step 026IWS5102): The CPU 103 confirms whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, confirms whether or not the stopped symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol. If it is not a winning symbol (if it is a deviating symbol), the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically "0") indicating the normal symbol normal process (step 026IWS5100). On the other hand, if the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol, the normal symbol process timer is set to the time before the normal electric accessory release, and the timer is started. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically “3”) indicating the normal electric auditors product opening preprocessing (step 026IWS5103).

Normal electric accessory release pretreatment (step 026IWS5103): The CPU 103 confirms whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, sets the ordinary electric auditors product operating time to the normal symbol process timer, and the timer To start opening the variable winning ball device 6B. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically “4”) indicating the normal electric auditors product operating process (step 026IWS5104).

Normal electric auditors product operation process (step 026IWS5104): The CPU 103 measures the normal symbol process timer, and when the normal symbol process timer times out, closes the variable winning ball device 6B. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically “0”) indicating the normal symbol normal process (step 026IWS5100).

FIG. 9-32 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol normal process (step 026IWS5100). In the normal symbol normal processing, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the gate passage memory number is 0 by confirming the count value of the gate passage memory number counter (step 026IWS5121). If the gate passage memory count is 0 (Y in step 026IWS5121), the process is terminated. If the gate passing memory number is not 0 (N in step 026IWS5121), the CPU 103 reads out the normal symbol per determination random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the gate passing memory number=1 (step 026IWS5122). Then, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the gate passage memory number counter by 1 and shifts the content of each storage area (step 026IWS5123). That is, the random number for normal symbol per determination stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of gate passage memory=n (n=2, 3, 4) is stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of gate passage memory=n-1. Store. Therefore, the order in which the normal symbol per determination random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to each gate passing memory number is always the order of gate passing memory number=1, 2, 3, 4 and It is supposed to match.

Next, the CPU 103 uses a normal symbol determination table for determining whether or not to make a normal symbol, and performs a lottery process based on a random number (ordinary symbol per determination random number value) to determine whether or not to make a normal symbol. It is determined (step 026IWS5127). Note that, in this characteristic unit 026IW, in step 026IWS5127, the CPU 103 uniformly sets 99/100 regardless of whether the state is the probable variation state, the KT state, or the high base state. It is decided to be a normal symbol with probability.

In step 026IWS5127, if the read random number per random symbol for judgment is within the range of hit (in the case of hit), the CPU 103 sets the hit symbol as the display result (step 026IWS5128), and proceeds to step 026IWS5130. Further, in step 026IWS5127, if the read random number per normal symbol for judgment is not within the hit range (if it is out of alignment), the CPU 103 sets the outlier as the display result (step 026IWS5129), and proceeds to step 026IWS5130.

In Step 026IWS5130, if the high base flag is set, the CPU 103 sets 0.2 seconds as the normal symbol variation time in the normal symbol process timer (Y in Step 026IWS5130, S5131). Moreover, if the high base flag is not set, that is, if it is the normal state or the second KT state, 1.0 second is set as the normal symbol variation time in the normal symbol process timer (N in step 026IWS5130, S5132).

Then, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag to a value (specifically, “1”) indicating the normal symbol variation process (step 026IWS5101) (step 026IWS5133).

FIG. 9-33 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol stop processing (step 026IWS5102). In the normal symbol stop process, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the normal symbol process timer by -1 (step 026IWS3701). Then, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the normal symbol process timer has become 0, that is, whether the normal symbol process timer has timed out (step 026IWS3702). Normally, if the symbol process timer has not timed out (N of step 026IWS3702), the process is ended as it is.

When the normal symbol process timer times out, that is, when the normal symbol stop symbol display time has elapsed (Y in step 026IWS3702), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol (hit in step 026IWS5127). Whether or not it is determined) is confirmed (step 026IWS3703). Whether or not the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol is set by, for example, setting a normal symbol hit determination flag when it is determined to be a hit in step 026IWS5127, and whether or not the flag is set is confirmed. You can

When it is determined that the stop symbol of the normal symbol is not the hit symbol but the deviating symbol (N of step 026IWS3703), the CPU 103 sets the value of the ordinary symbol process flag to the value of the normal symbol normal process (step 026IWS5100) (step 026IWS5100). Specifically, it is updated to "0" (step 026IWS3708).

In step 026IWS3703, when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol (Y in step 026IWS3703), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the high base flag is set (step 026IWS3704), and if it is set, That is, in the case of the first KT state, 0.1 seconds is set in the normal symbol process timer as the normal electric accessory release before time (step 026IWS3706). Moreover, when the high base flag is not set, that is, in the normal state or the second KT state, 2.6 seconds is set in the normal symbol process timer as the time before opening the normal electric accessory (step 026IWS3705). ..

Next, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to a value (specifically “3”) corresponding to the normal electric auditors product opening preprocessing (step 026IWS5103) (step 026IWS3707).

FIG. 9-34 is a flowchart showing the pre-processing for opening the ordinary electric auditors product (step 026IWS5103). In the normal electric accessory release pre-processing, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the normal symbol process timer by -1 (step 026IWS3801). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the normal symbol process timer has become 0, that is, whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out (step 026IWS3802). Normally, if the symbol process timer has not timed out (N of step 026IWS3802), the process is ended as it is.

When the normal symbol process timer has timed out, that is, when the time before the opening of the normal electric auditors product has passed (Y in step 026IWS3802), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the high base flag is set (step 026IWS3803). If it is set, that is, if it is in the first KT state, 5.5 seconds is set in the normal symbol process timer as the normal electric accessory opening time (step 026IWS3805). Moreover, when the high base flag is not set, that is, in the normal state or the second KT state, 0.2 seconds is set in the normal symbol process timer as the normal electric accessory release time (step 026IWS3804).

As described above, in the characteristic part 026IW, the normal electric auditors product opening time is set to 5.5 seconds in the first KT state, and the normal electric auditors object opening time is set to 0.2 seconds in the normal state or the second KT state. By doing so, the first KT state is a state in which it is easier to make a start winning at the second start winning opening than in the normal state or the second KT state. Therefore, the first KT state is configured so that the game ball does not easily reach the special variable winning ball device 17 provided downstream of the variable winning ball device 6B than the normal state or the second KT state.

The control method for facilitating the starting winning in the second starting winning opening when the gaming state is the first KT state is not limited to that shown in the characteristic portion 026IW. For example, in the case of the first KT state, the variable winning ball device 6B is opened more times than in the case of the normal state or the second KT state (for example, in the normal state or the second KT state, the variable winning ball device 6B). 6B may be set as the number of times of opening 6B, whereas in the first KT state, the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 6B may be set as 2). By doing so, in the case of the first KT state, by increasing the number of times of opening the variable winning ball device 6B, it is possible to facilitate the starting winning in the second starting winning opening.

Further, for example, in the case of the first KT state, as compared with the case of the normal state or the second KT state, the control for increasing the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B and the variable winning ball device 6B. May be executed in combination with a control for increasing the number of times of release of the.

Next, the CPU 103 controls the variable winning ball device 6B to the open state (step 026IWS3806). Specifically, the solenoid 81 is driven to open the variable winning ball device 6B.

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special figure process flag to a value (specifically, “4”) corresponding to the normal electric auditors product operating process (step 026IWS5104) (step 026IWS3807).

Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. 9-35 to 9-37 are flowcharts showing a specific example of the command analysis process (step S75). The effect control command received from the main board 11 is stored in the received command buffer, but in the command analysis processing, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

In the command analysis processing, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not the received command is stored in the command reception buffer (step 026IWS611). Whether it is stored or not is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the received command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 120 reads the received command from the command reception buffer (step 026IWS612). When read, the value of the read pointer is set to +2 (step 026IWS613). The reason why +2 is performed is that two bytes (one command) are read.

If the received effect control command is the set value command (step 026IWS614), the effect control CPU 0120 stores the set value indicated by the received set value command in the set value storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step). 026IWS615).

If the received effect control command is the variation pattern command (step 026IWS616), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received variation pattern command in the variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 026IWS617). Then, the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step 026IWS618).

If the received effect control command is the display result designation command (step 026IWS619), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received display result designation command in the display result designation command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 026IWS620). ).

If the received production control command is any symbol confirmation designation command (first symbol confirmation designation command, second symbol confirmation designation command, first forced symbol confirmation designation command, second forced symbol confirmation designation command) (step 026IWS621) ), the effect control CPU 120 sets a confirmation command reception flag corresponding to the received symbol confirmation designation command (step 026IWS622).

If the received effect control command is the first big hit start designation command or the second big hit start designation command (step 026IWS623), the effect control CPU 120 controls to start displaying right-handed display on the display screen of the image display device 5. Is performed (step 026IWS624). Moreover, the effect control CPU 120 sets the first big hit start designation command reception flag or the second big hit start designation command reception flag according to the received big hit start designation command (step 026IWS625).

If the received effect control command is the first big hit end designation command or the second big hit end designation command (step 026IWS626), the effect control CPU 120 terminates the right-handed display on the display screen of the image display device 5. Is performed (step 026IWS627). Moreover, the CPU 120 for effect control sets the first big hit end designation command reception flag or the second big hit end designation command reception flag according to the received big hit end designation command (step 026IWS628).

In this example, the right hit display is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 during the big hit game by executing the processing of steps 026IWS624 and S627.

If the received production control command is the small hit start designation command (step 026IWS629), the effect control CPU 120 sets the small hit start designation command reception flag (step 026IWS630).

If the received production control command is the small hit end designation command (step 026IWS631), the effect control CPU 120 sets the small hit end designation command reception flag (step 026IWS632).

If the received production control command is a right-handed lighting start designation command (step 026IWS633), the effect control CPU 120 performs control to start lighting the right-handed notification LED 37 (step 026IWS634).

If the received production control command is a right-handed lighting end designation command (step 026IWS635), the effect control CPU 120 performs control to end the lighting of the right-handed notification LED 37 (step 026IWS636).

If the received production control command is a low-accuracy/non-KT background designation command (step 026IWS637), the production control CPU 120 sets the background image on the image display device 5 to a background image corresponding to the low probability/non-KT state (for example, The display is controlled with a blue background image) (step 026IWS638). Further, the effect control CPU 120 resets the first KT state flag indicating the first KT state if set (step 026IWS639).

If the received effect control command is the low-accuracy/first KT background designating command (step 026IWS640), the effect control CPU 120 causes the background image on the image display device 5 to have a low probability/a background image corresponding to the first KT state (for example, The display is controlled with a green background image) (step 026IWS641). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets the first KT state flag (step 026IWS642), and if set, the high-probability state flag indicating the high-probability state and the second probability indicating the second KT state. The 2KT status flag is reset (step 026IWS643).

If the received production control command is the high-accuracy/first KT background designating command (step 026IWS644), the production control CPU 120 sets the background image in the image display device 5 to the background image corresponding to the high probability/first KT state (for example, The display is controlled with a yellow background image) (step 026IWS645). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets the high-probability state flag and the first KT state flag (step 026IWS646), and resets the second KT state flag if set (step 026IWS647).

If the received effect control command is the high-accuracy/second KT background designating command (step 026IWS648), the effect control CPU 120 sets the background image in the image display device 5 to the high probability/background image corresponding to the second KT state (for example, The display is controlled with a red background image) (step 026IWS649). Moreover, the production control CPU 120 sets the high-probability state flag and the second KT state flag (step 026IWS650), and resets the first KT state flag if set (step 026IWS651).

If the received production control command is the special winning opening winning award designation command (step 026IWS652), the production control CPU 120 counts the prize balls generated during the period in which the small hits continuously occur in the second KT state. The value of the small winning continuous medium prize ball number counter is added by 15 (step 026IWS653). Next, the effect control CPU 120, based on the value of the small hit continuous medium prize ball number counter after the addition, occurs in the image display device 5 during the period in which the small hits continuously occur in the second KT state. If the small hit continuous medium prize ball number display 1 indicating the number of prize balls is displayed, control is performed to update the small hit continuous medium prize ball number display 1 (step 026IWS654).

In addition, in this example, the small hit continuous medium award ball number display 1 is started when a 16R certainty variation big hit or a 2R certainty variation big hit occurs in the normal state or the first KT state, and other than 16R certainty variation big hit or 2R certainty variation big hit. The display is terminated when a big hit of (1) occurs (that is, when the second KT state is terminated).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the small hitting continuous medium prize ball counter after addition is equal to or more than any threshold value (step 026IWS655). If the value of the small hit continuous medium prize ball number counter after addition is equal to or more than any threshold value, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display the value of the small hit continuous middle prize ball number counter after addition. The control for displaying the small winning continuous award ball number display 2 according to is performed (step 026IWS656). For example, if the value of the small winning continuous medium award ball counter after addition is 1000 or 1005, 1010, it means that the number of award balls has reached 1000 by the prize winning at this time. Therefore, it is determined that the threshold “1000” has been reached, and the small hit continuous medium prize ball count display 2 indicating that the number of prize balls has reached 1000 is displayed. For example, the image display device 5 displays a character display such as "1000 OVER" as the small winning continuous award ball number display 2.

If the received effect control command is a special winning award winning designation command (step 026IWS657), the effect control CPU 120 adds 10 to the value of the small hit continuous medium prize ball number counter (step 026IWS658). Next, the effect control CPU 120, based on the value of the small hit continuous medium prize ball number counter after the addition, if the small hit continuous medium prize ball number display 1 is displayed on the image display device 5, the small hit continuous. Control for updating the middle prize number display 1 is performed (step 026IWS659).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the small winning continuous medium prize ball number counter after addition is equal to or more than any threshold value (step 026IWS660). If the value of the small hit continuous medium prize ball number counter after addition is equal to or more than any threshold value, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display the value of the small hit continuous middle prize ball number counter after addition. The control for displaying the small winning continuous middle award number display 2 according to is performed (step 026IWS661). For example, if the value of the small winning continuous medium prize ball number counter after addition is 1000 or 1005, it means that the number of prize balls has reached 1000 by the prize winning in this time. Therefore, it is determined that the threshold value “1000” has been reached, and the small winning continuous award ball number display 2 indicating that the number of award balls has reached 1000 is displayed. For example, the image display device 5 displays a character display such as "1000 OVER" as the small winning continuous award ball number display 2.

In this example, the case where the small hit continuous medium prize ball number display 1 is updated or the small hit continuous medium prize ball number display 2 is displayed based on the winning in the special winning opening or the special winning opening is shown. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, even when a winning is made to the general winning opening 10 during the continuous small hit in the second KT state, the value corresponding to the number of prize balls for the winning at the general winning opening 10 is set to the number of small winning continuous medium winning balls. It may be added to the counter to update the small hit continuous middle prize ball count display 1 or display the small hit continuous middle prize ball count display 2.

If the received effect control command is any other command, the effect control CPU 120 executes a process of storing the received effect control command or setting a flag according to the received effect control command (step 026IWS662). ). Then, the process proceeds to step 026IWS611.

In addition, in the present characteristic unit 026IW, the effect control unit (specifically, the effect control CPU 120) executes the demo display control process in, for example, the effect control process process (step S76). 9-38 and 9-39 are flowcharts showing the demo display control processing. In the demo display control process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the first customer waiting demo display designation command is received (step 026IWS4701), and if not received, the process proceeds to step 026IWS4706. If it is received, it is determined whether or not it is in the normal state (step 026IWS4702), and if it is not in the normal state, the process proceeds to step 026IWS4705. Specifically, if neither the first KT state flag indicating the first KT state nor the second KT state flag indicating the second KT state is set, it is determined to be the normal state.

Whether or not the first customer waiting demo display designation command is received is determined by, for example, when the first customer waiting demo display designation command is received in the command analysis process (step S75). A flag indicating that the designated command has been received may be set, and in step 026IWS4701, it may be confirmed whether or not the flag is set.

Further, the first KT state flag and the second KT state flag are, for example, in the command analysis process (step S75), a low-accuracy/first KT background designation command, a high-accuracy/first KT background designation command, a high-accuracy/second KT background designation. Set based on receipt of command.

In the normal state, the effect control CPU 120 sets the first demo standby timer for measuring a value corresponding to the time (for example, 30 seconds) until the first demo display is started (step 026IWS4703), A first demo standby flag indicating that the first demo display is on standby is set (step 026IWS4704). Then, the first demo reception flag is reset (step 026IWS4705).

After that, the production control CPU 120 determines whether or not the first demo standby flag is set (step 026IWS4706), and if it is set, the first special symbol variation is started (step 026IWS4707). Y), or when the big hit game state is controlled based on the variation of the second special symbol (Y in step 026IWS4708), the process proceeds to step 026IWS4712. As a result, when the first special symbol variation is started or the big hit game state is controlled based on the variation of the second special symbol, the first demo display is not executed. Specifically, in step 026IWS4707, when the fluctuation pattern command indicating the fluctuation of the first special symbol is received, it is determined that the first special symbol fluctuation is started. Further, in step 026IWS4708, when the second big hit start designation command is received, it is determined that the big hit game state is controlled based on the variation of the second special symbol.

The first demo standby flag is set, the first special symbol fluctuation is not started (N in step 026IWS4707), and is not controlled to the jackpot gaming state based on the fluctuation in the second special symbol (N in step 026IWS4708). , The value of the first demo standby timer is decremented by 1 (step 026IWS4709), and when the first demo standby timer times out (step 026IWS4710 Y), the first demo display is started (step 026IWS4711) and the first demo is displayed. The standby flag is reset (step 026IWS4712).

After that, if the CPU 120 for effect control is in the first demo display (Y in step 026IWS4713), the variation of the first special symbol is started (Y in step 026IWS4714), or based on the variation of the second special symbol. If the jackpot game state is controlled (Y in step 026IWS4715), the first demo display is ended (step 026IWS4716).

Further, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the second customer waiting demonstration display designation command has been received (step 026IWS4801), and if not received, proceeds to step 026IWS4806. If it is received, it is determined whether or not it is in the KT state (step 026IWS4802), and if it is not in the KT state, the process proceeds to step 026IWS4805. Specifically, if either the first KT state flag or the second KT state flag is set, it is determined to be the KT state.

Whether or not the second customer waiting demo display designating command is received is determined by, for example, when the second customer waiting demo display designating command is received in the command analysis process (step S75). A flag indicating that the designated command has been received may be set, and in step 026IWS4801, it may be confirmed whether or not the flag is set.

If it is in the KT state, the effect control CPU 120 sets the second demo standby timer for measuring a value corresponding to the time (for example, 30 seconds) until the second demo display is started (step 026IWS4803), A second demo standby flag indicating that the second demo display is on standby is set (step 026IWS4804). Then, the second demo reception flag is reset (step 026IWS4805).

After that, the CPU 120 for effect control determines whether or not the second demo standby flag is set (step 026IWS4806), and if it is set, the second special symbol variation is started (step 026IWS4807). Y) or if it is not in the KT state (N in step 026IWS4808), the process moves to step 026IWS4812. As a result, when the second special symbol variation starts or the KT state ends, the second demo display is not executed. Specifically, in step 026IWS4807, when the variation pattern command indicating the variation of the second special symbol is received, it is determined that the second special symbol variation is started. In step 026IWS4808, if neither the first KT state flag nor the second KT state flag is set, it is determined that the KT state has ended.

The second demo standby flag is set, the second special symbol fluctuation is not started (step 026IWS4807 N), if the KT state is not finished (step 026IWS4808 Y), the value of the second demo standby timer Is decremented by 1 (step 026IWS4809), and when the second demo standby timer times out (Y in step 026IWS4810), the second demo display is started (step 026IWS4811) and the second demo standby flag is reset (step 026IWS4812). ).

After that, if the second demonstration display is being performed (Y in step 026IWS4813), the CPU 120 for effect control starts changing the second special symbol (Y in step 026IWS4814), or if the KT state has ended (step 026IWS4815 N), the second demo display is ended (step 026IWS4816).

FIG. 9-40 is a flowchart showing the variable display start waiting process (step S170). In the variable display start waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variation pattern command is received (step 026IWS811). Whether or not the fluctuation pattern command is received is determined by, for example, in the command analysis process (step S75), when the fluctuation pattern command is received, a fluctuation pattern command reception flag indicating that the fluctuation pattern command is received is set. In step 026IWS811, it is only necessary to confirm whether or not the fluctuation pattern command reception flag is set.

If the variation pattern command is received, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the first KT state flag or the second KT state flag is set (step 026IWS812). If neither the first KT state flag nor the second KT state flag is set (that is, if it is a non-KT state), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the variable display of the first special symbol. Is confirmed (step 026IWS813). Whether or not the variation display of the first special symbol is executed is, for example, whether or not the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command specifies the first variation pattern #01 to #09. It can be determined by confirming that. Unless the variable display of the first special symbol is executed (that is, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed), the process is ended as it is. When performing the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variable display start setting process (step S171) (step 026IWS815).

If the 1st KT state flag or the 2nd KT state flag is not set (that is, if it is the KT state), the CPU 120 for effect control confirms whether or not it is the time to execute the variable display of the second special symbol. (Step 026IWS814). Whether or not the variation display of the second special symbol is executed is, for example, whether or not the variation pattern indicated by the received variation pattern command specifies the second variation patterns #01 to #34. It can be determined by confirming that. Unless the variable display of the second special symbol is executed (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed), the process is ended as it is. If the variable display of the second special symbol is to be executed, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variable display start setting process (step S171) (step 026IWS816).

By performing the processing of steps 026IWS812 to S815, in the characteristic part 026IW, in the non-KT state, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed in the image display device 5 in correspondence with the variable display of the first special symbol. Is executed, in the case of the KT state, the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed in the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol. In other words, even when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in the KT state, or when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, , The variable display of the decorative pattern is not executed.

FIG. 9-41 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171). In the variable display start setting processing, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is a case of performing variable display of the first special symbol (step 026IWS920). Whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol is executed is, for example, the variation pattern command stored in the variation pattern command storage area specifies the first variation pattern #01 to #09. It can be determined by checking whether or not there is. If the variable display of the first special symbol is to be executed, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variable display this time is a small hit (step 026IWS921). Whether or not the variable display this time is a small hit is confirmed by, for example, whether or not the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area is the display result 8 designation command. It can be determined by If it is a small hit variation, the CPU 120 for effect control determines a non-reach-off symbol as a stop symbol of the decorative symbol (step 026IWS922).

As described above, in this example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and the small hit occurs, there is only a small hit A, and a game ball to the special winning opening during the small hit game. Can hardly be expected to win. Therefore, by executing the processing of steps 026IWS920 to S922, in this example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and a small hit occurs, the non-reach miss symbol is forcibly displayed as a stop. This prevents players from having excessive expectations.

When performing the variable display of the second special symbol (N in step 026IWS920), or if it is not a small hit variation (N in step 026IWS921), the production control CPU 120, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol according to the variable display result. Is determined (step 026IWS923). In step 026IWS923, the effect control CPU 120, when the display result 1 designation command is received (when it is determined to be out), only the left out or the left and right decorative designs in which the left, middle and right decorative designs are completely inconsistent. Determine the combination of out-of-match reach patterns. Further, when the display result 2 designation command is received (when it is determined to be the 16R probability variation big hit), the combination of the symbols arranged in the symbol "7" among the odd-numbered symbols is determined. In addition, when the display result 3 designation command and the display result 4 designation command are received (when it is determined to be the 9R certainty variation jackpot or the 6R certainty variation jackpot), the decoration symbol on the left middle right is an odd number symbol other than "7". Decide the combination of the arranged symbols. In addition, when the display result 6 designation command is received (when it is determined that the 2R probability variation big hit), the combination of symbols including the special symbol (the symbol "R" in this example) as the decorative symbol in the symbol is determined. .. Further, when the display result 5 designation command or the display result 7 designation command is received (when it is determined to be the 6R normal big hit or the 2R normal big hit), a combination of symbols in which the left middle right decorative pattern is arranged in an even number pattern To decide. When the display result 8 designation command is received (when it is determined to be a small hit), a combination of decorative symbols of the small hit design (for example, “135”) is determined.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current variable display is out of order (step 026IWS924). It should be noted that whether or not the variable display this time is out of order is determined by, for example, checking whether or not the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area is the display result 1 designation command. Can be determined by. If it is not a deviation variation, the process directly proceeds to step 026IWS928. If it is a deviation variation (Y in step 026IWS924), the effect control CPU 120 executes the set value suggesting effect setting process for determining the presence and type of the set value suggesting effect suggesting the currently set setting value. (Step 026IWS925).

In step 026IWS925, the effect control CPU 120 identifies the setting value stored in the setting value storage area (see step 026IWS615). Then, the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on a random number by using a table corresponding to the specified setting value as a setting value suggestion effect determination table for determining the presence and type of the setting value suggestion effect, and the setting is performed. Determine the presence and type of value suggestion production.

FIG. 9-42 is an explanatory diagram for describing a specific example of the setting value suggestive effect determination table. As shown in FIG. 9-42, in the set value suggestion effect determination table, there is no set value suggestion effect, set value suggestion effect A, set value suggestion effect B, set value suggestion effect C, set value suggestion effect D, and set value. A determination value is assigned to each of the suggestive effect E and the set value suggestive effect F.

The set value suggestive effect A is, for example, an effect executed in a mode in which a predetermined character image is displayed in a blue display color on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIG. In some cases, the execution rate is highest. Further, the set value suggesting effect B is, for example, an effect executed in a mode of displaying a predetermined character image in a green display color on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIG. ", the highest execution rate. Further, the set value suggestive effect C is, for example, an effect executed in a mode of displaying a predetermined character image in a yellow display color on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIG. ", the highest execution rate. Further, the set value suggestive effect D is, for example, an effect executed in a mode of displaying a predetermined character image in the display color of orange on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIG. ", the highest execution rate. Further, the set value suggestive effect E is, for example, an effect executed in a mode in which a predetermined character image is displayed in a red display color on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIG. ", the highest execution rate. The set value suggestive effect F is, for example, an effect executed in a mode in which a predetermined character image is displayed in the rainbow display color on the image display device 5, and as shown in FIG. When it is "6", the execution ratio is highest.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the second KT state flag is set (step 026IWS926). If the second KT state flag is not set (that is, it is not the second KT state), the process directly proceeds to step 026IWS928. If the second KT state flag is set (Y in step 026IWS926), that is, if it is the second KT state, the effect control CPU 120 suggests that the second KT state (small hit RUSH) will continue. A small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect setting process for determining the presence and type of the continuation suggestion effect is executed (step 026IWS927).

FIG. 9-43 is an explanatory diagram for describing a specific example of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect determination table. As shown in FIG. 9-43, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect determination table is determined for each of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A, and the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect B, respectively. A value has been assigned. The small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A is, for example, an effect executed in a mode of displaying a predetermined effect image in a blue display color on the image display device 5. The small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect B is, for example, an effect executed in a mode in which a predetermined effect image is displayed in a red display color on the image display device 5.

As shown in FIG. 9-43, in this example, the small hitting RUSH continuation suggestion effect is highest when the setting value is "1", and the small hitting RUSH continuation suggesting effect is when the setting value is "2". The execution ratio of the small hit RUSH continuation suggesting effect is even higher when the execution ratio of is next and the setting value is “3”, and the execution ratio of the small hit RUSH continuation suggesting effect is when the setting value is “4”. Is the next highest and the setting value is "5", the execution ratio of the small hit RUSH continuation suggesting effect is the next highest, and the setting value is "6", the execution ratio of the small hit RUSH continuation suggesting effect is the highest. It's getting low.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-43, the execution ratio of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A is highest when the set value is "1", and the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect B is set when the set value is "6". Has the highest execution rate.

In this example, the jackpot probability is the lowest when the setting value is "1", and the jackpot probability is the highest when the setting value is "6". However, when the setting value is "2", the jackpot is not generated. Since the second KT state may end as a trigger, the setting value "1" is the setting state in which the second KT state is most likely to continue (high continuation expectation level) and the setting value "6". In some cases, it can be said that the second KT state is the setting state in which it is most difficult to continue (the degree of continuation expectation is low). Therefore, in this example, when the set value is "1", the execution ratio of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the highest, and when the setting value is "6", the execution ratio of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is the lowest. Therefore, by executing the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect, it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for continuing the second KT state (small hit RUSH).

Note that, as described above, the degree of continuation expectation of the second KT state (small hit RUSH) is the degree of expectation that the control period to the second KT state will be long without the occurrence of a big hit.

Further, in the present example, since the execution ratio of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A is the highest when the setting value is "1", the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A is particularly executed, It is possible to further increase the sense of expectation for continuing the second KT state (small hit RUSH).

Next, when the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the variation pattern of the decorative pattern to be used and the set value suggestion effect or the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect, based on the change pattern indicated by the received change pattern command. , A process table corresponding to the set value suggestion effect or the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is selected (step 026IWS928).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets the process timer set value of the process data 1 in the process table selected in step 026IWS928 to the process timer and starts the process timer (step 026IWS929). Next, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device (image display device 5, various lamps, speakers 8L, 8R) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Is executed (step 026IWS930). For example, a control signal (display control execution data) is output to the VDP in order to display an image according to the variation pattern on the image display device 5. In addition, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the LED control board 14 in order to control the turning on/off of various lamps. Further, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound from the speakers 8L and 8R.

When it is determined to execute the set value suggestion effect, step 026IWS930 and the variable display effect effect process (step S172) are executed in accordance with the process table including the set value suggestion effect selected in step 026IWS928. The set value suggestion effect is executed during the variable display of the symbols (during the deviation).

When it is determined to execute the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect, step 026IWS930 and the variable display during effect process (step S172) are executed according to the process table including the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect selected in step 026IWS928. As a result, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed during the variation display of the decorative pattern (during the variation of the deviation in the second KT state).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to the variation time in the decorative symbol variation time timer to start the decorative symbol variation time timer (step 026IWS931). Then, the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variable display effect process (step S172) (step 026IWS932).

FIG. 9-44 and FIG. 9-45 are flowcharts showing the special figure per wait process (step S173) in the effect control process process. In the special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not the stop symbol display flag 1 indicating that the big hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is set (step 026IWS9701). .. If the stop symbol display flag 1 is set, the process proceeds to step 026IWS9706. In this characteristic part 026IW, when the big hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol, the stop symbol display flag 1 is set in step 026IWS9705. Then, the stop symbol display flag 1 is reset when executing the big hit mid effect. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag 1 is set means that the big hit symbol has been confirmed and displayed, but since the big hit mid-effect has not yet been executed, the process of displaying the stop symbol of the decorative symbol in step 026IWS9703 is performed. Without executing, the process proceeds to step 026IWS9706.

If the stop symbol display flag 1 is not set, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the stop symbol display flag 2 indicating that the small hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is set. (Step 026IWS9702). If the stop symbol display flag 2 is set, the process proceeds to step 026IWS9716. In this characteristic part 026IW, when the small hitting design is displayed as the stop design of the decorative design, the stop design display flag 2 is set in step 026IWS9715. Then, the stop symbol display flag 2 is reset when executing the effect during the small hit. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag 2 is set means that the small hit symbol has been confirmed and displayed, but since the effect during the small hit has not yet been executed, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol of step 026IWS9703 is displayed. The process moves to step 026IWS9716 without executing the process.

If neither the stop symbol display flag 1 nor the stop symbol display flag 2 is set, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to stop the stop symbol of the left-middle-right decorative symbol (stopping symbol, jackpot symbol). , Small hit symbol) are confirmed and displayed (step 026IWS9703). When the first compulsory symbol confirmation designation command or the second compulsory symbol confirmation designation command is received, in step 026IWS9703, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to confirm and display the outlier symbol.

When the big hit symbol is confirmed and displayed in the process of step 026IWS9703 (Y of step 026IWS9704), the effect control CPU 120 sets the stop symbol display flag 1 (step 026IWS9705).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not any of the big hit start designation commands (first big hit start designation command, second big hit start designation command) have been received (step 026IWS9706). When either big hit start designation command is received, production control CPU120 resets stop design indicator flag 1 (step 026IWS9707).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the big hit type of the big hit that has occurred this time is a 16R certainty variation big hit or a 2R certainty variation big hit (step 026IWS9708). Whether or not the jackpot type is the 16R certainty variation jackpot or the 2R certainty variation jackpot is determined, for example, by checking whether the received display result designation command is the display result 2 designation command or the display result 6 designation command. it can. If it is the 16R certainty variation big hit or the 2R certainty variation big hit, the process directly proceeds to step 026IWS9710.

If neither the 16R certainty variation big hit nor the 2R certainty variation big hit, it means that the second KT state ends after the end of this big hit game when the second KT state is in progress. In this case, the effect control CPU 120 clears the values of the small hit continuous number counter for counting the number of continuous small hits in the second KT state and the small hit continuous medium prize ball number counter to 0 ( Step 026IWS9709).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the effect during the big hit (step 026IWS9710). Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer setting value to the process timer (step 026IWS9711), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number). According to the data 1), the control of the rendering device (the image display device 5 as the rendering component, various lamps as the rendering component, and the speakers 8L and 8R as the rendering component) is executed (step 026IWS9712).

After that, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value according to the big hit medium effect process (step S176) (step 026IWS9713).

If the big hit symbol is not definitely displayed in the process of step 026IWS9703 (N of step 026IWS9704), if the small hit symbol is definitely displayed in the process of step 026IWS9703 (Y of step 026IWS9714), the CPU 120 for effect control stops. The symbol display flag 2 is set (step 026IWS9715).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the small hit start designation command has been received (step 026IWS9716). When the small hit start designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 resets the stop symbol display flag 2 (step 026IWS9717).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 adds 1 to the value of the small hit continuous number counter (step 026IWS9718). Further, the effect control CPU 120 displays the small hit continuous number display 1 indicating the continuous number of small hits in the second KT state on the image display device 5 based on the value of the updated small hit continuous number counter. If so, control is performed to update the small hit continuous number display 1 (step 026IWS9719).

In this example, the small hit continuous number display 1 is started when a 16R sure change big hit or a 2R sure change big hit occurs in the normal state or the first KT state, and a big hit other than the 16R sure change big hit or the 2R sure change big hit occurs. The display is terminated when it occurs (that is, when the second KT state is terminated).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the small hit continuous number counter after addition is one of the threshold values (step 026IWS9720). If the value of the small hit continuous number counter after addition is one of the thresholds, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display the small hit continuous number corresponding to the value of the small hit continuous number counter after addition. The display 2 is controlled to be displayed (step 026IWS9721). For example, if the value of the small hit continuous number counter after addition is 10, it means that the small hit continuous number has reached 10 times at the present small hit occurrence, and thus the threshold value “10” is reached. It is determined that the small hit continuous number has reached 10 times, and the small hit continuous number display 2 is displayed. For example, in the image display device 5, a character display such as "10COMBO" is displayed as the small hit continuous number display 2.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the effect in the small hit (step 026IWS9722). Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer setting value to the process timer (step 026IWS9723), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number). According to the data 1), the control of the rendering device (the image display device 5 as the rendering component, various lamps as the rendering component, and the speakers 8L and 8R as the rendering component) is executed (step 026IWS9724).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect process during small hit (step S174) (step 026IWS9725).

When the big hit symbol and the small hit symbol are not displayed in the process of step 026IWS9703 (that is, when the deviating symbol is displayed) (N in step 026IWS9704, and N in step 026IWS9714), the effect control CPU 120 causes the effect control. The value of the process flag is updated to a value according to the variable display start waiting process (step S170) (step 026IWS9726).

Next, a description will be given of a production mode of the production executed in the present characteristic unit 026IW. First, the presentation mode of the set value suggestion production will be described. FIG. 9-46 is an explanatory diagram for describing a production mode of a set value suggestive production. In this example, the set value suggesting effect can be executed in the variable display of the decorative pattern that is out of alignment. As shown in FIG. 9-46(A), when the image display device 5 is performing the variable display of the left-middle-right decorative design, at the execution timing of the set value suggestive effect, FIG. 9-46(B1) ) To (B3), the set value suggestion effect is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 9-46 (B1) to (B3), the set value suggestion effect is executed by the mode in which the predetermined character images 026IW001, 026IW002, 026IW003 are displayed on the image display device 5. In this case, for example, when the set value suggestive effect A is executed, as shown in FIG. 9-46 (B1), the predetermined character image 026IW001 is displayed in the blue display color on the image display device 5 so as to be set. Value suggestion production is executed. Further, for example, in the case of executing the set value suggestive effect C, as shown in FIG. 9-46 (B2), the set value is set according to a mode in which the predetermined character image 026IW002 is displayed in the yellow display color on the image display device 5. Suggestive production is executed. Further, for example, when the set value suggestive effect E is executed, as shown in FIG. 9-46 (B3), the set value is set in a mode in which the predetermined character image 026IW003 is displayed in the red display color on the image display device 5. Suggestive production is executed.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 9-46, the case where the set value suggestive effect A, the set value suggestive effect C, and the set value suggestive effect E are executed is shown, but for example, when the set value suggestive effect B is executed. Indicates a predetermined character image with a green display color, a predetermined character image with an orange display color when the set value suggestion effect D is executed, and a rainbow when the set value suggestion effect F is executed. A predetermined character image is displayed in the color display color.

In this example, which setting value is currently set for the player depending on whether a character image of a different display color is displayed during the variable display of the decorative pattern that is out of order and the setting value suggestion effect is executed. Can be expected.

Next, an effect mode of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect will be described. FIG. 9-47 is an explanatory diagram for describing a production mode of a small hit RUSH continuation suggestion production. In this example, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect can be executed in the variable display of the decorative pattern which is out of the second KT state (during the small hit RUSH).

In the present example, when in the second KT state, as shown in FIG. 9-47(A), for example, a character display 026IW004 such as “small hit RUSH” is displayed on the image display device 5, and the second KT state is displayed. It is displayed so that it is in the middle. Then, as shown in FIG. 9-47(A), when the variable display of the left-middle-right decorative design is being performed on the image display device 5 during the second KT state, the execution timing of the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect Then, as shown in FIGS. 9-47 (B1) to (B3), the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 9-47 (B1) and (B2), the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed in a mode in which the predetermined effect images 026IW005 and 026IW006 are displayed on the image display device 5. In this example, a case where a racing car image is displayed as the predetermined effect images 026IW005 and 026IW006 is shown. In this case, for example, in the case of executing the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect A, as shown in FIG. 9-47 (B1), a predetermined effect image 026IW005 is displayed on the image display device 5 in a blue display color. Thus, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed. Further, for example, when the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect B is executed, as shown in FIG. 9-47 (B2), a predetermined effect image 026IW005 is displayed on the image display device 5 in a red display color. The small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed.

In this example, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect is executed or the effect image of any display color is displayed and the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion is displayed during the variable display of the decorative pattern which is out of the second KT state. Depending on whether or not the effect is executed, the player can be expected to continue the second KT state (small hit RUSH).

Next, the display mode of the right-handed notification will be described. FIG. 9-48 is an explanatory diagram for describing the display mode of right-handed notification. In this example, regardless of whether it is a big hit in the variable display of the first special symbol or whether it is a big hit by executing the variable display of the second special symbol, in the case of a big hit game As shown in FIG. 9-48(1), the right-handed indicator 26 is turned on by the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) (see steps 026IWS2021A and S2021B). Further, based on the reception of the right-handed lighting start designation command, as shown in FIG. 9-48(1), the effect control CPU 120 turns on the right-handed notification LED 37 (steps 026IWS2022A, S2022B, S634). reference). Further, as shown in FIG. 9-48(1), the production control CPU 120 displays the right-handed display 026IW007 on the display screen of the image display device 5 (see step 026IWS624).

Further, in this example, when the small hit in the variable display of the second special symbol, during the small hit game, as shown in FIG. 9-48 (2), the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically The right-handed indicator 26 is turned on by the CPU 103) (see step 026IWS2027B). Further, based on the reception of the right-handing lighting start designation command, the right-handling notification LED 37 is turned on by the production control CPU 120 as shown in FIG. 9-48(2) (see steps 026IWS2028B and S634). .. However, unlike during the big hit game, as shown in FIG. 9-48(2), the right hit display 026IW007 is not displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5.

On the other hand, in the present example, when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the first special symbol, as shown in FIG. 9-48 (3), during the small hit game, the right-handed indicator 26 is turned on and right. The hitting notification LED 37 is not turned on, and the right hitting display 026IW007 is not displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5.

As described above, according to the characteristic part 026IW, the first identification information (for example, the game ball) is entered based on the fact that the game medium (for example, the game ball) has entered the first starting area (for example, the first starting winning opening). , The first special symbol) can be variably displayed, and the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) is based on the game medium entering the second starting area (for example, the second starting winning opening). The variable display of can be executed. Also, variable means (for example, special variable winning) that can change between a first state (for example, open state) in which the game medium can enter and a second state (for example, closed state) in which the game medium is difficult or inaccessible A ball device 17). In addition, after the variable display of either the first identification information or the second identification information is executed, an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit game state) and a special state having a lower degree of advantage than the advantageous state ( For example, it can be controlled to any of the small hit game state), and when the special state is controlled, the variable means is controlled to the first state. In addition, the first starting area is provided so that a game medium that moves on a predetermined path (for example, an area on the left side of the game area) of the moving path on which the game medium can move can enter, and the variable means is a moving path. A game medium that moves on a specific route (for example, a region on the right side of the game region) is provided so that it can enter. Further, it is possible to execute a specific notification (for example, a right-handed notification shown in FIGS. 9-48 (1) and (2)) for promoting the emission of the game medium to the specific route, and the variable display of the first identification information is possible. When the special state is controlled after the execution of (1), the specific notification is not executed (for example, refer to FIG. 9-48 (3)). Therefore, it is possible to appropriately notify the promotion of the launch of the game medium.

Specifically, as shown in this feature unit 026IW, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel, and the small hit type of the first special symbol side It is configured so that the winning ratio (advantage) to the special winning opening is lower than that of the small hit type on the second special symbol side, and when the small hit occurs in the variable display of the first special symbol, the second special When the variable display of the symbols is configured to be forcedly stopped and stopped, if the right hitting notification is executed for the small hit on the first special symbol side with a low winning rate (advantage), it is substantially It is not preferable because the player wastes the game ball in spite of being unlikely to expect to win the special winning opening, and rather gives a disadvantageous launch promotion notification. Therefore, in this example, while the right hit notification is executed for the small hit on the second special symbol side, the right hit notification is not executed for the small hit on the first special symbol side. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages due to the player's wasteful hitting, and it is possible to realize appropriate notification.

Further, according to the characteristic unit 026IW, the first hold storage means (for example, the first hold storage buffer) capable of storing the information related to the variable display of the first identification information as the hold storage, and the variable display of the second identification information. And a second reserved storage unit (for example, a second reserved storage buffer) capable of storing information regarding the reserved storage. In addition, when a specific display result (for example, a jackpot pattern) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display of the first identification information or a display result of the variable display of the second identification information, it enters an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state). It is controllable, and when a special display result (for example, a small hitting pattern) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display of the first identification information or a display result of the variable display of the second identification information (for example, It can be controlled to a small hit game state). Further, it is possible to control to a special state (for example, KT state) in which the frequency of the variable display of the second identification information becoming the special display result is increased. Further, based on the fact that when the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed in parallel, the special display result is derived and displayed as the display result of one variable display, As a display result of the other variable display, a predetermined display result (for example, a deviating pattern) different from the specific display result and the special display result is derived and displayed. Therefore, the variable display can be forcibly ended, and the pending storage can be smoothly consumed.

Further, according to the present characteristic unit 026IW, a predetermined value can be given when controlled to a special state (for example, 10 prize balls are paid out based on winning of a game ball into a special winning opening), It is possible to give a value higher than a predetermined value when controlled to an advantageous state (for example, pay out 15 prize balls based on winning of a game ball to the special winning opening). As the specific notification, the first specific notification (for example, the right-handed indicator 26 and the right-handed notification LED 37 shown in (1) and (2) of FIG. 9-48 are lit) and the first specific notification is visually recognized. It is possible to execute the second specific notification (for example, the display of the right-handed display 026IW007 shown in FIG. 9-48(1)) having a high possibility.
Further, when controlled to the advantageous state, the first specific notification and the second specific notification are executed (see FIG. 9-48 (1)), and the variable display of the second identification information is executed, and then the special state is controlled. If so, the first specific notification is executed and the second specific notification is not executed (see FIG. 9-48(2)). Therefore, it is possible to realize the notification corresponding to the value that can be given.

Further, according to the characteristic unit 026IW, it is possible to control a plurality of types of special states (for example, small hits A to C). In addition, when the variable state of the first identification information is executed and then the special state is controlled, it is more advantageous than when the variable state of the second identification information is executed and then the special state is controlled. Control is performed in a special type of low degree (for example, small hit A). Further, when the special state is controlled after the variable display of the second identification information is performed, the specific notification is performed (see (2) and (3) in FIG. 9-48). Therefore, it is possible to realize appropriate notification in consideration of the player's advantage.

Further, according to the feature unit 026IW, it is possible to execute a variable display effect (for example, a variable display of the decorative pattern) corresponding to at least the variable display of the first identification information. In addition, it is possible to execute a variable display effect in a common mode when it is controlled to a special state and when it is not controlled to a special state (for example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and a small hit occurs. , Forcibly display non-reach outliers). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the recognizability to the player of being controlled to the special state after the variable display of the first identification information is executed. In addition, the reserved storage stored in the second reserved storage means can be smoothly consumed.

Further, according to the characteristic part 026IW, a delay unit (for example, a restriction piece provided in the variable winning ball device 6B) for delaying the movement of the game medium is provided on the upstream side of the variable unit in the specific path. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the target from being aimed at the timing at which the control to the special state is performed after the variable display of the second identification information is normally performed. Therefore, it is possible to strengthen the countermeasures against the game machine.

The delay means is not limited to the mode shown in this example. For example, on the upstream side of the variable winning ball device 6B or the special variable winning ball device 17 provided on the right side of the game area, as a delay means, a passage member for moving the game ball to meander left and right is provided. You may.

In addition, according to the characteristic part 026IW, the effect is produced based on the information from the game control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103)) and the game control means for controlling the progress of the game. The production control means (for example, CPU120 for production control) which controls is provided. Further, the game control means controls the execution of the notification by the notification means (for example, the right-handed indicator 26) for performing a predetermined notification. In addition, the production control means executes a specific notification (for example, turning on the right-handed notification LED 37) in response to the notification by the notification means. Therefore, it is possible to realize appropriate notification while reducing the processing load of the effect control means.

In this example, regardless of whether the variable display of the first special symbol is executed or the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, right-handed notification is executed during the big hit game. Although the case is shown, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, a special variable winning ball device (left big winning opening) is provided on the left side of the game area, and a special variable winning ball device (right big winning opening) is also provided on the right side of the playing area. If the variable display of the symbol is a big hit, the left big winning opening is opened during the big hit game, and if the big hit is a variable display of the second special symbol, the right big winning opening is opened during the big hit game. When applied to the gaming machine configured as described above, when the big hit in the variable display of the second special symbol, while the right hitting notification is executed during the big hit game, in the variable display of the first special symbol In the case of a big hit, the right hit notification may not be executed during the big hit game. Further, in the case of such a configuration, if the big hit in the variable display of the first special symbol, it may be configured to execute the left hitting notification during the big hit game. That is, the specific notification execution means may be configured to execute the specific notification when the variable means (in this example, the right special winning opening) is controlled to be in an advantageous state of a type in which the variable is controlled. With such a configuration, when a big hit occurs in the variable display of the first special symbol, the left hitting notification is executed during the big hitting game to prevent the player from mistakenly performing the right hitting operation. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the disadvantage of the player.

Further, in the present example, the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning port) is provided on the right side of the game area, so the case of executing the right hitting notification even during the KT state has been described. It is not limited to various forms. For example, when the second start winning port is applied to the gaming machine provided on the left side of the game area, the right-handed notification is not executed during the KT state, the high base state, or the time saving state. Good.

Further, in this example, only during the big hit game, in addition to turning on the right hit indicator 26 and the right hit notification LED 37, the right hit notification is executed by displaying the right hit display 026IW007 on the display screen of the image display device 5. However, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, even in the second KT state (during small hit RUSH), in order to execute the first variable display after the end of the big hit game, in addition to turning on the right hit indicator 26 and the right hit notification LED 37 The right-handed notification may be executed by displaying the right-handed display 026IW007 on the display screen of the image display device 5. Alternatively, in this case, for example, in the ending period at the end of the big hit game, in addition to the lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 and the right-handling notification LED 37, the right-handed display 026IW007 is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5. Alternatively, the right-handed notification may be executed.

Further, in this example, the right-handed display displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 is not limited to the mode shown in this example. For example, in addition to the right-handed display 026IW007 having a relatively large size as shown in FIG. 9-48(1), a symbol display (for example, right-facing triangle display) indicating right-handed display is displayed on the image display device 5. Thus, the right-handed notification may be executed.

Further, the method of small hit control is not limited to the mode shown in this example. For example, a plurality of special variable winning ball device is provided, and the special variable winning ball device (special winning opening) to be opened is configured to be different depending on the type of small hit, and the small display is a small hit in the variable display of the first special symbol. It may be configured such that the selection ratio of the small hit type is different depending on whether the small hit occurs in the variable display of the second special symbol. In this case, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, it is easy to select the small hit type (or the small hit type of the open mode with a low winning rate) opened by the special variable winning ball device with the small number of prize balls. When executing the variable display of the second special symbol, it is easy to select the small hit type (or the small hit type of the open mode with a high winning rate) that the special variable winning ball device with a large number of prize balls opens. You may comprise.

Further, in this example, when a small hit occurs in the variable display of the second special symbol, the right hit notification is given during the small hit game (see FIG. 9-48(2)), and the variable display of the first special symbol is displayed. In the case where a small hit occurs in, the right hit notification is not performed during the small hit game (see FIG. 9-48 (3)), but when the small hit occurs in the variable display of the second special symbol Alternatively, the right-handed notification may not be performed in some cases. For example, when a small hit occurs when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in a situation where the left hit operation should be performed in the normal state, the right hit notification is not performed during the small hit game. You may.

Further, according to the characteristic unit 026IW, when a specific display result (eg, big hit symbol) is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, it can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player (eg, big hit game state). Is. Also, when a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) different from the specific display result is displayed as a variable display result, it is possible to control to a special state different from the advantageous state (for example, a small hit game state). Is. Further, the display result of the variable display is determined by using the determination value for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, the determination value for the big hit determination, the determination value for the small hit determination). Further, it is possible to control to a non-specific state (for example, a non-probable variation state) and a specific state (for example, a probable variation state) that is easier to control to an advantageous state than the non-specific state. The judgment value includes a specific judgment value (for example, a judgment value for jackpot judgment) for deciding to display the specific display result as the display result of the variable display, and a special display result as the display result of the variable display. And a special determination value (for example, a determination value for a small hit determination) for determining to derive and display. Further, it can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different numbers of specific determination values (for example, setting values “1” to “6”). Further, the number of special determination values is common regardless of the set value, and is common when controlled to the non-specific state and controlled to the specific state (FIGS. 9-1 and 9). -2). Therefore, it is possible to realize appropriate game playability.

Specifically, if the lottery probability other than the jackpot winning probability and the type distribution change depending on the setting value, the difference in the degree of advantage (difference in payout performance) becomes too remarkable depending on the setting value, and the gambling probability may become excessively high. There is. Therefore, in the feature unit 026IW, the number of special determination values is set to be the same regardless of the set value (the small hit winning probability is set to be common), so that the difference in the degree of advantage is not excessively increased depending on the set value. However, it prevents gambling from becoming excessively high.

Further, according to the present characteristic unit 026IW, the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information can be executed in parallel (for example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol). And can be executed in parallel). Further, it is possible to control to a special state (for example, KT state) in which the frequency of the variable display of the second identification information becomes a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol). Therefore, in the gaming machine that can be controlled in the special state, it is possible to realize appropriate game playability.

Further, according to the feature unit 026IW, the special state is divided into the first special state (for example, the first KT state) and the second special state (for example, the second KT state) having a higher advantage than the first special state. It is controllable. Therefore, in the gaming machine that can be controlled in the second special state, it is possible to realize appropriate game playability.

Further, according to the feature unit 026IW, it is possible to execute the special suggestion effect corresponding to the advantage of the special state (for example, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect shown in FIG. 9-47). Therefore, by suggesting the degree of advantage of the special state, the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, according to the characteristic part 026IW, a predetermined display result (for example, deviating pattern) different from the specific display result (for example, big hit symbol) and the special display result (for example, small hit symbol) is derived as the display result of the variable display. When the displayed variable display is executed, it is possible to execute the set value suggesting effect that suggests the set value (for example, the set value suggesting effect shown in FIG. 9-46). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by executing the set value suggestion effect.

In this example, the case where the small hit RUSH continuation suggesting effect and the set value suggesting effect are executed in the variable display which is out of sync is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the small hit RUSH continuation suggestion effect and the set value suggestion effect may be executed during the big hit game or the small hit game, and various modes are possible.

Further, according to the characteristic unit 026IW, it is possible to control a plurality of types of special states (for example, small hits A to C). In addition, the type of special state is determined using a special type determination value (for example, a small hit type determination value) for determining the type of special state. Further, the number of special type determination values is common regardless of the set value (see FIG. 9-4). Therefore, more appropriate game play can be realized.

Specifically, in the feature unit 026IW, the number of special type determination values is common regardless of the set value (the small hit type is shared in common), so that the difference in the advantage degree becomes excessive depending on the set value. It prevents the player from becoming too big and gambling.

Note that, in this example, as shown in FIG. 9-4, the case where the small hit type allocation is the same regardless of whether the setting values are “1” to “6” is shown. It is not limited to various forms. For example, the determination rate of the small hit type may be changed depending on which of the set values "1" to "6", and the advantage may be varied depending on the set value.

Further, according to the characteristic part 026IW, it is possible to control to a plurality of types of advantageous states (for example, 16R certainty big hit, 9R certainty big hit, 6R certainty big hit, 6R regular big hit, 2R certainty big hit, 2R certain big hit). Further, the type of the advantageous state is determined using the advantageous type determination value (for example, the jackpot type determination value) for determining the type of the advantageous state. The number of advantageous type determination values is common regardless of the set value (see Fig. 9-3). Therefore, more appropriate game play can be realized.

Specifically, in the feature unit 026IW, the number of advantageous type determination values is common regardless of the set value (the big hit type is commonly assigned), so that the difference in the advantageous degree is excessively large depending on the set value. It prevents the gambling from becoming excessively high.

Note that, in this example, as shown in FIG. 9C, the case where the jackpot type allocation is the same regardless of which of the setting values “1” to “6” is shown. It is not limited to the mode. For example, the determination ratio of the big hit type may be changed depending on which of the set values “1” to “6”, and the advantage may be varied depending on the set value.

Further, according to the feature unit 026IW, the variable display mode is determined using the variable display mode determination value (for example, the variation pattern determination value) for determining the variable display mode. Further, the number of variable display mode determination values is common regardless of the set value (see FIG. 9-8). Therefore, more appropriate game play can be realized.

Specifically, in the feature unit 026IW, the number of variable display mode determination values is common regardless of the set value (the variation pattern is commonly distributed), so that the difference in the degree of advantage becomes excessive depending on the set value. It prevents it from becoming too big, and prevents gambling from becoming too high.

In particular, if the selection ratio of the variation pattern varies depending on the setting value, the period from one small hit control to the next small hit control will change, and even if the small hit winning probability is common, it is advantageous for elements other than the big hit lottery This is not preferable because the degree (difference in payout performance) is greatly different, but in the present feature part 026IW, by making the selection ratio of the variation pattern common regardless of the set value, such a problem does not occur. ing.

Note that, in this example, as shown in FIG. 9-8, the case where the allocation of the variation patterns is the same regardless of which of the setting values is “1” to “6” is shown. It is not limited to the mode. For example, by varying the determination rate of the variation pattern depending on which of the set values “1” to “6” and providing the difference in the variation time, the variation efficiency is changed by the setting value. It may be configured such that there is a difference in the degree of advantage depending on the value.

Further, according to the characteristic unit 026IW, when a specific display result (eg, big hit symbol) is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, it can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player (eg, big hit game state). Is. Also, when a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) different from the specific display result is displayed as a variable display result, it is possible to control to a special state different from the advantageous state (for example, a small hit game state). Is. Further, the display result of the variable display is determined by using the determination value for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, the determination value for the big hit determination, the determination value for the small hit determination). Further, the judgment value includes a specific judgment value (for example, a judgment value for jackpot judgment) for deciding to derive and display the specific display result as the display result of the variable display, and a special display result as the display result of the variable display. It is determined that the special judgment value (for example, the judgment value for the small hit judgment) for deciding to derive and display the predetermined display result different from the specific display result and the special display result as the display result of the variable display. And a predetermined determination value (for example, a determination value for determination of deviation) are included. Further, it can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different numbers of specific determination values (for example, setting values “1” to “6”). Further, the number of special determination values is common regardless of the set value (see FIGS. 9-1 and 9-2). Further, the predetermined determination value is included in the determination values corresponding to all the set values, and the number of the predetermined determination values differs depending on the set value (see FIGS. 9-1 and 9-2). Therefore, it is possible to increase the difficulty of guessing the set value and improve the interest in the game.

Further, according to the characteristic unit 026IW, it is possible to control to the non-specific state (for example, the non-probable variation state) and the specific state (for example, the probable variation state) that is easier to control to the advantageous state than the non-specific state. Further, the predetermined determination value is included in the determination values corresponding to the specific states of all the set values (see FIGS. 9-1 and 9-2). Therefore, it is possible to increase the difficulty of estimating the set value during the specific state.

Further, according to the feature unit 026IW, the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information can be executed in parallel (for example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol). Variable display can be performed in parallel). Further, the number of special determination values corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information is larger than the number of special determination values corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information, and the variable display of the second identification information in the specific state is performed. The corresponding judgment value includes a predetermined judgment value (see FIGS. 9-1 and 9-2). Therefore, it is possible to increase the difficulty of estimating the set value using the display result of the variable display of the second identification information in the specific state.

Further, according to the characteristic unit 026IW, it is possible to control to a special state (for example, KT state) in which the frequency of the variable display of the second identification information becomes the special display result. In addition, when the variable display is controlled to a special state and the predetermined display result (for example, the outlying pattern) is derived and displayed, the set value suggesting effect that suggests the set value (for example, the setting shown in FIG. 9-46 is set. Value suggestion production) can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by executing the set value suggestion effect.

Further, according to the characteristic unit 026IW, it is possible to perform variable display of the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol). Further, when a specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol) is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, it is possible to control to an advantageous state advantageous for the player (for example, a big hit gaming state). Also, when a special display result (for example, a small hit symbol) different from the specific display result is displayed as a variable display result, it is possible to control to a special state different from the advantageous state (for example, a small hit game state). Is. Further, the display result of the variable display is determined by using the determination value for determining the display result of the variable display (for example, the determination value for the big hit determination, the determination value for the small hit determination). The judgment value includes a specific judgment value (for example, a judgment value for jackpot judgment) for deciding to display the specific display result as the display result of the variable display, and a special display result as the display result of the variable display. And a special determination value (for example, a determination value for a small hit determination) for determining to derive and display. Further, it can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values having different numbers of specific determination values (for example, setting values “1” to “6”). The number of special determination values among the determination values corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information is common regardless of the set value (see FIG. 9-2), and the determination corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information is performed. The number of special determination values differs between the value and the determination value corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information (see FIGS. 9-1 and 9-2). Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the monotonousness of the game while realizing the appropriate game playability.

The characteristic part 026IW discloses a configuration for solving the following problems. That is, some gaming machines are configured to be able to output a specific signal. For example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2014-200506 describes that a big hit signal (specific signal) is output from an external output terminal during all big hit states.

However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2014-200506, whether the game machine is in the normal state or the special state, or when the predetermined condition is satisfied by the variable display of the first identification information or the second identification information. No consideration is given to whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied by the variable display. Therefore, it is necessary to be able to output the signal appropriately when the predetermined condition is satisfied by the variable display of the second identification information in the normal state.

Therefore, in the characteristic unit 026IW, in order to solve the problem that the signal can be appropriately output when the predetermined condition is satisfied by the variable display of the second identification information, the following means (1) to (5) are provided. A configuration is disclosed.

(Means 1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is capable of variably displaying the first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) and the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol). A gaming machine that can be controlled into an advantageous state advantageous for a player (for example, a big hit game state) and a special state different from the advantageous state (for example, a small hit game state), and a variable display of the first identification information. Variable display execution means capable of executing the variable display of the second identification information in parallel (for example, a portion that executes steps S110A to S113A of the first special symbol process process (step S25A) in the game control microcomputer 100, 2 Part to execute the same processing as steps S110A to S113A in the special symbol process process (step S25B), and after a predetermined condition (for example, derivation display of a big hit symbol) is established, a specific region (for example, passage gate 41) Based on that the game medium (eg, game ball) has passed, advantageous state control means capable of controlling to an advantageous state (eg, first special symbol process process (step S25A) in the game control microcomputer 100) step S115A ~ Part to execute S118A, the second special symbol process process (step S25B) part to execute the same processing as S115A ~ S118A), and special state control means that can be controlled to a special state (for example, game control micro A part for executing steps S119A to S121A of the first special symbol process process (step S25A) in the computer 100, a part for performing the same process as steps S119A to S121A in the second special symbol process process (step S25B), and usually Special state control means (eg, step 026IWS2208A, S2213A, S2214A, S2219A, S2220A, S2208B in the game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, KT state) in which a game value is more likely to be imparted than a special state. , S2213B, S2214B, S2219B, S2220B) and a specific signal output means capable of outputting a specific signal (for example, jackpot signal 1) (for example, step S23 and step 026IWS2017A, S2017B in the game control microcomputer 100). The part for executing S2503B), and the specific signal output means is such that the predetermined condition is satisfied by the variable display of the first identification information in the normal state. It is possible to output a specific signal based on the output (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-30(1), in the normal state, the external output of the jackpot signal 1 is based on the fact that the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed with the first special symbol. Start), a specific signal is not output based on the predetermined condition being satisfied by the variable display of the second identification information in the normal state (for example, in the normal state, the second signal is output in the second state in the normal state as shown in FIG. 9-30(1)). The external output of the big hit signal 1 is not started even if the big hit symbol is derived and displayed as a special symbol). With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately output the signal when the predetermined condition is satisfied by the variable display of the second identification information.

(Means 2) In the means 1, the specific signal is a signal capable of specifying the control to the advantageous state (for example, the big hit signal 1), and the specific signal output means is predetermined by the variable display of the second identification information in the normal state. When the conditions are met, it is possible to output a specific signal based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the specific area (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-30(1), in the normal state, the second special symbol is used). When the big hit symbol is derived and displayed, the external output of the big hit signal 1 is started based on the passage of the game ball through the passage gate 41). According to such a configuration, it can be specified that the game machine is controlled in an advantageous state outside the gaming machine.

(Means 3) Special signal output means (for example, step S23 and step in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of outputting special signals (for example, jackpot signal 2) corresponding to the special state and the advantageous state in means 1 or 2 026IWS2017A, S2503B) and the special signal output means can output the special signal using an output terminal different from the specific signal (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-29, the jackpot signal 1 is Externally output from the output terminal of the terminal number "05", and the jackpot signal 2 is externally output from the output terminal of the terminal number "06"), and start outputting the special signal at the same timing as the output start timing of the specific signal. (For example, as shown in FIG. 9-30, in a normal state, similarly to the big hit signal 1, the external output of the big hit signal 2 is started based on the fact that the big hit symbol is derived and displayed with the first special symbol, When the big hit symbol is derived and displayed as a special symbol, the external output of the big hit signal 2 may be started based on the passage of the game ball of the passage gate 41). With such a configuration, the special signal can be output appropriately.

(Means 4) In any one of the means 1 to 3, a first area (for example, a special winning opening) in which the game medium can enter in the advantageous state and a second area in which the game medium can enter in the special state ( For example, a special winning opening) and a special signal output means (for example, in the game controlling microcomputer 100) capable of outputting a special signal (for example, a special winning opening winning signal) corresponding to the entry of the game medium into the second area. The portion for executing step S23), and the special signal output means can output the special signal by using an output terminal different from the specific signal (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-29, the jackpot signal 1 is It may be configured such that the output terminal with the terminal number "05" outputs externally and the special winning opening winning signal is output externally from the output terminal with the terminal number "07"). With such a configuration, it is possible to externally monitor the state of entry of the game medium into the second area.

(Means 5) In any one of the means 1 to 4, the specific signal output means is predetermined by the variable display of the first identification information when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and by the variable display of the second identification information in the special state. When the condition is satisfied, it is possible to output the specific signal regardless of whether or not the game medium has passed through the specific region (for example, as shown in (1) and (2) of FIG. When the big hit symbol is derived and displayed as a special symbol, external output of the big hit signal 1 is started at the timing when the big hit symbol is derived and displayed, and as shown in FIG. 9-30(2), in the KT state, When the big hit symbol is derived and displayed with the two special symbols, the jackpot signal 1 is externally output at the timing when the big hit symbol is derived and displayed). According to such a configuration, it is possible to output a signal corresponding to the state during the game.

Note that the configuration shown by the characteristic unit 026IW can be appropriately combined with the configuration shown by the characteristic unit 21TM to form a gaming machine. For example, the configuration for changing the set value indicated by the characteristic portion 21TM is applied to the characteristic portion 026IW so that the setting value suggesting effect can be executed or the small hit RUSH continuous suggesting effect can be executed. The right-handed notification may be configured to be executable.

[Explanation on Characteristic Part 06TM]
Next, the characteristic part 06TM will be described. In the present embodiment, as shown in the above [description regarding the characteristic unit 026IW], the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be simultaneously executed in parallel.

(Relationship between game state and production design and production mode)
First, each game state (low-probability/non-KT state, low-probability/first KT state, high-probability/first KT state, and high-probability/second KT state) and each production design (decorative design, first small design, And the second small symbol) and each effect mode (normal mode, time saving mode, probability variation mode, and small hit RUSH mode) will be described in detail. In this embodiment, the symbols displayed on the upper right and upper left portions of the image display device 5 are smaller than the decorative symbols, and whether or not the special symbols are variably displayed and the display result of the special symbols. Is called a small design. The variable display of the small symbols can be executed in parallel with the variable display of the special symbols, and the stop display of the small symbols can also be executed in parallel with the stop display of the special symbols. Then, from the left, the first small symbol display area 5l1, the first small symbol display area 5c1, from the left of the screen upper left area of the image display device 5 in which the first small symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is variably displayed and stopped. And the first small symbol display area 5r1, and the second small symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed in a variable display and stopped, the area on the upper right part of the screen of the image display device 5 is the second small symbol display area 5l2 from the left, The second small symbol display area 5c2 and the second small symbol display area 5r2.

The first small symbol display areas 511, 5c1, 5r1 and the second small symbol display areas 512, 5c2, 5r2 are all smaller in display area than the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. Therefore, the visibility of the first small design is lower than that of the decorative design, and the visibility of the second small design is lower than that of the decorative design.

FIGS. 10-1 (1) to (4) are explanatory views showing specific examples of decorative symbols and small symbols corresponding to the game state. In the present embodiment, variable display of decorative symbols is executed in the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R. Here, there is a case where the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol, and a case where the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol. The variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol of the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol is different depending on the game state. In the following description, of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the special symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol is referred to as a main symbol, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol do not correspond to the decorative symbol. Special designs are called sub-designs.

That is, the state where the main symbol is the first special symbol and the sub symbol is the second special symbol is that in the first small symbol display area 5l1, the first small symbol display area 5c1, and the first small symbol display area 5r1. The variable display of the first small symbol is executed corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol, and the variable display of the first special symbol is performed in the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R. Correspondingly, the variable display of the decorative symbols is executed, and in the second small symbol display area 512, the second small symbol display area 5c2, and the second small symbol display area 5r2, the second special symbol corresponding to the variable display is displayed. This is a state in which variable display of two small symbols is executed.

On the other hand, the state where the main symbol is the second special symbol and the sub symbol is the first special symbol is that in the second small symbol display area 512, the second small symbol display area 5c2, and the second small symbol display area 5r2. The variable display of the second small symbol is executed corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol, and the variable display of the second special symbol is performed in the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R. Correspondingly, the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed, and the first small symbol display area 5l1, the first small symbol display area 5c1, and the first small symbol display area 5r1 correspond to the variable display of the first special symbol. This is a state in which variable display of one small symbol is executed.

As the gaming state in the present embodiment, as described above, "low certainty/non-KT state" (sometimes referred to as normal state) corresponding to the low certainty low base state and "low low corresponding to the low certainty high base state". “Probability/first KT state”, “High precision/first KT state” corresponding to high precision high base state, and “High precision/second KT state” corresponding to high precision low base state. And, when the game state is controlled to (i) low probability/non-KT state (normal state), the main symbol is the first special symbol and the sub symbol is the second special symbol. On the other hand, when the game state is controlled to (ii) low accuracy/first KT state, (iii) high accuracy/first KT state, (iv) high accuracy/second KT state is controlled. In either case, the main symbol is the second special symbol, and the sub symbol is the first special symbol.

That is, in the case of (i), the decorative symbol and the first small symbol are information corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol, and the second small symbol is the information corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol. However, in the case of (ii) to (iv), the decorative symbol and the second small symbol are information corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol, and the first small symbol is the first special symbol. The information corresponds to the variable display. In the following description, "special figure 1" in the figure indicates the first special symbol, and "special figure 2" in the figure indicates the second special symbol.

10-1 (1), the game state is a low probability / non-KT state (normal state), the main symbol is the first special symbol, the sub symbol is the second special symbol when the image display device 5 It is a figure which shows the example of the image displayed on. Further, FIG. 10-1 (2), the game state is a low probability / first KT state, the main symbol is the second special symbol, the sub symbol is displayed on the image display device 5 when the first special symbol It is a figure which shows the example of the image made. Further, FIG. 10-1 (3), the game state is a high-precision / first KT state, the main symbol is the second special symbol, the sub-symbol is displayed on the image display device 5 when the first special symbol It is a figure which shows the example of the image made. Further, FIG. 10-1 (4), the game state is a high-precision / second KT state, the main symbol is the second special symbol, the sub symbol is displayed on the image display device 5 when the first special symbol It is a figure which shows the example of the image made.

As shown in FIGS. 10-1 (1) to (4), the first hold for displaying the first hold storage number (0 to 4 first hold display 06TM010) in the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5. A display area 06TM011 is provided, and a second hold display area 06TM021 for displaying the second hold storage number (0 to 4 second hold displays 06TM020) is provided in the lower right part of the screen of the image display device 5. There is. Further, in the lower center part of the screen of the image display device 5, active display which is information corresponding to the variable display of the decorative symbol being executed and also information corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol as the main symbol being executed. An active display area 06TM031 for displaying 06TM030 is provided.

Further, a first reserved storage number special display area 06TM015 for displaying the first reserved storage number is provided in the left part of the screen of the image display device 5 (upper part of the first reserved display region 06TM011). A second reserved storage number special display area 06TM025 for displaying the second reserved storage number is provided in the right part of the screen (the upper part of the second reserved display area 06TM021). Then, as described above, in the upper left portion of the screen of the image display device 5, the first small symbol display area 5l1, the first small symbol display area 5c1, which displays the first small symbol corresponding to the first special symbol, and A first small symbol display area 5r1 is provided, and in the upper right part of the screen of the image display device 5, a second small symbol display area 512 for displaying a second small symbol corresponding to the second special symbol, a second small symbol. A display area 5c2 and a second small symbol display area 5r2 are provided.

Here, a number of objects (circular images) corresponding to the first number of pending storages are displayed in the first pending display area 06TM011, and a number of second pending storages is displayed in the second pending display area 06TM021. A number of objects (circular images) are displayed. On the other hand, the first reserved storage number special display area 06TM015 displays the first reserved storage number numerically, and the second reserved storage number special display area 06TM025 displays the second reserved storage number numerically. It The display range of the object in the first reserved display area 06TM011 is wider than the display range of the numerical value in the first reserved storage number special display area 06TM015, and the first reserved display area 06TM011 has the first reserved memory number It is displayed with higher visibility than the memory number special display area 06TM015. In addition, the display range of the object in the second reserved display area 06TM021 is wider than the display range of the numerical value in the second reserved storage number special display area 06TM025, and the second reserved display area 06TM021 has the second reserved memory number 2 Reserved storage number special display area 06TM025 will be displayed with higher visibility.

In the first hold display area 06TM011, when the main symbol is the first special symbol and the sub symbol is the second special symbol (that is, the game state is (i) low probability/non-KT state (normal state) ))), the number of objects corresponding to the first reserved storage number is displayed, but when the main symbol is the second special symbol and the sub symbol is the first special symbol (that is, the game state is (Ii) low accuracy/first KT state, (iii) high accuracy/first KT state, and (iv) high accuracy/second KT state), the object itself is not displayed. There is. Thus, in the first hold display area 06TM011, objects corresponding to the first hold storage number are displayed according to the game state. On the other hand, in the first reserved storage number special display area 06TM015, the first reserved storage number is displayed regardless of the gaming state (when the gaming state is any of (ii) to (iv)). Therefore, the player confirms the first reserved storage number special display area 06TM015 even in the game state (any of (ii) to (iv)) in which the object is not displayed in the first reserved display area 06TM011, It is possible to grasp the first number of reserved memories.

Further, in the second hold display area 06TM021, when the main symbol is the second special symbol and the sub symbol is the first special symbol (that is, the gaming state is (ii) low probability/first KT state, (iii) ) High accuracy/first KT state, and (iv) high accuracy/second KT state, when any of the states), the number of objects corresponding to the second reserved storage number is displayed, the main symbol is the first When the special symbol is the 1 special symbol and the sub symbol is the second special symbol (that is, when the gaming state is (i) low certainty/non-KT state (normal state)), the object itself is not displayed. There is. Thus, in the second hold display area 06TM021, objects corresponding to the second hold storage number are displayed according to the game state. On the other hand, in the second reserved storage number special display area 06TM025, the second reserved storage number is displayed regardless of the gaming state (even when the gaming state is (i)). Therefore, even in the game state (i) in which the object is not displayed in the second holding display area 06TM021, the player can confirm the second holding storage number by checking the second holding storage number special display area 06TM025. You can

Further, in the active display area 06TM031, regardless of the game state, the object corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol which is the main symbol among the first special symbol and the second special symbol is displayed, and becomes a sub symbol. The object corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol is not displayed.

The example shown in FIG. 10-1(1) shows the screen of the image display device 5 when the game state is controlled to the low certainty/non-KT state. When the game state is controlled to the low accuracy/non-KT state, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect mode to the normal mode. When the rendering mode is the normal mode, a "sunny image" representing a sunny landscape including the sun and mountains is displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern.

In the present example, when the first number of reserved storages is 4 and the number of second reserved storages is 2, the variable display of the first special symbol which is the main symbol and the second symbol which is the sub symbol The variable display of special symbols is executed concurrently in parallel. In addition, the first reserved storage number special display area 06TM015 displays "4", the second reserved storage number special display area 06TM025 displays "2", and the first reserved display area 06TM011 displays four first storage areas. The hold display 06TM010 is displayed. Further, in the active display area 06TM031, the active display 06TM030 corresponding to the variable display of the decorative symbol (variable display of the first special symbol which is the main symbol) is displayed. Further, in the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R, the variable display of the decorative symbol (information corresponding to the first special symbol which is the main symbol) is executed, and the first small symbol display area. 5l1, the first small symbol display area 5c1, and, in the first small symbol display area 5r1, the variable display of the first small symbol (information corresponding to the first special symbol) is executed, and the second small symbol display area 5l2. In the second small symbol display area 5c2 and the second small symbol display area 5r2, the variable display of the second small symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol which is the sub symbol) is executed.

The example shown in FIG. 10-1(2) shows the screen of the image display device 5 when the gaming state is controlled to the low certainty/first KT state. When the game state is controlled to the low accuracy/first KT state, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect mode to the time saving mode. When the effect mode is the time saving mode, a “cloudy image” representing a cloudy landscape including clouds is displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern.

In this example, when the first number of reserved storages is 2 and the number of second reserved storages is 4, the variable display of the first special symbol which is the sub symbol and the second which is the main symbol The variable display of special symbols is executed concurrently in parallel. Also, "2" is displayed in the first reserved storage number special display area 06TM015, "4" is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 06TM025, and four second sections are displayed in the second reserved display area 06TM021. The hold display 06TM020 is displayed. Further, in the active display area 06TM031, an active display 06TM030 corresponding to the variable display of the decorative symbol (variable display of the second special symbol which is the main symbol) is displayed. Further, in the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R, the variable display of the decorative symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol which is the main symbol) is executed, and the first small symbol display area. 5l1, the first small symbol display area 5c1, and, in the first small symbol display area 5r1, the variable display of the first small symbol (information corresponding to the first special symbol which is a sub symbol) is executed, and the second small symbol The variable display of the second small symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol) is executed in the symbol display area 51, the second small symbol display area 5c2, and the second small symbol display area 5r2.

The example shown in FIG. 10-1 (3) shows the screen of the image display device 5 when the game state is controlled to the high-accuracy/first KT state. When the game state is controlled to the high-accuracy/first KT state, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect mode to the probability variation mode. When the effect mode is the probability variation mode, a "rain image" representing a rainy landscape including clouds and rain is displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern.

In this example, when the first number of reserved storages is 2 and the number of second reserved storages is 4, the variable display of the first special symbol which is the sub symbol and the second which is the main symbol The variable display of special symbols is executed concurrently in parallel. Also, "2" is displayed in the first reserved storage number special display area 06TM015, "4" is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 06TM025, and four second sections are displayed in the second reserved display area 06TM021. The hold display 06TM020 is displayed. Further, in the active display area 06TM031, an active display 06TM030 corresponding to the variable display of the decorative symbol (variable display of the second special symbol which is the main symbol) is displayed. Further, in the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R, the variable display of the decorative symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol which is the main symbol) is executed, and the first small symbol display area. 5l1, the first small symbol display area 5c1, and, in the first small symbol display area 5r1, the variable display of the first small symbol (information corresponding to the first special symbol which is a sub symbol) is executed, and the second small symbol The variable display of the second small symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol) is executed in the symbol display area 51, the second small symbol display area 5c2, and the second small symbol display area 5r2.

The example shown in FIG. 10-1(4) shows the screen of the image display device 5 when the gaming state is controlled to the high-accuracy/second KT state. When the gaming state is controlled to the high-accuracy/second KT state, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect mode to the small hit RUSH mode. When the effect mode is the small hit RUSH mode, a “typhoon image” representing a landscape of a typhoon including clouds, wind, and rain is displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern.

In this example, when the first number of reserved storages is 2 and the number of second reserved storages is 4, the variable display of the first special symbol which is the sub symbol and the second which is the main symbol The variable display of special symbols is executed concurrently in parallel. Also, "2" is displayed in the first reserved storage number special display area 06TM015, "4" is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 06TM025, and four second sections are displayed in the second reserved display area 06TM021. The hold display 06TM020 is displayed. Further, in the active display area 06TM031, an active display 06TM030 corresponding to the variable display of the decorative symbol (variable display of the second special symbol which is the main symbol) is displayed. Further, in the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R, the variable display of the decorative symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol which is the main symbol) is executed, and the first small symbol display area. 5l1, the first small symbol display area 5c1, and, in the first small symbol display area 5r1, the variable display of the first small symbol (information corresponding to the first special symbol which is a sub symbol) is executed, and the second small symbol The variable display of the second small symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol) is executed in the symbol display area 51, the second small symbol display area 5c2, and the second small symbol display area 5r2.

Here, as shown in FIG. 10-1 (1), when the game state is (i) low probability/non-KT state (normal mode), the second special symbol is a sub symbol, but the second small symbol display The second small symbol is variably displayed or stopped (fixed stop) in the areas 51, 5c2, 5r2, so that the player variably displays or stops the second special symbol that does not correspond to the decorative symbol. It is possible to understand that it is being displayed (fixed stop). Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-1 (2) to (4), the game state is (ii) low-accuracy/first KT state, (iii) high-accuracy/first KT state, and (iv) high-accuracy/second KT. State, when in any of the state, the first special symbol is a sub symbol, the first small symbol display area 511, 5c1, 5r1 is variably displayed or stop display (decision stop) As a result, the player can recognize that the first special symbol that does not correspond to the decorative symbol is variably displayed or is stopped and displayed (fixed stop). As described above, the visibility of the small symbol is lower than the visibility of the decorative symbol, but the player can confirm the variation of the special symbol, which is the sub symbol, depending on the variation of the small symbol.

Further, in the present embodiment, the background image displayed on the image display device 5 is changed according to the game state. When the gaming state is controlled to the low-accuracy/non-1KT state (normal state), as shown in FIG. 10-1 (1), the production control CPU 120 sends the background designation command (to the normal state) transmitted from the CPU 103. The effect mode is controlled to the normal mode by setting the background image displayed on the image display device 5 to the clear image based on the corresponding command (designating to display the background image). Further, when the game state is controlled to the low accuracy/first KT state, as shown in FIG. 10-1(2), the effect control CPU 120 causes the background designation command (low accuracy/first KT) transmitted from the CPU 103. The effect mode is controlled to the time saving mode by setting the background image displayed on the image display device 5 to the cloudy image based on a command for designating display of the background image corresponding to the state. Further, when the gaming state is controlled to the high-accuracy/first KT state, as shown in FIG. 10-1(3), the effect control CPU 120 transmits the background designation command (high-accuracy/first KT) transmitted from the CPU 103. By setting the background image displayed on the image display device 5 as the rain image based on a command for designating the background image corresponding to the state), the effect mode is controlled to the probability change mode. Further, when the game state is controlled to the high-precision/second KT state, as shown in FIG. 10-1(4), the effect control CPU 120 transmits the background designation command (high-precision/second KT) transmitted from the CPU 103. The effect mode is controlled to the small hit RUSH mode by setting the background image displayed on the image display device 5 to the typhoon image based on a command for designating the background image corresponding to the state).

(Game flow)
FIG. 10-2 is an explanatory diagram showing the game flow of the present embodiment. As described above, in the present embodiment, a plurality of effect modes corresponding to the game state are provided, and the effect control CPU 120 can control the effect mode corresponding to the current game state among the plurality of effect modes. Is.

The gaming state is controlled to the low-probability/non-KT state, and the variation display is started when the effect mode is controlled to the normal mode, and the display result of the variation display is "16R certainty variation big hit", "6R certainty variation big hit". , And "6R normal big hit", it is controlled to a big hit game state. When the result of the fluctuation display is "16R probability variable big hit", after the big hit game state ends, the game state is controlled to the high-precision/second KT state, and the effect mode is controlled to the small hit RUSH mode. .. If the result of the variable display is "6R probability variation big hit", the gaming state is controlled to the high-accuracy/first KT state after the jackpot gaming state ends, and the effect mode is controlled to the probability variation mode. .. In addition, when the result of the variable display is "6R normal big hit", after the big hit game state ends, the game state is controlled to the low accuracy/first KT state, and the effect mode is controlled to the time saving mode. .. Therefore, when a big hit occurs in the normal state, the player pays particular attention to which kind of big hit.

When the gaming state is controlled to the high-accuracy/second KT state, the variation display is started when the effect mode is controlled to the small hit RUSH mode, and the display result of the variable display is "small hit" In the small hit game state is controlled. Then, after the small hitting game state ends, the gaming state is controlled to the high accuracy/second KT state, and the effect mode is controlled to the small hitting RUSH mode. That is, the small hit RUSH mode continues. Further, when the gaming state is controlled to the high-accuracy/second KT state and the effect mode is controlled to the small hit RUSH mode, the variable display is started, and the display result of the variable display is “16R probability variable big hit” and If any of the "2R probability variation big hit", it is controlled to a big hit game state. Then, after the big hit game state ends, the game state is controlled to the high accuracy/second KT state, and the effect mode is controlled to the small hit RUSH mode. That is, the small hit RUSH mode continues.

When the gaming state is controlled to the high-accuracy/second KT state and the effect mode is controlled to the small hit RUSH mode, the variable display is started, and the display result of the variable display is "9R probability variable big hit". In this case, the big hit game state is controlled. Then, after the jackpot gaming state ends, the gaming state is controlled to the high-accuracy/first KT state, and the effect mode is controlled to the probability variation mode. Further, when the gaming state is controlled to the high-accuracy/second KT state and the effect mode is controlled to the small hit RUSH mode, the variable display is started and the display result of the variable display is "2R normal big hit". When it becomes, it is controlled to a big hit game state. Then, after the jackpot gaming state is over, the gaming state is controlled to the low accuracy/first KT state, and the effect mode is controlled to the time saving mode.

The gaming state is controlled to the high-accuracy/first KT state, and the variation display is started when the effect mode is controlled to the probability variation mode, and the display result of the variation display is "16R probability variation big hit" and "2R probability variation big hit". If any of the above, it is controlled to a big hit game state. Then, after the big hit game state ends, the game state is controlled to the high accuracy/second KT state, and the effect mode is controlled to the small hit RUSH mode. Also, when the gaming state is controlled to the high-accuracy/first KT state and the effect mode is controlled to the probability variation mode, the variation display is started, and the variation display result is "9R probability variation big hit". In this case, the big hit game state is controlled. Then, after the jackpot gaming state ends, the gaming state is controlled to the high-accuracy/first KT state, and the effect mode is controlled to the probability variation mode. That is, the probability variation mode continues.

When the gaming state is controlled to the high-accuracy/first KT state, the variation display is started when the effect mode is controlled to the probability variation mode, and the variation display result is "2R normal big hit". Is controlled to a jackpot gaming state. Then, after the jackpot gaming state is over, the gaming state is controlled to the low accuracy/first KT state, and the effect mode is controlled to the time saving mode.

The gaming state is controlled to the low probability/first KT state, and the variation display is started when the production mode is controlled to the time saving mode, and the display result of the variation display is “16R probability variation big hit” and “2R probability variation big hit”. If any of the above, it is controlled to a big hit game state. Then, after the big hit game state ends, the game state is controlled to the high accuracy/second KT state, and the effect mode is controlled to the small hit RUSH mode. Also, when the gaming state is controlled to the low-accuracy/first KT state and the effect mode is controlled to the time saving mode, the variable display is started, and the display result of the variable display is "9R probability variable big hit". In this case, the big hit game state is controlled. Then, after the jackpot gaming state ends, the gaming state is controlled to the high-accuracy/first KT state, and the effect mode is controlled to the probability variation mode.

When the gaming state is controlled to the low-accuracy/first KT state, the variation display is started when the effect mode is controlled to the time saving mode, and the variation display result is "2R normal big hit". Is controlled to a jackpot gaming state. Then, after the jackpot gaming state is over, the gaming state is controlled to the low accuracy/first KT state, and the effect mode is controlled to the time saving mode.

If the big hit does not occur until the variable state is controlled a predetermined number of times (50 times in this example) after the game state is controlled to the low accuracy/first KT state and the effect mode is controlled to the time saving mode , The game state shifts from the low-accuracy/first KT state to the low-probability/non-KT state (normal state), and the effect mode shifts from the time saving mode to the normal mode. That is, after the gaming state is controlled to the low-accuracy/first KT state (from the production mode being controlled to the time saving mode), the variation display of the special symbol for a predetermined number of times (50 times) is completed, the variation of the special symbol When the display result does not become any of the display results of "16R probability variation big hit", "2R probability variation big hit", "9R probability variation big hit", and "2R normal variation big hit", fluctuation of the predetermined number of times (50th) After the display ends, the game state falls from the low-accuracy/first KT state to the low-probability/non-KT state (normal state), and the effect mode falls from the time saving mode to the normal mode.

Here, as shown in FIG. 9-4 and the like, not only when the game state is controlled to (iv) high-accuracy/second KT state (production mode: small hit RUSH mode), i) When controlled to low accuracy/non-KT state (production mode: normal mode), (ii) When controlled to low accuracy/first KT state (production mode: time saving mode), (iii) High accuracy / Even when controlled in the first KT state (production mode: probability variation mode), a small hit occurs, and the small hit game state can be controlled.

However, in the present embodiment, in the non-KT state, the variation time of the second variation pattern in which the display result is “out” and the variation time of the second variation pattern in which the display result is “small hit” are set to 15 minutes. Since it is done (see FIG. 9-6(C)), it is practically difficult to make the variable winning ball device 6B win the game ball. In addition, as described above, in the first KT state, the variable baseball apparatus 6B is controlled to be in the high base state so that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is extended (see FIGS. 9-9 to 9-11). Even if a small hit occurs, the number of game balls winning the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side is extremely small (for example, about 1 ball per 100 fluctuations). That is, (i) low accuracy/non-KT state (production mode: normal mode), (ii) low accuracy/first KT state (production mode: time saving mode), (iii) high accuracy/first KT state (production mode: probability change) In the mode), even if a small hit occurs, the frequency of game balls winning the special variable winning ball device 17 is low.

Therefore, in the gaming state of these (i) to (iii), the special symbol that is the main symbol (the first special symbol in the case of (i), the second special symbol in the case of (ii) or (iii)) When the display result of is a small hit pattern, the combination "135" of the decorative pattern indicating that a small hit has occurred correspondingly to this is displayed as a stop (fixed stop), but the player The special variable winning ball device 17 is displayed without prompting to display the game ball on the special variable winning ball device 17 (display of the characters "Small hit!!" at the top of the screen), and the game ball is won on the special variable winning ball device 17. I try not to have too much expectations.

On the other hand, in the (iv) high-accuracy/second KT state (rendering mode: small hit RUSH mode), the variable baseball device 6B is controlled so as to have a shorter opening time (FIG. 9). -9 to FIG. 9-11), when a small hit occurs, the game ball often wins the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side. Therefore, in the game state of (iv), if the display result of the second special symbol, which is the main symbol, is a small hit symbol, it is suggested that a small hit has occurred in the image display device 5 correspondingly. The combination “135” of the decorative patterns to be displayed is stopped and displayed (determined stop), and a display is displayed to urge the player to win the game ball to the special variable winning ball device 17 (“small hit!” at the top of the screen). Characters are displayed) so that the game ball has an expectation of winning in the special variable winning ball device 17.

Thus, (i) low accuracy/non-KT state (production mode: normal mode), (ii) low accuracy/first KT state (production mode: time saving mode), (iii) high accuracy/first KT state (production mode) : Probability variation mode), a small hit has occurred (the result of displaying the special symbol that is the main symbol has become a small hit symbol). The decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner that is difficult for the player to recognize (fixed stop). ), (iv) in the high-accuracy/second KT state (production mode: small hit RUSH mode), a small hit has occurred (the display result of the special symbol which is the main symbol is the small hit symbol) The decoration pattern is stopped and displayed (determined stop) in a manner that the player can easily recognize that (now).

As described above, in the first KT state among the KT states, although a small hit is likely to occur and the special variable winning ball device 17 is easily opened, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B on the upstream side is extremely long and the small hit. Even if occurs, there are very few cases where the game balls are won in the special variable winning ball device 17 on the downstream side (for example, about 1 ball for every 100 changes). That is, in the first KT state, the state in which a small hit is likely to occur and the high base state are controlled so that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is extended. As will be described later, the second KT state in the KT state has a short opening time of the upstream side variable winning ball device 6B, and when a small hit occurs, the game ball is transferred to the downstream special variable winning ball device 17. Easy to win. That is, in the second KT state, the state in which a small hit is likely to occur and the low base state are controlled so that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is shortened.

Also, the KT state is a gaming state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state (low probability/non-KT state). Specifically, the probability that the variable winning ball device 6B will be in the open state in the case of a normal figure is higher in the KT state than in the normal state. Then, as shown in FIGS. 9-1 and 9-2, the percentage determined as a small hit when the first special symbol is changed is low, whereas the small hit is determined when the second special symbol is changed. Since the ratio is configured to be high (however, except for the case of forced disengagement described above), the KT state is a gaming state in which a small hit is more likely than in the normal state. As a result, in the KT state, a small hit is frequently generated by mainly changing the second special symbol, which is a game state advantageous to the player. According to such a configuration, in the gaming machine that can be controlled in the KT state, a gaming state different from the jackpot gaming state can be realized as a gaming state advantageous to the player.

(Special symbol normal processing)
Next, with reference to FIG. 10-3, the first special symbol normal process in the present embodiment will be specifically described. FIG. 10-3 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol normal process (step S110A) in the first special symbol process process. The state where the first special symbol normal process is executed is a case where the value of the first special symbol process flag is the value indicating step S110A. In addition, when the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S110A, it is in a state in which the variable display of the first special symbol is not performed in the first special symbol display device 4A, and, This is the case where neither the first big hit game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined number of times) nor the first small hit game (the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened) is being played.

In the first special symbol normal processing, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103), first, the value of the second special symbol process flag, the second jackpot opening preprocessing (5), the second jackpot opening Medium processing (6), second big hit opening post-processing (7), second big hit end processing (8), second small hit opening pre-processing (9), second small hit opening middle processing (10), Then, it is confirmed whether or not the value corresponds to any one of the second small hitting end process (11) (step S06TM1000A). The value of the second special symbol process flag is the second big hit opening pretreatment (5), the second big hit opening processing (6), the second big hit opening postprocessing (7), and the second big hit end processing (8), If the value corresponds to any one of the second small hit opening pre-processing (9), the second small hit opening processing (10), and the second small hit end processing (11), If YES in step S06TM1000A), the process ends.

On the other hand, the value of the second special symbol process flag is the second big hit opening pretreatment (5), the second big hit opening processing (6), the second big hit opening postprocessing (7), and the second big hit end processing (8). ), and the second small hitting opening pre-processing (9), the second small hitting opening processing (10), and the second small hitting end processing (11). In this case (NO in step S06TM1000A), the same processing as the processing after step 026IWS51A shown in FIG. 9-14 is executed.

In the process of step 026IWS52A described above, the CPU 103 transmits only the first customer waiting demonstration display designation command to the effect control CPU 120, but not limited to this, in the process of step 026IWS52A, the CPU 103 controls the effect control. The CPU 120 for use, the first customer waiting demonstration display designation command, and the production control command for designating the background display corresponding to the current gaming state (low accuracy/non-KT background specification command, high accuracy/second KT background specification command, high Either a positive/first KT background designating command or a low probability/first KT background designating command) may be transmitted.

Thus, the CPU 103, in step S06TM1000A, based on the variable display result of the second special symbol, it is confirmed whether or not it is a period of being controlled to the big hit game state or the small hit game state, and the second special If the period is being controlled to a big hit game state or a small hit game state based on the variable display result of the symbol (YES), the value of the first special symbol process flag, a value indicating the first special symbol normal processing By not updating the value (1) indicating the first variation pattern setting process from (0), the variation display of the first special symbol is not started.

If the variable display of the first special symbol is started during the period when it is controlled to the big hit game state or the small hit game state based on the variable display result of the second special symbol, the first special symbol is started. When the variation display result of "is a big hit" or "a small hit" becomes a problem, the game control becomes complicated. As in the present embodiment, during the period of being controlled to the big hit game state or the small hit game state based on the variable display result of the second special symbol, by not starting the variable display of the first special symbol, The game state is controlled appropriately. Also, based on the variable display result of the second special symbol, when it is controlled to a state advantageous to the player (big hit game state, small hit game state), by not starting the variable display of the first special symbol, the game The player is concentrated on the game in the advantageous state.

Further, the second special symbol normal processing in the present embodiment will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 10-4. FIG. 10-4 is a flowchart showing a second special symbol normal process in the second special symbol process process. The state in which the second special symbol normal processing is executed is a case where the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating the second special symbol normal processing. In addition, when the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating the second special symbol normal processing, it is a state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is not made in the second special symbol display device 4B. And, it is a case where neither the second big hit game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined number of times) nor the second small hit game (the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened).

In the second special symbol normal processing, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103), first, the value of the first special symbol process flag, the first jackpot opening preprocessing (5), the first jackpot opening Medium processing (6), first big hit opening post-processing (7), first big hit end processing (8), first small hit opening pre-processing (9), first small hit opening middle processing (10), And it is confirmed whether or not the value corresponds to any one of the first small hitting end process (11) (step S06TM1000B). The value of the first special symbol process flag, the first big hit opening pretreatment (5), the first big hit opening processing (6), the first big hit opening post-processing (7), and the first big hit end processing (8), If the value corresponds to any one of the first small hit opening pre-processing (9), the first small hit opening processing (10), and the first small hit end processing (11), If YES at step S06TM1000B), the process ends.

On the other hand, the value of the first special symbol process flag, the first big hit opening pre-processing (5), the first big hit opening processing (6), the first big hit opening post-processing (7), and the first big hit end processing (8) ), the first small hitting opening pre-processing (9), the first small hitting opening processing (10), and the first small hitting end processing (11). In this case (NO in step S06TM1000B), the same process as the process after step 026IWS51B shown in FIG. 9-22 is executed.

In the process of step 026IWS52B described above, the CPU 103 transmits only the second customer waiting demonstration display designation command to the effect control CPU 120, but not limited to this, in the process of step 026IWS52B, the CPU 103 controls the effect control. The second customer waiting demonstration display designation command, and the production control command (low precision/non-KT background designation command, high precision/second KT background designation command, high) for designating the background display corresponding to the current game state to the CPU 120 for use. Either a positive/first KT background designating command or a low probability/first KT background designating command) may be transmitted.

In this way, the CPU 103, in step S06TM1000B, based on the variable display result of the first special symbol, it is confirmed whether or not it is a period of being controlled to the big hit game state or the small hit game state, and the first special If the period is being controlled to the big hit game state or small hit game state based on the variable display result of the symbol (YES), the value of the second special symbol process flag, the value showing the second special symbol normal processing By not updating from (0) to the value (1) indicating the second variation pattern setting process, variation display of the second special symbol is not started.

If the variable display of the second special symbol is started during the period when it is controlled to the big hit game state or the small hit game state based on the variable display result of the first special symbol, the started second special symbol. When the variation display result of "is a big hit" or "a small hit" becomes a problem, the game control becomes complicated. As in the present embodiment, during the period of being controlled to the big hit game state or the small hit game state based on the variable display result of the first special symbol, by not starting the variable display of the second special symbol, The game state is controlled appropriately. In addition, based on the variation display result of the first special symbol, when it is controlled in a state advantageous to the player (big hit game state, small hit game state), by not starting the variable display of the second special symbol, the game The player is concentrated on the game in the advantageous state.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-3, if the first reserved memory number is 0 in the first special symbol normal process (YES in step 026IWS51A), the first customer waiting demonstration display designation command is for production control. The data is transmitted to the CPU 120 (step 026IWS52A). Further, as shown in FIG. 10-4, if the second reserved storage number is 0 in the second special symbol normal processing (YES in step 026IWS51B), the second customer waiting demo display designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120. (Step 026IWS52B).

Here, as shown in FIGS. 9-38 and 9-39, the production control CPU 120 receives the first customer waiting demo display designation command, and the game state is (i) low probability/non-KT state (normal). State) is controlled, the variable display of the first special symbol is not started (the number of the first pending storage is 0), the jackpot gaming state based on the variable display result of the second special symbol is not started. At this time, when the first demo standby timer times out, the image display device 5 starts the first demo display described later. On the other hand, when the game state is not controlled to (i) low-accuracy/non-KT state (normal state) ((ii) low-accuracy/first KT state, (iii) high-accuracy/first KT state, and (iv) The first demo display is not started when the first customer waiting demo display designation command is received (while being controlled to either the high-accuracy/second KT state).

In the first demo display, a push button 31B is displayed at the lower right part of the screen of the image display device 5 with a background image of a clear image corresponding to the current game state ((i) low probability/non-KT state (normal state)). An operation prompt display 06TM050 for prompting the user to operate and the characters "menu" are displayed. When the push sensor detects that the push button 31B is operated while the operation prompting display 06TM050 is displayed, a menu screen including a volume adjusting bar and a light amount adjusting bar is displayed, and the stick controller 31A and the push button are displayed. The volume and the light amount can be adjusted by operating 31B.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-38 and 9-39, the effect control CPU 120 receives the second customer waiting demo display designation command, and the game state is (ii) low probability/first KT state, (iii). ) High-probability / 1st KT state, and (iv) high-probability / 2nd KT state, controlled to any one of the states, the variable display of the second special symbol is not started (the number of the second reserved memory is 0) Until then, when the second demonstration standby timer times out while the game state is continued, the image display device 5 starts the second demonstration display described later. It should be noted that any of the game states (ii) to (iv) ends when the jackpot game state based on the variable display result of the first special symbol is started, once it shifts to the low-probability/low-base state. Will be done. On the other hand, when the game state is not controlled to any of the game states (ii) to (iv) ((i) when controlled to the low certainty/non-KT state (normal state)), the second When the customer waiting demo display designation command is received, the second demo display is not started.

In the second demo display, a background corresponding to the current game state (any one of (ii) low-accuracy/first KT state, (iii) high-accuracy/first KT state, and (iv) high-accuracy/second KT state) With the image (any one of the cloudy image, the rain image, and the typhoon image) as the background, the operation prompting display 06TM050 and the “Promotional display 06TM050” that prompts the user to operate the push button 31B at the lower right part of the screen of the image display device 5 as in the first demo display. The word "Menu" is displayed. When the push sensor detects that the push button 31B is operated while the operation prompting display 06TM050 is displayed, a menu screen including a volume adjusting bar and a light amount adjusting bar is displayed, and the stick controller 31A and the push button are displayed. The volume and the light amount can be adjusted by operating 31B.

In this way, the CPU 103 transmits the first customer waiting demonstration display designation command based on the first reserved memory number being 0 in the first special symbol normal processing, and the second reserved memory in the second special symbol normal processing. The second customer waiting demo display designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the number is zero. That is, the CPU 103 sends different customer waiting commands to the effect control CPU 120 depending on the special symbol. As a result, on the production control CPU 120 side, a customer waiting command corresponding to the current game state, that is, (i) a first customer waiting demo display designation command in the low certainty/non-KT state (normal state), (ii) ) Low accuracy/first KT status, (iii) high accuracy/first KT status, and (iv) high accuracy/second KT status) only if the second customer waiting demo display designation command is received. , It becomes possible to start the demo display, and it is possible to start the demo display at an appropriate timing according to the game state.

In the present embodiment, in both the first demo display and the second demo display, the operation prompt display 06TM050 and the word "menu" are displayed in the lower right part of the screen in any case, and the game state is displayed. Except for a different effect part (background image), a common effect mode is adopted when the first demo display is performed and when the second demo display is performed. The present invention is not limited to such a form, and the first display and the second demonstration display may have different effect modes other than the effect part (background image) that differs depending on the game state.

For example, in the first demo display that is executed when the first customer waiting demo display designation command is received, the objects to be displayed in the demo display in the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5 (in this example, operation prompt display 06TM050 and “menu”). Is displayed on the other hand, the second demo display is executed when the second customer waiting demo display designation command is received. In the second demo display, the object (operation in this example) to be displayed in the demo display on the lower right part of the screen of the image display device 5. The promotion display 06TM050 and the character “menu” may be displayed. According to such a configuration, in each game state, the object is displayed in the pending display area corresponding to the special symbol which is the main symbol (for example, in the normal state, the first symbol corresponding to the main symbol is corresponded to) The object is displayed in the first reserved display area 06TM011, and when the high-accuracy/second KT state, the object is displayed in the second reserved display area 06TM021 corresponding to the second special symbol which is the main symbol), It becomes easy for the player to recognize the current game state and the main symbol.

The display color of the object to be displayed may be different between the first demo display and the second demo display. For example, in the first demo display, the operation promotion display 06TM050 and the word “menu” are displayed in blue. Then, in the second demonstration display, the operation prompting display 06TM050 and the word "menu" may be displayed in red. In addition, the object itself (object shape) to be displayed may be different between the first demo display and the second demo display. For example, in the first demo display, an image imitating the push button 31B is used. An operation promotion display 06TM050 for prompting to operate 31B may be displayed, and an operation promotion display 06TM050 for prompting to operate the stick controller 31A, which is an image simulating the stick controller 31A, may be displayed in the second demonstration display.

(Start prize during demo display)
Next, after the game state is controlled to the low-accuracy/non-KT state (normal mode), when the first demo display is being executed, it is a small hit based on the variable display of the second special symbol, and a small hit. An example of an effect in the case where the game medium is started and won in the winning ball device 6A while being controlled to the game state will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-5 and 10-6. FIG. 10-5 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect related to the first demo display and the start winning, and FIG. 10-6 shows an example of the effect image related to the first demo display and the starting winning. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 10-6(1), when the game state is controlled to the low accuracy/non-KT state (normal state), the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect mode to the normal mode. When the effect mode is the normal mode, a "sunny image" is displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern. The effect control CPU 120 executes the first demo display on the image display device 5, and displays the operation prompting display 06TM050 and the characters “menu” on the lower right portion of the screen of the image display device 5. Further, based on that the first reserved storage number is 0 and the second reserved storage number is 0, “0” is set in the first reserved storage number special display area 06TM015, and the second reserved storage number special display area 06TM025. "0" is displayed on.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the variable display is fixedly stopped based on that the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol executed last time (most recently executed) is “out”. The decorative design (2, 4, 7) is continuously displayed in the design display area (5L, 5C, 5R) even during the first demo display, and the small design (2, 4) when the variable display is fixedly stopped. , 7) is continuously displayed in the first small symbol display area (5l1, 5c1, 5r1).

On the other hand, the CPU 120 for effect control corresponds to the fact that the variation display (small hit variation) of the second special symbol that is being executed is completed, and the second small symbol display areas 5l2, 5c2, 5r2 (1, 3, 3). 5) Stop fixedly. That is, the combination of the second small symbol is fixedly stopped in response to the display result of the variable display of the second special symbol being "small hit", and the small hit game state is controlled (FIG. 10). Timing of T1 shown in -5). Here, since the gaming state is controlled to the low-probability/non-KT state (normal state) corresponding to the first special symbol which is the main symbol, based on the variable display of the second special symbol as described later. Even if it is controlled to the small hitting game state, it is continuously executed without ending the first demo display.

Next, in the period when the small hitting game state is controlled based on the variable display of the second special symbol, a start winning is newly generated in the winning ball device 6A when the first demo display is continuously executed. Then, it is assumed that the number of first reserved memories is 1 (timing of T2 shown in FIG. 10-5). At this time, the CPU 103 transmits to the effect control CPU 120 a command indicating that the first number of pending storages has increased. The effect control CPU 120 causes the first reserved storage number special display area 06TM015 to display “1” based on the reception of the command indicating that the first reserved storage number has increased.

At this time, the CPU 103, when the start winning to the winning ball apparatus 6A occurs, in the first special symbol process process, executes the first start winning determination process, and executes the first special symbol normal process of step S110A (Figure 5). Here, as shown in FIG. 10-3 described above, when the small hit game state is controlled based on the variable display result of the second special symbol, the value of the second special symbol process flag is the second small symbol. Since the value corresponds to any one of the pre-hit opening process (9), the second small hit mid-during process (10), and the second small hit end process (11) (YES in step S06TM1000A), The value of the 1 special symbol process flag is not updated from the value (0) indicating the first special symbol normal process to the value (1) indicating the first variation pattern setting process. That is, the variable display of the first special symbol is not started even if the starting winning to the first starting winning opening (winning ball device 6A) occurs. After that, the value of the second special symbol process flag is any of the second small hit opening pretreatment (9), the second small hit opening processing (10), and the second small hit end processing (11). When the value corresponding to also disappears (NO in step S06TM1000A), the value of the first special symbol process flag, the value indicating the first variation pattern setting process from the value (0) indicating the first special symbol normal process (1) ) Is updated, and the variable display of the first special symbol is started.

Then, as shown in FIG. 9-38, the effect control CPU 120 determines NO in step 026IWS4714, based on that the variable display of the first special symbol is not started, and the small hitting game state (second special Based on the fact that it is controlled to the small hitting game state based on the variable display result of the symbol), NO is determined in step 026IWS4715, so the first demo display is not ended (step 026IWS4716 is not executed), and as a result The first demo display will be continuously executed. That is, during the period in which the small hitting game state is controlled based on the variation display result of the second special symbol, even if the start winning to the winning ball apparatus 6A occurs, the first demo display continues without being terminated. To execute.

That is, in the present embodiment, when the first demonstration display is executed (when the main symbol is the first special symbol), it is controlled to the small hitting game state based on the variable display of the second special symbol. When (when the value of the second special symbol process flag is in the range of 9 to 11), the variable display of the first special symbol is not started, and whether or not the start condition of the first special symbol is satisfied. The execution of the first demo display is continued regardless of whether or not a prize has been awarded to the first start prize hole. Even if the variable display of the first special symbol is not started because it is controlled to the small hitting game state, the first demo display is immediately ended according to the winning at the first starting winning opening. In that case, the player feels strange that the variable display of the decorative pattern is not started even though the demo display is finished. Therefore, in such a state, the player does not feel uncomfortable by not terminating the first demo display even if a prize for the first start winning port is generated. In this way, it is possible to realize appropriate effect control corresponding to the situation of the variable display of the first special symbol.

Further, when the first demonstration display is executed, when the game state is controlled to the small hitting game state (small hitting game state based on the variable display result of the second special symbol), to the first starting winning opening When a prize is generated, the CPU 120 for effect control, commands related to the small hitting game state such as a small hitting start designating command, and a set of commands corresponding to winning in the first starting winning opening (for example, a symbol designating command, a variation The category command and the first reserved storage number addition designation command) are continuously received in a short period of time. If an effect corresponding to each command is attempted to be executed in a short period of time in such a situation, effect control becomes complicated and the processing load of the effect control CPU 120 increases excessively. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the first demonstration display is executed, when the gaming state is controlled to the small hitting gaming state (the small hitting gaming state based on the variable display result of the second special symbol), 1 Even if a winning in the starting winning opening occurs, the demonstration display that has already been executed is continued and the notice effect corresponding to the new starting winning is not executed, thereby reducing the processing load of effect control. I am trying to do it.

In the present embodiment, when the first demonstration display is being executed, the value of the first special symbol process flag is the first during the period when the small hit game state is controlled based on the variable display result of the second special symbol. The value (0) indicating the special symbol normal process is not updated to the value (1) indicating the first variation pattern setting process, and the process after the first special symbol normal process in the first special symbol process process does not proceed. As a result, the number of commands transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 can be suppressed, and the processing load on the effect control CPU 120 can be reduced.

In addition, during the period of being controlled to the small hitting game state based on the variation display result of the second special symbol, the variation start condition of the first special symbol cannot be satisfied, but a new start winning award to the winning ball device 6A. When occurs, the CPU 103 executes the first start winning a prize determination process of step S101A. In the first starting prize determination process, a process of storing the holding information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 and updating the first holding storage number is executed, and a random number value for determining the display result (including the big hit type) and the variation pattern. Is stored in the first hold storage buffer provided in the RAM 102 as hold information. After storing the hold information and the first hold storage number, the transmission for transmitting the effect control command for designating the determination result such as the occurrence of the start winning, the first hold storage number, and the look-ahead determination on the effect control board 12. Settings are made. The effect control command at the time of the start winning set to be transmitted in this way is, for example, effect control from the main board 11 by executing the command control processing of step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the first special symbol process processing is completed. It is transmitted to the substrate 12.

The effect control CPU 120, which has received the command indicating that the first number of reserved memories has increased, updates the value of the first reserved memory number special display area 06TM015 of the image display device 5 from “0” to “1”. In this way, when the variation start condition of the first special symbol cannot be satisfied, even if the start winning to the winning ball device 6A occurs, the variable display of the first special symbol is not executed, but the first hold By updating the value of the memory number special display area 06TM015, the player can recognize that at least the first start winning port has been won and the first reserved memory number has increased.

Here, as shown in FIG. 10-6(2), even though the first number of pending storages has changed from “0” to “1”, the first pending display area 06TM011 has an object (round image). ) Is not displayed. That is, of the display areas capable of displaying the first number of reserved memories, the first number of reserved memories (the number of objects corresponding to the first number of reserved memories) is not displayed in the highly visible first reserved display area 06TM011. The first reserved storage number is displayed only in the first reserved storage number special display area 06TM015 with low visibility.

If, in this state, an object is displayed in the first hold display area 06TM011 in response to the occurrence of a winning in the first start winning hole, the player immediately displays a variable display of the decorative symbol based on the first hold memory ( It is expected that the variable display corresponding to the first special symbol which is the main symbol) will be executed, but in the state where the small hit game state is controlled based on the variable display result of the second special symbol, the first hold display Although the object is displayed in the area 06TM011, the variable display of the decorative pattern is not started (the object is not shifted to the active display area 06TM031 and does not become the active display 06TM030), which confuses the player. Therefore, the first reserved storage number 06TM0115 with low visibility is not displayed in the first reserved display area 06TM011 with high visibility, and the first reserved storage number special display area 06TM015 with low visibility is displayed. By displaying the first reserved storage number only on, the updated first reserved storage number is appropriately notified without confusing the player.

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-6 (3), when the small hitting game state is finished and the gaming state is controlled to the low accuracy/non-KT state, the variation start condition of the first special symbol is satisfied. Based, that is, the value of the second special symbol process flag is either the second small hit opening pre-processing (9), the second small hit opening during processing (10), and the second small hit end processing (11). When the value corresponding to the process of (1) is no longer present (NO in step S06TM1000A), the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol (timing of T3 shown in FIG. 10-5).

At this time, based on the start of the variable display of the first special symbol (YES in step 026IWS4714 shown in FIG. 9-38), the effect control CPU 120 ends the first demo display (step 026IWS4716). As a result, the operation prompting display 06TM050 and the characters “menu” are hidden at the lower right part of the screen of the image display device 5. On the other hand, the clear image, which is the background image corresponding to the current game state ((i) low probability/non-KT state (normal state)), is continuously displayed. In this way, with the start of the variable display of the first special symbol, the operation promotion display 06TM050 and the “menu” which have a higher display priority than the background image (it seems to be displayed in front of the background image) The character “” is hidden, but the background image itself, which has a lower display priority than the first demo display (appears to be displayed behind the operation prompt display 06TM050 and the character “menu”), continues. Will be displayed. As a result, the player can start the variable display of the decorative symbol (information corresponding to the first special symbol which is the main symbol) before (when the first demo display is displayed) and after (the first symbol). It is possible to easily understand that the game state has not changed by (after 1 demo display is hidden).

The effect control CPU 120 causes the variable display of decorative symbols (information corresponding to the first special symbol which is the main symbol) to start changing in the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5. In the first small symbol display area 5l1, the first small symbol display area 5c1, and the first small symbol display area 5r1 of the image display device 5, the variable display of the first small symbol (information corresponding to the first special symbol) is displayed. Let it start. Further, the effect control CPU 120 causes the first reserved storage number to be 0, and causes the first reserved storage number special display area 06TM015 to display “0” and the active display area 06TM031 to display the active display 06TM030. .. The active display 06TM030 displayed at this time is information corresponding to the pending storage based on the winning of the first starting winning opening which occurs when the first demo display is being executed. Further, with the completion of the first demonstration display, the first suspension display area 06TM011 has a number of first suspension displays 06TM010 corresponding to the number of the first suspension memories (the first suspension display 06TM010 generated when the first demonstration display is executed). (1) Information corresponding to the pending storage based on winning at the starting winning opening) is displayed.

As shown above, the variation start condition of the first special symbol is satisfied in response to the end of the small hitting game state based on the variation display result of the second special symbol, and the variation display of the first special symbol is started. In response to this, the effect control CPU 120 ends the first demo display. In this way, it is possible to realize appropriate effect control corresponding to the execution status of the variable display of the first special symbol.

In the present embodiment, when the second demonstration display is being executed, the second demonstration display is not ended even when the small hitting game state is controlled based on the variation display result of the first special symbol. It is supposed to continue. Then, when the second demo display is executed, when the start winning a prize to the second starting winning opening occurs within the period of being controlled to the small hitting game state based on the variable display result of the first special symbol, The variable display of the second special symbol is not started, and the second reserved storage number displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 06TM025 is updated from 0 to 1. At this time as well, the second demo display continues without ending, and no object (circular image) is displayed in the second hold display area 06TM021.

Specifically, when the second demo display is executed (the gaming state is (ii) low-accuracy/first KT state, (iii) high-accuracy/first KT state, and (iv) high-accuracy/second KT state. , If any of the game state is controlled), when the small hit game state based on the variable display result of the first special symbol is controlled, the value of the first special symbol process flag is "9" ~ " Since it is determined to be YES in step S06TM1000B shown in FIG. 10-4 based on the range of 11", the value of the second special symbol process flag does not become a value corresponding to the second variation pattern setting process, The variable display of the second special symbol is not started. And, in this state (the second demo display is being executed and is being controlled to the small hitting game state based on the variable display result of the first special symbol), if the winning to the second starting winning opening occurs, the figure 9-39, step 026IWS4814 determines NO, further step 026IWS4815 determines YES, step 026IWS4816 is not executed, and the second demo display does not end.

Here, the effect control CPU 120, which has received the command indicating that the second number of reserved memories has increased, updates the value of the second reserved memory number special display area 06TM025 of the image display device 5 from “0” to “1”. To do. However, even though the number of second reserved memories is changed from "0" to "1", the object (circular image) is not displayed in the second reserved display area 06TM021. That is, of the display areas capable of displaying the second reserved storage number, the second reserved storage area 06TM021 having high visibility does not display the second reserved storage number (the number of objects corresponding to the second reserved storage number). The second reserved storage number is displayed only in the second reserved storage number special display area 06TM025 having low visibility.

After that, the small hitting game state based on the variable display result of the first special symbol ends, and the gaming state is (ii) low accuracy/first KT state, (iii) high accuracy/first KT state, and (iv) high accuracy. / Second KT state, when controlled to any gaming state, based on the fact that the variation start condition of the second special symbol is satisfied, that is, the value of the first special symbol process flag, the first small hit open When the value corresponding to any of the pre-processing (9), the first small hitting open processing (10), and the first small hitting end processing (11) has disappeared (NO in step S06TM1000B), the CPU 103 determines , The variable display of the second special symbol is started. At this time, based on the start of the variable display of the second special symbol (YES in step 026IWS4814 shown in FIG. 9-39), the effect control CPU 120 ends the second demo display (step 026IWS4816). As a result, the operation prompting display 06TM050 and the characters “menu” are hidden at the lower right part of the screen of the image display device 5. On the other hand, a background image (cloudy) corresponding to the current game state (any one of (ii) low accuracy/first KT state, (iii) high accuracy/first KT state, and (iv) high accuracy/second KT state) The image, the rain image, or the typhoon image) will be continuously displayed.

In this way, with the start of the variable display of the second special symbol, the operation promotion display 06TM050 and the “menu” which have a higher display priority than the background image (it seems to be displayed in front of the background image) Is hidden, but the background image itself, which has a lower display priority than the second demo display (appears to be displayed behind the operation prompt display 06TM050 and the word “menu”), continues. Will be displayed. As a result, the player starts before (when the second demo display was displayed) and (after the second demo display was displayed) the variable display of the decorative symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol which is the main symbol). 2 After the demo display is hidden), it is possible to easily understand that the game state has not changed.

The production control CPU 120 causes the variable display of decorative symbols (information corresponding to the second special symbol, which is the main symbol) to start variable display in the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5. In the second small symbol display area 512, the second small symbol display area 5c2, and the second small symbol display area 5r2 of the image display device 5, the variable display of the second small symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol) is displayed. Let it start. Moreover, the CPU 120 for effect control displays “0” in the second reserved storage number special display area 06TM025 and displays the active display 06TM030 in the active display area 06TM031 as the second reserved storage number becomes 0. .. The active display 06TM030 displayed at this time is information corresponding to the pending storage based on the winning of the second starting winning opening which occurs when the second demo display is being executed. In addition, with the completion of the second demonstration display, the second suspension display area 06TM021 has a second suspension display 06TM020 (the number of second suspension displays 06TM020 corresponding to the second suspension storage number) 2) Information corresponding to the pending storage based on the winning at the starting winning opening) is displayed.

(Special symbol fluctuation interruption processing due to the small hitting game state)
In the present embodiment, during the variation display of one special symbol of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, when the small hit game state is controlled based on the variation display result of the other special symbol, one of The variable display of the special symbol is temporarily interrupted, and then, when the small hitting game state based on the variable display result of the other special symbol ends, the variable display of the one special symbol is restarted. Hereinafter, the change suspension process and the change restart process of the special symbol due to the occurrence of the small hit will be specifically described.

FIG. 10-7 is a flowchart showing a first special symbol variation process (step S112A) in the first special symbol process process. In the first special symbol variation process, the CPU 103 first, if not yet transmitted, based on the determination result of whether or not to be a big hit, and the determination result of the big hit type, one of the display result designation command (display result 1 control command, display result 2 designation command, display result 4 designation command, display result 5 designation command) is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 026IWS1120A).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether the first fluctuation interruption flag is set (step S06TM1200A). If the first fluctuation interruption flag has not been set (NO in step S06TM1200A), the processing proceeds to step 026IWS1121A and subsequent steps. If the first fluctuation interruption flag has been set (YES in step S06TM1200A), the processing ends. The first variation interruption flag is set when the display result of the variation display of the second special symbol is the small hit symbol.

Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the first variation time timer (step 026IWS1121A), and when the first variation time timer times out (step 026IWS1122A), performs control to transmit the first symbol determination designation command to the effect control CPU 120 ( Step 026IWS1123A). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop process (step S113A) (step 026IWS1127A).

If the first fluctuation time timer has not timed out, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the big hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 026IWS1124A). Whether or not the big hit symbol is displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is, for example, the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop process, It can be determined by checking whether or not the second big hit flag indicating that the big hit is to be set based on the variable display of the second special symbol.

If the big hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (YES in step 026IWS1124A), the CPU 103 controls to transmit the first compulsory symbol finalization designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step S06TM1210A). The second special symbol display device 4B is checked whether or not the small hit symbol is derived and displayed (step S06TM1220A).

If the big hit symbol is not derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (step S06TM1220A). In addition, whether or not the small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B, for example, the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop process. , It can be determined by checking whether or not the second small hit flag indicating that a small hit is set based on the variable display of the second special symbol.

If the small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (YES in step S06TM1220A), the CPU 103 sets the first variation interruption flag (step S06TM1230A) and ends the process.

If the small hit symbol is not derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (NO in step S06TM1220A), the CPU 103 corresponds the value of the first special symbol process flag to the first special symbol stop process (step S113A). The updated value is updated (step 026IWS1127A), and the process ends.

By performing the processing of step S06TM1200A, step S06TM1220A, and step S06TM1230A, in this characteristic portion 06TM, if the variable display of the second special symbol is a small hit while the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed, 1 fluctuation interruption flag is set, the subtraction of the first fluctuation time timer (step 026IWS1121A) is not executed, and the value of the first special symbol process flag is not updated from the value of the first special symbol fluctuation processing, so the first special symbol The variable display of is interrupted.

Further, by performing the processing of step 026IWS1124A, in this feature portion 06TM, if the variable display of the second special symbol becomes a big hit during the variable display of the first special symbol, the variable display of the first special symbol is displayed. Is forcibly stopped, so that a situation in which a big hit occurs simultaneously with the first special symbol and the second special symbol does not occur. In this case, on the CPU 120 side for effect control, when the variable display of the first special symbol is forced out, the variable display result of the decorative symbol is based on the display result 1 designation command transmitted in step 026IWS1120A. As for, the control is forcibly disengaged so that the symbols are stopped and displayed.

FIG. 10-8 is a flowchart showing a second special symbol variation process (step S112B) in the second special symbol process process. In the second special symbol variation process, the CPU 103 first, if not yet transmitted, based on the determination result of whether or not to be a big hit, and the determination result of the big hit type, one of the display result designation command (display result 1 control command, display result 2 designation command, display result 4 designation command, display result 5 designation command) is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 026IWS1120B).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether the second fluctuation interruption flag is set (step S06TM1200B). If the second fluctuation interruption flag is not set (NO in step S06TM1200B), the processing proceeds to step 026IWS1121B and subsequent steps, and if the second fluctuation interruption flag is set (YES in step S06TM1200B), the processing is ended. The second variation interruption flag is set when the display result of the variation display of the first special symbol is a small hit symbol.

Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the second variation time timer (step 026IWS1121B), and when the second variation time timer times out (step 026IWS1122B), performs control to transmit the second symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 ( Step 026IWS1123B). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop process (step S113B) (step 026IWS1127B).

When the second fluctuation time timer has not timed out, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the big hit symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A (step 026IWS1124B). Whether or not the jackpot symbol is displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is, for example, the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop process, It can be determined by checking whether or not the first big hit flag indicating that the big hit is to be set based on the variable display of the first special symbol.

If the big hit symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A (YES in step 026IWS1124B), the CPU 103 controls to transmit the second compulsory symbol finalization designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step S06TM1210B). The first special symbol display device 4A, it is confirmed whether or not the small hit symbol is derived and displayed (step S06TM1220B).

If the big hit symbol is not derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A (step S06TM1220B). Whether or not the small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is, for example, the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop process. , It can be determined by checking whether or not the first small hit flag indicating that a small hit is set based on the variable display of the first special symbol.

If the small winning symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A (YES in step S06TM1220B), the CPU 103 sets the second variation interruption flag (step S06TM1230B), and ends the process.

If the small hit symbol is not derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A (NO in step S06TM1220B), the CPU 103 corresponds the value of the second special symbol process flag to the second special symbol stop process (step S113B). The value is updated to the specified value (step 026IWS1127B), and the process is terminated.

By performing the processing of step S06TM1200B, step S06TM1220B, and step S06TM1230B, in this characteristic portion 06TM, if the variable display of the first special symbol is a small hit while the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed, 2 fluctuation interruption flag is set, subtraction of the second fluctuation time timer (step 026IWS1121B) is not executed, and the value of the second special symbol process flag is not updated from the value of the second special symbol fluctuation processing, so the second special symbol The variable display of is interrupted.

Further, by performing the processing of step 026IWS1124B, in this feature unit 06TM, if the variable display of the first special symbol is a big hit during the variable display of the second special symbol, the variable display of the second special symbol is displayed. Is forcibly stopped, so that a situation in which a big hit occurs simultaneously with the first special symbol and the second special symbol does not occur. In this case, on the CPU 120 side for effect control, when the variable display of the second special symbol is forcibly disengaged, the variable display result of the decorative symbol is based on the display result 1 designation command transmitted in step 026IWS1120B. As for, it is forcibly disengaged and controlled to stop and display the design.

FIG. 10-9 is a flowchart showing a first small hitting end process (step S121A) in the first special symbol process process. In the first small hit completion processing, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the small hit completion display timer is set (step 026IWS2300A), and when the small hit completion display timer is set, shifts to step 026IWS2304A. When the small hit end display timer is not set, the first small hit flag is reset (step 026IWS2301A), and when the second fluctuation interruption flag is set, the second fluctuation interruption flag is reset (step S06TM1300A). , Control for transmitting a small hit end designation command (step 026IWS2302A). Then, the small hit end display timer is set to a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the small hit end display is performed on the image display device 5 (small hit end display time) (step 026IWS2303A), and the process is executed. finish.

In step 026IWS2304A, the value of the small hit end display timer is decremented by 1 (step 026IWS2304A). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the small hit end display timer is 0, that is, whether the small hit end display time has elapsed (step 026IWS2305A). If not, the process ends.

If the small hit end display time has elapsed (YES in step 026IWS2305A), the CPU 103 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol normal process (step S110A) (step 026IWS2309A). ).

FIG. 10-10 is a flowchart showing a second small hit completion process in the second special symbol process process. In the second small hit completion processing, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the small hit completion display timer is set (step 026IWS2300B), and when the small hit completion display timer is set, the CPU 103 proceeds to step 026IWS2304B. When the small hit end display timer is not set, the second small hit flag is reset (step 026IWS2301B), and when the first fluctuation interruption flag is set, the first fluctuation interruption flag is reset (step S06TM1300B). , Control for transmitting a small hit end designation command (step 026IWS2302B). Then, the small hit end display timer is set to a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the small hit end display is performed on the image display device 5 (small hit end display time) (step 026IWS2303B), and the process is executed. finish.

In step 026IWS2304B, the value of the small hit end display timer is decremented by 1 (step 026IWS2304B). Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the small hit end display timer is 0, that is, whether the small hit end display time has elapsed (step 026IWS2305B). If not, the process ends.

If the small hit end display time has elapsed (YES in step 026IWS2305B), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the special drawing time saving flag is set (step 026IWS2306B). If the special drawing time saving flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the KT state), the CPU 103 performs control to end the lighting of the right-handed indicator 26 (step 026IWS2307B) and right to the effect control CPU 120. The control for transmitting the striking and lighting end designation command is performed (step 026IWS2308B).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol normal process (step 026IWS2309B).

By executing the processing of step S06TM1300A, in this characteristic part 06TM, when the small hitting game state based on the variation display result of the first special symbol ends, the second variation interruption flag is reset, and shown in FIG. 10-8. As described above, by determining NO in step S06TM1200B, the suspended variable display of the second special symbol is restarted. Similarly, when the small hitting game state based on the variation display result of the second special symbol ends, the first variation interruption flag is reset, and as shown in FIG. 10-7, by determining NO in step S06TM1200A, The variable display of the suspended first special symbol is restarted.

Next, after the gaming state is controlled to the high-accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH mode), or the low-precision/first KT state (time saving mode), the variable display result of the second special symbol becomes "small hit". An example of effects when the small hit game state is controlled will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-11 and 10-12.

FIG. 10-11(A) is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect related to the small hit that occurs when the game state is controlled to the high-accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH mode), FIGS. 10-12 (A1) to (A5) are explanatory views showing an example of an effect image associated with a small hit that occurs when the game state is controlled to the high-accuracy/second KT state (small hit RUSH mode). Is. In addition, FIG. 10-11 (B) is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect related to the small hit that occurs when the game state is controlled to the low certainty/first KT state (time saving mode), FIGS. 10-12 (B1) to (B4) are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the effect image associated with the small hit that occurs when the game state is controlled to the low-accuracy/first KT state (time saving mode). .

[Small hits Small hits in RUSH mode]
First, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (A1), when the game state is controlled to the high-accuracy/second KT state, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect mode to the small hit RUSH mode. When the effect mode is the small hit RUSH mode, the "typhoon image" is displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern. When the CUP 103 is executing the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol at the same time, the effect control CPU 120, in the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5. , The decorative symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol which is the main symbol) is displayed in a variable manner, and the second small symbol display area 5l2, the second small symbol display area 5c2, and the second of the image display device 5 are displayed. In the small symbol display area 5r2, the variable display of the second small symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol) is executed, and the first small symbol display area 5l1 and the first small symbol display area 5c1 of the image display device 5 are executed. , And in the first small symbol display area 5r1, variable display of the first small symbol (information corresponding to the first special symbol which is the sub symbol) is executed (timing of T1 shown in FIG. 10-11(A)). ).

Since the first reserved storage number is 0, the effect control CPU 120 displays "0" in the first reserved storage number special display area 06TM015 of the image display device 5, and the second reserved storage number is 4. Therefore, “4” is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 06TM025 of the image display device 5. Further, the active display area 06TM031 displays the active display 06TM030 corresponding to the variable display currently being executed, and the second reserved display area 06TM021 displays four second reserved display 06TM020.

When in the second KT state, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (A1), the image display device 5 displays a small hit continuous number display 1 indicating the number of consecutive small hits in the second KT state. At the same time, the small hit continuous medium prize ball number display 1 indicating the number of prize balls generated during the period in which the small hits continuously occur in the second KT state is displayed. In this example, it is assumed that 16R probability variation big hits have occurred and the state has been changed to the second KT state, and then small hits have occurred nine times by the present time, and as shown in FIG. 10-12 (A1), small hits are continuous. The case where characters such as "9th time" are displayed as the number display 1 is shown. Also, during the big hit game based on the first 16R probability variation big hit, 15 × 10 balls × 16 rounds = 2400 prize balls are obtained, and after that, 10 × 3 balls = 30 prize balls are obtained for each small hit. Based on the fact that 30×9=270 prize balls have been obtained by the occurrence of 9 small hits, a total of 2670 prize balls have been obtained. As shown in, the case where a character such as "2670pt" is displayed as the small winning continuous award ball number display 1 is shown.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (A2), the effect control CPU 120 causes the design display area 5L of the image display device 5 to have a decorative design "1", and the design display area 5C to have a decorative design "3", and The decorative display "5" is fixedly stopped in the symbol display area 5R, the second small symbol display area 5l2 of the image display device 5 is "1", and the second small symbol display area 5c2 is the second small symbol. "3", and the second small symbol "5" in the second small symbol display area 5r2 is fixedly stopped (timing of T2 shown in FIG. 10-11). That is, the combination of the decorative design and the second small design in which the variable display result of the second special design is “small hit” is definitely stopped, and the small hit game state is controlled. Further, the occurrence of the small hit is notified by displaying the character "small hit!!" on the upper part of the image display device 5. And since the game state is controlled to the small hitting game state, the effect control CPU 120 updates the small hit continuous number display 1 to "10th time".

10-12 (A3) during the period when the gaming state is controlled to the small hitting gaming state and the special variable winning ball device 17 is open (the period from T2 to T3 shown in FIG. 10-11(A)). ), the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 06TM030 displayed in the active display area 06TM031 and the four second reserved display 06TM020 displayed in the second reserved display area 06TM021, and displays the image. The device 5 is caused to display the character and the line "Small hit attacker is open!".

Next, during the period when the special variable winning ball device 17 is open, three game balls are won in the special winning port, and the number of prize balls is further increased by 10×3 balls=30, and the total is 2700. I shall. In this case, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (A4), the effect control CPU 120 is a period from the closing of the special variable winning ball device 17 to the end of the small hitting game state (FIG. 10-11 (A)). During the small hit ending period (T3 to T4), the character and the line of "30pt GET!!" are displayed on the image display device 5 and the small hit continuous middle prize number display 1 is updated to "2700pt". .. Further, in this example, the small hit ending period as the small hit end processing period in the second KT state (small hit RUSH mode) is set to 3 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (A5), when the gaming state is controlled from the small hitting gaming state to the high-accuracy/second KT state, and the variable display of the second special symbol is started, the effect control CPU 120 In the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5, the variable display of decorative symbols is started, and the second small symbol display area 512 and the second small symbol of the image display device 5 are started. In the display area 5c2 and the second small symbol display area 5r2, the variable display of the second small symbol is started (timing of T4 shown in FIG. 10-11).

Here, the effect control CPU 120 displays the active display 06TM030 in the active display area 06TM031 and activates the second reserved display 06TM020 in the second reserved display area 06TM021 as the number of the second reserved storages becomes 3. One is shifted to the display area 06TM031 side, and “3” is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 06TM025.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the combination of the second small symbols for which the variable display result of the second special symbol is “small hit” is fixedly stopped, the CPU 103 uses the second special symbol in the first special symbol variation process. Since the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed (YES in step S06TM1220A), the first variation interruption flag is set (step S06TM1230A), and the process ends. Then, in step S06TM1200A of the subsequent first special symbol variation processing, based on that the first variation interruption flag is set, the processing of step 026IWS1121A and subsequent steps is not executed, and the processing is terminated as is (YES in step S06TM1200A). ). That is, while the first variation interruption flag is set, the variation display of the first special symbol is suspended because the first variation timer is not subtracted.

When the small hitting game state ends, the CPU 103 executes the processing of step 026IWS2301A and subsequent steps based on the fact that the small hitting end display timer is not operating in the second small hitting end processing, and interrupts the first fluctuation in step S06TM1300A. The first variation interruption flag is reset because the flag is set.

Since the first fluctuation interruption flag has been set, the CPU 103 executes the processing after 026IWS1121A based on that the first fluctuation interruption flag is not set in step S06TM1200A in the first special symbol fluctuation processing ( (No in step S06TM1200A). That is, when the first fluctuation interruption flag is reset, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is restarted because the first fluctuation timer is subtracted.

Therefore, in the second KT state, regarding the variable display of the first special symbol, in the period from the timing when the gaming state is controlled to the small hitting gaming state to the timing when the small hitting gaming state ends (FIG. 10-11(A)). In the period of T2 to T4 shown), the variable display of the first special symbol is temporarily suspended, and at the timing when the small hitting game state ends (at the timing of T4 shown in FIG. 10-11(A)), The variable display of the first special symbol is restarted. In the present example, the timing of T5 shown in FIG. 10-11(A) was the original timing at which the variable display of the first special symbol being executed ends, but the period during which the small hit game state is controlled ( In the period of T2 to T4 shown in FIG. 10-11(A)), since the variable display of the first special symbol was suspended, the execution period of the variable display of the first special symbol is the variable display of the first special symbol. 10 is extended by the period (the period from T2 to T4 shown in FIG. 10-11(A)) (from the timing of T5 to the timing of T6 shown in FIG. 10-11(A)).

[Small hits in time saving mode]
First, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (B1), when the game state is controlled to the low accuracy/first KT state, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect mode to the time saving RUSH mode. When the effect mode is the time saving mode, the "cloudy image" is displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern. When the CUP 103 is executing the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol at the same time, the effect control CPU 120, in the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5. , The decorative symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol which is the main symbol) is displayed in a variable manner, and the second small symbol display area 5l2, the second small symbol display area 5c2, and the second of the image display device 5 are displayed. In the small symbol display area 5r2, the variable display of the second small symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol) is executed, and the first small symbol display area 5l1 and the first small symbol display area 5c1 of the image display device 5 are executed. , And in the first small symbol display area 5r1, variable display of the first small symbol (information corresponding to the first special symbol which is the sub symbol) is executed (timing of T1 shown in FIG. 10-6(B)). ).

Since the first reserved storage number is 0, the effect control CPU 120 displays "0" in the first reserved storage number special display area 06TM015 of the image display device 5, and the second reserved storage number is 4. Therefore, “4” is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 06TM025 of the image display device 5. Further, the active display area 06TM031 displays the active display 06TM030 for the variable display currently being executed, and the second reserved display area 06TM021 displays four second reserved display 06TM020.

When in the first KT state, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (B1), in the image display device 5, the small hit continuous number display 1 and the small hit continuous middle prize shown in FIG. 10-12 (A1). The ball count display 1 is not displayed. In this example, as shown in FIGS. 9-9(1) to 9-11(1), in the first KT state, the opening time of the downstream special variable winning ball device 17 is 0.2 seconds, 0.8. While it is as short as 2 seconds or 1.8 seconds, the open time of the variable winning ball apparatus 6B on the upstream side is as long as 5.5 seconds. Therefore, in the first KT state, although a small hit is likely to occur, it is extremely rare that a game ball is won in the special winning opening (for example, about 1 ball for every 100 fluctuation displays), so the small hit is continuous. The number display 1 and the small winning continuous middle prize number display 1 are not displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (B2), the effect control CPU 120 causes the design display area 5L of the image display device 5 to have a decorative design "1", and the design display area 5C to have a decorative design "3", and The decorative display "5" is fixedly stopped in the symbol display area 5R, the second small symbol display area 5l2 of the image display device 5 is "1", and the second small symbol display area 5c2 is the second small symbol. "3", and the second small symbol display area 5r2 is confirmed to stop the second small symbol "5" (timing of T2 shown in FIG. 10-6(B)). That is, the combination of the second small symbols for which the display result of the second special symbol is "small hit" is definitely stopped, and the small hit game state is controlled.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the first KT state is controlled, even if a small hit occurs, it is extremely rare that the game ball will win the special winning opening, so the second special symbol. Even if the variable display result of "is a small hit", it is not necessary to notify the player that a small hit has occurred. Therefore, during the first KT state, when the display result of the second special symbol is "small hit", the combination of the second small symbol whose variable display result of the decorative symbol and the second small symbol is "small hit" Although (135 in this example) is fixedly stopped, the character "small hit!!" is not displayed above the fixedly-decorated decorative pattern. That is, unlike the second KT state in which the player is informed in a manner that the player can easily understand the occurrence of the small hit by displaying the character "small hit!" on the upper part of the decorative pattern which has been fixedly stopped, the first KT. By not displaying characters such as "small hit!" during the state, it is difficult for the player to grasp the occurrence of the small hit. According to such a configuration, even if the variable display result of the second special symbol is "small hit" during the first KT state, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize that the small hit has occurred, and the first KT Even if a small hit occurs during the state, the player is prevented from having excessive expectations.

Next, during the period when the gaming state is controlled to the small hitting gaming state and the special variable winning ball device 17 is open (the period from T2 to T3 shown in FIG. 10-11(B)), FIG. 10-12 (B3). As shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 causes the design display area 5L of the image display device 5 to have a decorative design "1", the design display area 5C to have a decorative design "3", and the design display area 5R to have a decorative design ". 5” is fixedly stopped, the active display 06TM030 displayed in the active display area 06TM031 and the four second reserved display 06TM020 displayed in the second reserved display area 06TM021 are erased. Further, in this example, the small hit ending period as the small hit end processing period in the first KT state is set to 0.5 seconds.

Next, when the gaming state is controlled from the small hitting gaming state to the low probability/first KT state, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (B4), the symbol display area 5L of the image display device 5, In the symbol display area 5C and the symbol display area 5R, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, and the second small symbol display area 512, the second small symbol display area 5c2, and the second small symbol display area of the image display device 5 are started. At 5r2, the variable display of the second small symbol is started (timing of T4 shown in FIG. 10-11(B)).

Here, the effect control CPU 120 displays the active display 06TM030 in the active display area 06TM031 and activates the second reserved display 06TM020 in the second reserved display area 06TM021 as the number of the second reserved storages becomes 3. One is shifted to the display area 06TM031 side, and “3” is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 06TM025.

Further, as described above, even during the first KT state, regarding the variable display of the first special symbol, the period from the timing when the gaming state is controlled to the small hitting gaming state to the timing when the small hitting gaming state ends (FIG. 10). During the period from T2 to T4 shown in -11(B), the variable display of the first special symbol is temporarily suspended, and at the timing when the small hitting game state ends (shown in FIG. 10-11(B)). (At the timing of T4), the variable display of the first special symbol is restarted. In this example, the timing of T5 shown in FIG. 10-11(B) is the original timing at which the variable display of the first special symbol that is being executed ends, but the period during which the small hit game state is controlled ( In period (T2 to T4 shown in FIG. 10-11B), since the variable display of the first special symbol was suspended, the execution period of the variable display of the first special symbol is the variable display of the first special symbol. 10B is extended by the period (the period of T2 to T4 shown in FIG. 10-11B) (from the timing of T5 to the timing of T6 shown in FIG. 10-11B).

As described above, in the first KT state, since it is difficult for the game ball to practically enter the special winning opening in the small hit game state, an effect (character display of "small hit!!") that emphasizes the small hit control is executed. Instead, the small hit ending period is made shorter than that in the second KT state. On the other hand, in the second KT state, since the game ball is easy to win in the special winning opening in the small hitting game state, an effect that emphasizes the small hitting control (character display of "small hitting!!") is executed and The small hit ending period is configured to be longer than that in the 1KT state. In this example, the small hit ending period is 0.5 seconds in the first KT state, whereas the small hit ending period is 3 seconds in the second KT state.

As described above, during the variable display of the first special symbol, the display result of the variable display of the second special symbol is "small hit", and when the small hit game state is controlled, the variable display of the first special symbol is displayed. Suspended. The small hit ending period in the first KT state is 0.5 seconds, while the small hit ending period in the second KT state is 3 seconds. Here, in the first KT state and the second KT state, when the same type of small hit occurs, the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 17 is common (for example, in the case of small hit B 0.8 seconds. Therefore, in the second KT state, the variable display of the first special symbol is interrupted for [0.8 seconds+3 seconds=3.8 seconds], while in the first KT state, the variable display of the first special symbol is Pause for [0.8 seconds + 0.5 seconds = 1.3 seconds].

As described above, in the first KT state in which the degree of expectation of winning at the special winning opening is low, the interruption time of the variable display can be made shorter than in the second KT state in which the degree of expecting winning of prize at the special winning opening is high. If the small hit ending period common to the second KT state is provided in the first KT state, the effect of emphasizing the small hit control is not executed, and the first prize is not expected even though the expectation of winning the special winning opening is low. Due to the long period in which variable display of symbols is interrupted (for example, 3.8 seconds), there is a large mismatch between the variable display time of the first special symbol and the effect corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol. This will give the player a feeling of strangeness. As in the present embodiment, by setting the small hitting ending period in the first KT state to a time shorter than the small hitting ending period in the second KT state, the variable display time of the first special symbol in the first KT state and the first It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable by suppressing inconsistency with the effect corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol.

(Production control when a big hit occurs)
Next, when the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are simultaneously executed in parallel, regarding the effect control when the variable display result of one of the special symbols is “big hit” , FIG. 10-13, and FIG. 10-14.

10-13(A), the gaming state is controlled to a low-probability/non-KT state (normal mode), and the display result of the first special symbol is "big hit", so that the second special symbol It is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect when the display result is forcibly "disappeared". 10-14 (A1) ~ (A4), the game state is controlled to low probability / non-KT state (normal mode), the display result of the first special symbol is "big hit" , Is an explanatory view showing an example of an effect image when the display result of the second special symbol is forcibly set to "off".

In addition, in FIG. 10-13 (B), the game state is controlled to the low-probability/non-KT state (normal mode), and the display result of the second special symbol is “big hit”, so the first special It is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect when the display result of the symbol is forcibly set to “out”. 10-14 (B1) ~ (B4), the game state is controlled to low probability / non-KT state (normal mode), the display result of the second special symbol is "big hit" , Is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect image when the display result of the first special symbol is forcibly set to "off".

(When the second special symbol is forced out)
First, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (A1), when the game state is controlled to the low accuracy/non-KT state, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect mode to the normal mode. When the effect mode is the normal mode, a "sunny image" is displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern. Here, it is assumed that the CPU 103 has started the variable display of the first special symbol while the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed. In response to this, the CPU 120 for effect control, in the second small symbol display area 51, the second small symbol display area 5c2, and the second small symbol display area 5r2 of the image display device 5, the second small symbol (sub symbol) In the state in which the variable display of the second special symbol) is being executed, the decorative symbol (in the main symbol) is displayed in the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5. While starting the variable display of information corresponding to a certain first special symbol), in the first small symbol display area 5l1, the first small symbol display area 5c1, and the first small symbol display area 5r1 of the image display device 5, The variable display of one small symbol is started (timing of T1 shown in FIG. 10-13(A)).

Further, the effect control CPU 120 displays “0” in the first reserved storage number special display area 06TM015 of the image display device 5 based on that the first reserved storage number is 0 and the second reserved storage number is 0. Is displayed, and “0” is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 06TM025. An active display 06TM030 is displayed in the active display area 06TM031.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (A2), the effect control CPU 120 displays “2” in the symbol display area 5L and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5 at the timing when the reach state in the variation pattern should be established. The decorative pattern is stopped and displayed to reach the reach state, and the letters "REACH!!" are displayed on the upper portion of the image display device 5 (timing T2 in FIG. 10-13(A)). At this time, in the first small symbol display area 5l1, the first small symbol display area 5c1, and the first small symbol display area 5r1, the variable display of the first small symbol is continued. That is, in the first small symbol display area 5l1 corresponding to the symbol display area 5L in which the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, and in the first small symbol display area 5r1 corresponding to the symbol display area 5R in which the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, The first small symbol is continuously displayed in a variable manner without being stopped and displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (A3), the effect control CPU 120 executes the movable body operation effect of moving the movable body 06TM100 from the tilted position to the standing position while maintaining the reach state, and at the same time, moves the movable body. The effect effect of superimposing and displaying the flame effect image 06TM150 around the 06TM100 is executed (timing T3 shown in FIG. 10-13(A)). The flame effect image 06TM150 is an image having a higher display priority (the display layer is higher) than the background image and the decorative pattern, so that it is displayed from the player in front of the background image and the decorative pattern. appear.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes an operation of returning the movable body 06TM100 at the standing position to the tilted position as shown in FIG. 10-14 (A4) (T4 shown in FIG. 10-13(A)). As a result, the movable body motion effect is completed, and the decorative design "2" is displayed in the design display area 5L, the decorative design "2" is displayed in the decorative design display area 5C, and the decorative design "2" is displayed in the decorative design display area 5R. Confirm stop, the first small symbol display area 5l1 of the first small symbol "2", the first small symbol display area 5c1 of the first small symbol "2", and the first small symbol display area 5r1 of the first small symbol The symbol "2" is fixedly stopped. That is, the combination of the decorative design and the first small design in which the display result of the first special design is "big hit" is fixedly stopped. Then, the occurrence of the big hit is notified by displaying the character "big hit!!" on the upper part of the image display device 5.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 10-8, in the second special symbol variation process, if the big hit symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A (YES in step 026IWS1124B), for effect control The control for transmitting the second compulsory symbol confirmation designation command to the CPU 120 is performed (step S06TM1210B), and the variable display of the second special symbol is controlled to be forced out. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (A4), the production control CPU 120 that has received the second compulsory symbol confirmation designation command, in the second small symbol display area 512, the second small symbol “7”, the second small symbol. The second small symbol "8" in the symbol display area 5c2 and the second small symbol "2" in the second small symbol display area 5r2 are fixedly stopped. That is, the combination of the second small symbols for which the display result of the second special symbol is “out” is fixedly stopped.

(When the first special symbol is forced out)
First, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (B1), when the game state is controlled to the low accuracy/non-KT state, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect mode to the normal mode. When the effect mode is the normal mode, a "sunny image" is displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern. Here, it is assumed that the CPU 103 has started the variable display of the first special symbol while the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed. In response to this, the CPU 120 for effect control, in the second small symbol display area 51, the second small symbol display area 5c2, and the second small symbol display area 5r2 of the image display device 5, the second small symbol (sub symbol) In the state in which the variable display of the second special symbol) is being executed, the decorative symbol (in the main symbol) is displayed in the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5. While starting the variable display of information corresponding to a certain first special symbol), in the first small symbol display area 5l1, the first small symbol display area 5c1, and the first small symbol display area 5r1 of the image display device 5, The variable display of one small symbol is started (timing of T1 shown in FIG. 10-13(B)).

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 displays “0” in the first reserved storage number special display area 06TM015 of the image display device 5 based on that the first reserved storage number is 0 and the second reserved storage number is 0. Is displayed, and "0" is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 06TM025. Further, an active display 06TM030 is displayed in the active display area 06TM031.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (B2), the effect control CPU 120 displays “2” in the symbol display area 5L and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5 at the timing at which the reach state in the variation pattern should be established. The decorative pattern is stopped and displayed to reach the reach state, and the letters "REACH!!" are displayed on the upper part of the image display device 5 (timing T2 in FIG. 10-13(B)). At this time, in the first small symbol display area 5l1, the first small symbol display area 5c1, and the first small symbol display area 5r1, the variable display of the first small symbol is continued. That is, in the first small symbol display area 5l1 corresponding to the symbol display area 5L in which the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, and in the first small symbol display area 5r1 corresponding to the symbol display area 5R in which the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, The first small symbol is continuously displayed in a variable manner without being stopped and displayed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (B3), at a timing to execute a blackout effect described later in the variation pattern of the second special symbol (T3 shown in FIG. 10-13 (B)). (At the timing of), the blackout effect is executed in the image display device 5. With the blackout effect in the present embodiment, the visibility of the background image, the decorative pattern, and the reach effect image is reduced by displaying the darkened image 06TM200 as a covering image covering the entire display screen of the image display device 5. It is a production that makes it difficult to see. In this embodiment, the background image and the decorative pattern are in a visually difficult state by executing the blackout effect.

Here, due to the blackout effect, the decorative design becomes difficult to see, but the first small design and the second small design remain visible. That is, the visibility of the decorative design of "2" which is stopped and displayed in the symbol display area 5L and the symbol display area 5R, and the decorative pattern which is variably displayed in the symbol display area 5C is reduced, while the first small The first small symbol that is variably displayed in the symbol display area 5l1, the first small symbol display area 5c1, and the first small symbol display area 5r1, and the second small symbol display area 5l2, the second small symbol display area 5c2, And the visibility of the second small symbol that is variably displayed in the second small symbol display area 5r2 is not deteriorated.

Next, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (B4), at a timing when the display result of the second special symbol that has been performing the variable display is “big hit” (FIG. 10-13 (B)). At the timing of T4 shown in (1), the occurrence of the big hit is notified by displaying the characters "FEVER" in the central portion (the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R) of the image display device 5. Then, the second small symbol display area 5l2 has a second small symbol "7", the second small symbol display area 5c2 has a second small symbol "7", and the second small symbol display area 5r2 has a second small symbol. "7" is fixedly stopped. That is, the combination of the decorative design and the second small design in which the display result of the second special design is "big hit" is fixedly stopped.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 10-7 described above, in the first special symbol variation process, if the big hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B (YES in step 026IWS1124A), for effect control The control for transmitting the first compulsory symbol confirmation designation command to the CPU 120 is performed (step S06TM1210A), and the variable display of the first special symbol is controlled to be forced out. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (B4), the production control CPU 120 that has received the first compulsory symbol determination designation command, the first small symbol "2", the first small symbol in the first small symbol display area 5l1. The first small symbol "4" in the symbol display area 5c1 and the first small symbol "7" in the first small symbol display area 5r1 are fixedly stopped. That is, the combination of the first small symbols for which the display result of the first special symbol is “out” is fixedly stopped.

As shown in FIG. 10-14 (A4), when the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol corresponding to the decorative pattern is "big hit", a combination of the decorative patterns to be a big hit (in this example, "222") ) Is being performed while the effect of stopping display is being executed, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (B4), when the display result of the variable display of the second special symbol that does not correspond to the decorative symbol is "big hit", the big hit The occurrence of the big hit is notified by displaying the character "FEVER" without executing the effect of stopping and displaying the combination of the decorative patterns. Temporarily, the special design corresponding to the decorative design (main design) is switched from one special design to the other special design during the variable display (for example, switching from the first special design to the second special design). If it is executed, it becomes unclear which special symbol the display result is, and the player may mistakenly recognize it. Therefore, when the display result of the variable display of the special symbol (sub symbol) that does not correspond to the decorative symbol is a big hit, by not performing the effect of displaying the combination of the decorative symbols that are the big hit, the display result of any special symbol It is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing whether or not it was a big hit.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-14 (A3) and (A4), when the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol (main symbol) corresponding to the decorative symbol is "big hit", the movable body 06TM100 is tilted. While performing the movable body motion effect to move from the position to the standing position, as shown in FIGS. 10-14 (B3) and (B4), the variation of the second special symbol (sub symbol) that does not correspond to the decorative symbol When the display result of the display is "big hit", the movable body motion effect is not executed. According to such a configuration, the player paying attention to the variable display of the decorative symbol has an irregular timing that is unexpected (in this example, the first special symbol, which is the main symbol, is the sub symbol during the variable symbol display). It is possible to prevent the interest of the movable body motion production with high expectation from being lowered by the movable body motion production being executed at the timing when the variable display result of the 2 special symbols becomes “big hit”). .

(Process when power is restored)
Next, the processing when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is restored from the power failure will be specifically described. In this embodiment, when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started after the power is turned off, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated and the CPU 103 executes the game control main process. As shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 designates that the power supply is restored from the power failure (designates to display the restoration screen) in the process of command transmission (step S7) at the time of restoration in the game control main process. The one designation command, and the first reserve storage number designation command and the second reserve storage number designation command are transmitted to the effect control CPU 120. In addition, when at least one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is variably displayed when the power is turned off, in addition to the above command, a display designating the display result of the variable display of the special symbol that has been executed A result designation command (display result 1 designation command to display result 8 designation command) is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120.

Next, when the CPU 103 executes the process of interrupt permission (step S12) in the game control main process, it enters a loop process. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing. When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG.

Then, the CPU 103, in the command control process (step S27) in the game control timer interrupt process, data indicating the game situation backed up in the RAM 102 when the power is cut off (game state, and variation state of the first special symbol and A set of commands according to the second special symbol variation status, etc.) is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 within one interruption. These commands include a customer waiting demo designation command (first customer waiting demo display designation command, second customer waiting demo display designation command) that designates the first customer waiting state or the second customer waiting state, and the game state. Background designation command (low-confidence/non-KT background designation command, low-precision/first KT background designation command, high-precision/first KT background designation command, high-precision/second KT background designation command) that specifies the corresponding background display, and a pattern Confirmation designation commands (first symbol confirmation designation command, second symbol confirmation designation command) and the like are included.

In the following description, on the restoration screen displayed on the image display device 5, (1) restoration image corresponding to the main symbol, (2) restoration image corresponding to the sub symbol, and (3) each production symbol (decoration) The design, the first small design, the second small design) and the background image are displayed in a superimposed manner. Regarding these images (1) to (3), the image with the highest display priority (the image that appears to be displayed closest to the foreground) is the (1) restored image corresponding to the main symbol, and the display priority is The second highest image (an image that seems to be displayed behind (1) in front of (3)) is a restored image corresponding to (2) sub-patterns, and has the highest display priority. The low image (the image that seems to be displayed at the back) is (3) each effect design and background image.

When the production control CPU 120 receives the power failure recovery 1 designation command, it executes the display control of both (1) the restoration image corresponding to the main symbol and (2) the restoration image corresponding to the sub symbol. .. In the present embodiment, the restoration image corresponding to the main symbol is an image in which the characters "power failure is being restored" are displayed on the entire screen, so (1) when the restoration image corresponding to the main symbol is displayed, The restoration image corresponding to the (2) sub-symbol whose display priority is lower than that becomes a state in which the player cannot visually recognize it. As a result, the recovery screen becomes the one in which the characters "recovering power failure" are displayed on the entire screen (similar to situation 2 and situation 6 shown in FIG. 10-18 described later).

10-15 shows an example of a command transmitted from the CPU 103 to the effect control CPU 120 when the power is restored. These commands are, as described above, the power failure recovery 1 designation command, the first reserved storage number designation command and the second reserved storage number designation command, and the display result designation command and the second special symbol corresponding to the first special symbol. Is sent by interrupt processing after sending the display result specification command corresponding to. In addition, in FIG. 10-15, although the typical situation is shown as the variation situation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol at the time of power-off, the variation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol at the time of power-off It is also possible to send commands corresponding to other situations.

"Situation 1" of FIG. 10-15 shows the situation when the second special symbol is in the second customer waiting state and the first special symbol is in the first customer waiting state as the fluctuation state at the time of power off. There is. In the case of "Situation 1", the CPU 103 performs the following order of background designation command -> second customer waiting demo display designation command -> background designation command -> first customer waiting demo display designation command in the same interrupt process when power is restored. Each command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120. Based on the background designation command, the CPU 120 for effect control controls the game state ((i) low-accuracy/non-KT state (normal state), (ii) low-accuracy/first KT state, and (iii) high-accuracy/second based on the background designation command. It is possible to specify 1 KT state, (iv) high accuracy/second KT state). It should be noted that the first customer waiting demo display designating command is transmitted based on the fact that the number of first holding memories when the power is turned off is 0, and the second customer waiting demo display designating command is the second holding memory when the power is turned off. Sent based on the number being zero.

"Situation 2" of FIG. 10-15 shows that the second special symbol is in the second customer waiting state, the first special symbol is variably displayed, and the remaining time of the variability display is 8 ms. The situation when it is above is shown. In the case of “Situation 2”, the CPU 103 transmits each command to the effect control CPU 120 in the order of background designation command→second customer waiting demo display designation command in the same interrupt process when the power is restored.

"Situation 3" of FIG. 10-15 shows that the second special symbol is in the second customer waiting state, the first special symbol is variably displayed, and the remaining time of the variability display is 4 ms as the variation condition at the time of power off Shows the situation when In the case of "Situation 3", the CPU 103 controls each command in the same interrupt process when the power is restored, in the order of background designation command -> second customer waiting demo display designation command -> first symbol confirmation designation command It is transmitted to the CPU 120. The production control CPU 120, based on the reception of the background designation command and the first special symbol confirmation designation command, when the first special symbol is the main symbol, the decoration symbol and the first small symbol are fixedly stopped. If the first special symbol is a sub symbol, the first small symbol is fixedly stopped.

"Situation 4" of FIG. 10-15 is, as a fluctuation situation at the time of power-off, the second special symbol is variably displayed and the remaining time of the variability display is 8 ms or more, and the first special symbol is waiting for the first customer. It shows the situation when it is in a state. In the case of “Situation 4”, the CPU 103 transmits each command to the effect control CPU 120 in the order of background designation command→first customer waiting demo display designation command in the same interrupt process when the power is restored.

"Situation 5" of FIG. 10-15 is, as the fluctuation status at the time of power off, the second special symbol is being variably displayed and the remaining time of the variability display is 4 ms, and the first special symbol is the first customer waiting state. Shows the situation when In the case of “Situation 5”, the CPU 103 controls the production of the respective commands in the order of the second symbol confirmation designation command→background designation command→first customer waiting demonstration display designation command in the same interrupt process when the power is restored. It is transmitted to the CPU 120.

"Situation 6" of FIG. 10-15 is, as the fluctuation state at the time of power-off, the second special symbol is being variably displayed and the remaining time of the variable display is 8 ms or more, and the first special symbol is being variably displayed. It shows the situation when there is and the remaining time of the variable display is 8 ms or more. In the case of "Situation 6", the CPU 103 does not transmit the command to the effect control CPU 120 in the interrupt process at the time of power restoration.

(Recovery screen)
Further, FIGS. 10 to 15 show an example of a restoration screen displayed on the image display device 5 when the power is restored. The effect control CPU 120 can display a different type of recovery screen depending on each of the above-mentioned “situation 1” to “situation 6” game situations. In the example shown in FIG. 10-15, the game state at the time of power failure occurrence is controlled to a low accuracy/non-KT state (normal state), the main symbol is the first special symbol, and the sub symbol is the second symbol. This is an example of the case where the special design is used.

In the case of “Situation 1”, the effect control CPU 120 turns off the power based on the reception of the low-accuracy/non-KT background designating command, the first customer waiting demo display designating command, and the second customer waiting demo display designating command. It is possible to specify that the gaming state at the time of occurrence is a low probability/non-KT state (normal state), the main symbol is the first special symbol, and the sub symbol is the second special symbol. Further, since the variable display of the main symbol is not executed and the variable display of the sub symbol is not executed, (1) the display control of the restored image corresponding to the main symbol is not executed, and (2 ) The display control of the restored image corresponding to the sub-symbol is not executed, and (3) only the display control of each production design (decorative design, the first small design, the second small design) and the background image is executed.

That is, the CPU 120 for effect control displays the "sunny image" as the background image of the decorative pattern, and causes the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5 to deviate from the decorative pattern at the time of restoration (in this example, in this example). "247") is displayed, and in the first small symbol display areas 5l1, 5c1, 5r1 of the image display device 5, a deviating symbol ("247" in this example) is displayed as the first small symbol at the time of restoration, and the image is displayed. In the second small symbol display areas 512, 5c2, 5r2 of the device 5, a deviating symbol (“152” in this example) is displayed as the second small symbol at the time of restoration. Further, "0" is displayed in the first reserved memory number special display area 06TM015 based on the first reserved memory number being 0, and the second reserved memory number is based on the second reserved memory number being 0. “0” is displayed in the memory number special display area 06TM025.

In the case of “Situation 2”, the effect control CPU 120 receives the low-accuracy/non-KT background designating command and the second customer waiting demonstration display designating command, and the gaming state at the time of power outage is low/non-determining. In the KT state (normal state), it is possible to specify that the main symbol is the first special symbol and the sub symbol is the second special symbol. Further, since the variable display of the main symbol is being executed and the variable display of the sub symbol is not being executed, (1) the display control of the restored image corresponding to the main symbol is executed, and (2) the sub Display control of the restored image corresponding to the design is not executed, and (3) display control of each production design (decorative design, first small design, second small design) and background image is executed.

CPU120 for production control, (1) display control of the restoration image corresponding to the main symbol, and (3) display control of each production symbol (decorative symbol, first small symbol, second small symbol) and background image. As a result of execution, the display priority is high and is displayed over the entire screen (1) Only the restored image corresponding to the main symbol is displayed on the screen. That is, the character string “Power supply is being restored” is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5.

In the case of "Situation 3", the production control CPU 120 turns off the power based on the reception of the low-probability/non-KT background designating command, the second customer waiting demo display designating command, and the first symbol designating confirming designation command. It is possible to specify that the gaming state at the time of occurrence is a low probability/non-KT state (normal state), the main symbol is the first special symbol, and the sub symbol is the second special symbol. In addition, it is the timing to fix the main symbol (that is, the timing to display the decorative symbol in the fixed stopped state and the first small symbol in the fixed stopped state), and the variable display of the sub symbol is not executed. Therefore, (1) the display control of the restored image corresponding to the main symbol is not executed, (2) the display control of the restored image corresponding to the sub symbol is not executed, and (3) each effect design (decoration) Only the display control of the design, the first small design, the second small design) and the background image is executed.

That is, the effect control CPU 120 displays the "sunny image" as the background image of the decorative pattern, and leaves the state in which it is fixedly stopped as the decorative pattern at the time of restoration in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5. Display the symbol (“247” in this example), the first small symbol display area 5l1, 5c1, 5r1 of the image display device 5, in the state of definite stop as the first small symbol at the time of restoration (in this example) "247") is displayed, and the second small symbol display area 512, 5c2, 5r2 of the image display device 5 displays the deviating symbol ("152" in this example) as the second small symbol at the time of restoration. Further, "0" is displayed in the first reserved memory number special display area 06TM015 based on the first reserved memory number being 0, and the second reserved memory number is based on the second reserved memory number being 0. “0” is displayed in the memory number special display area 06TM025.

In the case of "Situation 4", the production control CPU 120 receives the low-accuracy/non-KT background designating command and the first customer waiting demo display designating command, and the gaming state at the time of power failure is low/non-determining. In the KT state (normal state), it is possible to specify that the main symbol is the first special symbol and the sub symbol is the second special symbol. Further, since the variable display of the main symbol is not executed and the variable display of the sub symbol is being executed, (1) the display control of the restored image corresponding to the main symbol is not executed, and (2 ) Display control of the restored image corresponding to the sub-symbol is executed, and (3) display control of each production design (decorative design, first small design, second small design) and background image is executed.

CPU120 for production control, (2) display control of the restoration image corresponding to the sub-design, and (3) display control of each production design (decorative design, first small design, second small design) and background image. As a result of execution, (2) the restored image corresponding to the sub-symbol, and (3) each effect design (decorative design, first small design, second small design) and the background image are displayed in a superimposed manner. Here, the image whose display priority is high is (2) the restoration image corresponding to the sub symbol, but the display range of the restoration image corresponding to the (2) sub symbol is the display range of the sub symbol (in the case of the first small symbol) Is limited to the upper left part of the screen, the upper right part of the screen in the case of the second small symbol), except for the part of the restored image corresponding to the sub-pattern (the upper right part of the screen in this example), (3) each effect The design (decorative design and first small design) and the background image can be visually recognized. As a result, the display range of the restored image corresponding to the sub-symbol (in this example, the upper right part of the screen which is the display range of the second small symbol) is displayed as "restoring", and the other portions are each production symbols. (Decorative pattern and first small pattern) and the background image will be displayed.

In the case of "Situation 5", the production control CPU 120 receives the second symbol confirmation designating command, the low probability/non-KT background designating command, and the first customer waiting demonstration display designating command, and when the power is cut off. It is possible to specify that the gaming state is a low probability/non-KT state (normal state), the main symbol is the first special symbol, and the sub symbol is the second special symbol. In addition, since the variable display of the main symbol is not executed, it is the timing to fix the sub symbol (that is, the timing to display the second small symbol in the fixed stop state), (1) the main symbol The display control of the restoration image corresponding to the is not executed, (2) the display control of the restoration image corresponding to the sub-symbol is not executed, and (3) each production design (decorative design, first small design, second small design) Only the display control of the pattern) and the background image is executed.

That is, the CPU 120 for effect control displays the "sunny image" as the background image of the decorative pattern, and causes the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5 to deviate from the decorative pattern at the time of restoration (in this example, in this example). "247") is displayed, and in the first small symbol display areas 5l1, 5c1, 5r1 of the image display device 5, a deviating symbol ("247" in this example) is displayed as the first small symbol at the time of restoration, and the image is displayed. In the second small symbol display areas 5l2, 5c2, 5r2 of the device 5, an outlying symbol (“152” in this example) in the state of being fixedly stopped as the second small symbol at the time of restoration is displayed. Further, "0" is displayed in the first reserved memory number special display area 06TM015 based on the first reserved memory number being 0, and the second reserved memory number is based on the second reserved memory number being 0. “0” is displayed in the memory number special display area 06TM025.

In the case of "Situation 6", the CPU 120 for effect control does not receive the command, so it is impossible to specify the game state at the time of power failure, and the main symbol and the sub symbol. Therefore, based on the reception of the power failure recovery 1 designation command, the display control of both (1) the restoration image corresponding to the main symbol and (2) the restoration image corresponding to the sub symbol is being executed. Then, as described above, (1) the restoration image corresponding to the main symbol and (2) the restoration image corresponding to the sub symbol having a lower display priority than this are superimposed and displayed, and as a result, the restoration screen is the screen. The word "Recovery from power failure" is displayed on the whole screen.

In this example, when the power is cut off, the gaming state is controlled to the low-probability/non-KT state. However, when the power is cut off, the gaming state is high-probability/ If the KT state is controlled to any one of the second KT state, the high-accuracy/first KT state, and the low-probability/first KT state, the background designation command corresponding to each KT state is transmitted. Then, the effect control CPU 120 that has received the background designation command can specify that the main symbol is the second special symbol and the sub symbol is the first special symbol together with the game state (which KT state it is). Is.

For example, the game state is controlled to high accuracy / second KT state, the variable display of the second special symbol which is the main symbol is not executed, and the variable display of the first special symbol which is the sub symbol is executed. If the power is cut off while the power is on, this corresponds to the case shown in “Situation 2” of FIG. 10-15. In this case, the production control CPU 120 does not execute (1) display control of the restoration image corresponding to the second special symbol which is the main symbol, and (2) restoration image corresponding to the first special symbol which is the sub symbol. Display control is executed, and (3) display control of each effect design (decorative design, first small design, second small design) and background image (typhoon image in this example) is executed.

CPU120 for production control, (2) display control of the restoration image corresponding to the sub-design, and (3) display control of each production design (decorative design, first small design, second small design) and background image. As a result of execution, (2) the restored image corresponding to the sub-symbol, and (3) each effect design (decorative design, first small design, second small design) and the background image are displayed in a superimposed manner. Here, the image whose display priority is high is (2) the restored image corresponding to the sub symbol, but (2) the display range of the restored image corresponding to the sub symbol is the display range of the sub symbol (in the case of the first small symbol) Is limited to the upper left part of the screen, the upper right part of the screen in the case of the second small symbol), except for the part of the restored image corresponding to the sub-pattern (in the upper left part of the screen in this example), (3) each effect The design (decorative design and second small design) and the background image (typhoon image in this example) can be visually recognized. As a result, the display range of the restored image corresponding to the sub-symbol (in this example, the upper left portion of the screen which is the display range of the first small symbol) is displayed as "restoring", and the other parts are each production symbol. (Decorative pattern and second small pattern) and the background image will be displayed.

In this way, the CPU 103 is a command for identifying the gaming state when the power failure occurs, and the variation status of the first special symbol and the variation status of the second special symbol when the power failure is restored. The set can be transmitted to the CPU 120 for effect control. Then, the effect control CPU 120 that has received the set of the commands is different depending on the gaming state specified based on the set of the commands, and the changing situation of the first special symbol and the changing situation of the second special symbol. A mode recovery screen can be displayed. According to such a configuration, in the gaming machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be displayed in parallel in parallel, it is possible to perform appropriate notification regarding the power-off recovery.

(Specific example of recovery screen in situation 6)
Next, as shown in the above-mentioned “Situation 6”, a specific example of a case where the power is cut off when the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are executed in parallel. Will be described. In this example, when the power is cut off, the gaming state is controlled to a low accuracy/non-KT state (normal state) (that is, the main symbol is the first special symbol and the sub symbol is the second special symbol). Yes), the first number of pending storages is 0, and the number of second pending storages is 0. As described above, in the “situation 6”, the effect control CPU 120 receives (1) the restoration image corresponding to the main symbol and (2) the restoration corresponding to the sub symbol based on the reception of the power failure restoration 1 designation command. This is a state in which display control of both images is being performed. Then, as described above, (1) the restoration image corresponding to the main symbol and (2) the restoration image corresponding to the sub symbol having a lower display priority than this are superimposed and displayed, and as a result, the restoration screen is the screen. The text "Recovery from power failure" is displayed throughout.

As shown in FIG. 10-16 (A), after the recovery from the power failure, the variable display of the first special symbol that was being executed when the power failure occurred and the second special symbol that was being executed when the power failure occurred When the variable display of the first special symbol ends earlier than the variable display of the second special symbol while executing the variable display in parallel, the CPU 103 determines that the first reserved memory number is 0, , The first customer waiting demonstration display designation command and the background designation command are transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 026IWS52A in FIG. 10C).

Based on the reception of the first customer waiting demonstration display designation command and the background designation command, the production control CPU 120 terminates (1) the display control of the restored image corresponding to the main symbol, and (3) each production. A design (decorative design, first small design, second small design) and a background image (clear image in this example) are displayed. However, regarding the second special symbol, since the second customer waiting demonstration display designation command and the background designation command have not been received, and neither the variation pattern command nor the background designation command have been received, (2) corresponding to the sub symbol The display control of the restored image continues. Accordingly, (2) the restored image corresponding to the sub-symbol and (3) each effect design (decorative design, first small design, second small design) and background image (clear image in this example) are displayed in a superimposed manner. It will be. As a result, the display range of the restored image corresponding to the sub-symbol (in this example, the upper right part of the screen which is the display range of the second small symbol) is displayed as "restoring", and the other parts are each production symbol. The (decorative pattern and the first small pattern) and the background image (the clear image in this example) are displayed.

Here, when the number of the first reserved storage is 1 or more when the power is cut off, the CPU 103, after recovering from the power cut, ends the variable display of the first special symbol that is being executed when the power is cut off. After that, the first customer waiting demonstration display designation command and the background designation command are not transmitted, but when the next variable display of the first special symbol is started, the variation pattern command and the background designation command will be transmitted (FIG. 10). -3 step 026IWS56A, FIG. 9-15 step 026IWS1704A). The production control CPU 120 that has received the variation pattern command and the background designation command ends (1) the display control of the restored image corresponding to the main design, and (3) each production design (decorative design, the first small design, A second small pattern) and a background image (a clear image in this example) are displayed. As a result, the display range of the restored image corresponding to the sub-symbol (in this example, the upper right part of the screen which is the display range of the second small symbol) is displayed as "restoring", and the other parts are each production symbol. The (decorative pattern and the first small pattern) and the background image (the clear image in this example) are displayed.

As shown in FIG. 10-16(B), after the recovery from the power failure, the variable display of the first special symbol that was being executed when the power failure occurred and the second special symbol that was being executed when the power failure occurred When the variable display of the second special symbol ends earlier than the variable display of the first special symbol when the variable display is being executed in parallel, the second reserved storage number is 0, so the CPU 103 , A second customer waiting demonstration display designation command and a background designation command are transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 026IWS52B in FIG. 10-4).

Based on the reception of the second customer waiting demo display designation command and the background designation command, the production control CPU 120 terminates (2) the display control of the restored image corresponding to the sub symbol, and (3) for each production. A design (decorative design, first small design, second small design) and a background image (clear image in this example) are displayed. However, regarding the first special symbol, since the first customer waiting demo display designation command and the background designation command have not been received, and neither the variation pattern command nor the background designation command have been received, (1) corresponding to the main symbol The display control of the restored image continues. Therefore, (1) a restored image corresponding to the main symbol, and (3) each effect symbol (decorative symbol, first small symbol, second small symbol) and background image (clear image in this example) are displayed in a superimposed manner. It will be. Then, (1) the restored image corresponding to the main symbol, and the display priority lower than this (3) each effect symbol (decorative symbol, first small symbol, second small symbol) and background image (in this example) As a result of the superimposition of (a clear image), the recovery screen is displayed with the words "recovering power failure" on the entire screen.

Here, when the number of the second pending storage is 1 or more at the time of the power failure, the CPU 103, after recovering from the power failure, ends the variable display of the second special symbol that was being executed at the time of the power failure. After that, the second customer waiting demonstration display designation command and the background designation command are not transmitted, but when the next variable display of the second special symbol is started, the variation pattern command and the background designation command will be transmitted (FIG. 10). -4 step 026IWS56B etc.). The production control CPU 120 that has received the variation pattern command and the background designation command ends the display control of the restored image corresponding to the sub-design (2), and (3) each production design (decorative design, first small design, A second small pattern) and a background image (a clear image in this example) are displayed. Then, (1) the restored image corresponding to the main symbol, and the display priority lower than this (3) each effect symbol (decorative symbol, first small symbol, second small symbol) and background image (in this example) As a result of the superimposition of (a clear image), the recovery screen is displayed with the words "recovering power failure" on the entire screen.

As shown in FIG. 10-16(C), after the power is restored, the variable display of the first special symbol that is being executed when the power is cut off and the second special symbol that is being executed when the power is cut off are displayed. When the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are completed when the variable display is executed in parallel, the first reserved memory number is 0 and the second reserved memory number is also 0. Therefore, the CPU 103 transmits the first customer waiting demo display designation command and the background designation command, and the second customer waiting demo display designation command and the background designation command to the production control CPU 120 (step 026IWS52A of FIG. 10C). , Step 026IWS52B of FIG. 10-4).

The production control CPU 120 receives the first customer waiting demo display designating command and the background designating command, and the second customer waiting demo display designating command and the background designating command, based on (1) restoration corresponding to the main symbol. The display control of the image is terminated, and (2) the display control of the restored image corresponding to the sub-symbol is terminated, and (3) each production design (decorative design, first small design, second small design) and background image (A clear image in this example) is displayed. As a result, (3) only each production design (decorative design, first small design, second small design) and background image (clear image in this example) are displayed. In this way, (1) display control of the restored image corresponding to the main symbol and (2) display control of the restored image corresponding to the sub symbol are ended at the same time, and (3) each production symbol (decorative symbol, It is possible to display only the first small symbol, the second small symbol) and the background image (the clear image in this example).

Here, when the number of the first pending storage is 1 or more and the number of the second pending storage is 1 or more at the time of the power failure, the CPU 103 displays the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol. When is finished, the first customer waiting demo display designating command and background designating command, and the second customer waiting demo display designating command and background designating command are not transmitted, but the next variable display of the first special symbol and the next When starting the variation display of the second special symbol, the variation pattern command and the background designation command corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol, and the variation pattern command and the background designation command corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol. Is transmitted (step 026IWS56A in FIG. 10-3, step 026IWS1704A in FIG. 9-15, step 026IWS56B in FIG. 10-4, etc.).

The production control CPU 120 is based on receiving the variation pattern command and the background designation command corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol, and the variation pattern command and the background designation command corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol. Then, (1) the display control of the restoration image corresponding to the main symbol is terminated, (2) the display control of the restoration image corresponding to the sub symbol is terminated, and (3) each production symbol (decorative symbol, first A small pattern, a second small pattern) and a background image (a clear image in this example) are displayed. As a result, (3) only each production design (decorative design, first small design, second small design) and background image (clear image in this example) are displayed. In this way, (1) display control of the restored image corresponding to the main symbol and (2) display control of the restored image corresponding to the sub symbol are ended at the same time, and (3) each production symbol (decorative symbol, It is possible to display only the first small symbol, the second small symbol) and the background image (the clear image in this example).

In addition, based on the fact that the number of the first reserved memory is 0 and the number of the second reserved memory is 1 or more when the power is cut off, after the power is restored, the first customer waiting demo corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol When the display designation command and the background designation command, and the variation pattern command and the background designation command corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol are transmitted, the production control CPU 120 that has received these commands is (1) the main symbol. End the display control of the restoration image corresponding to, and (2) end the display control of the restoration image corresponding to the sub-symbol, (3) each production design (decorative design, the first small symbol, the second small symbol) ) And a background image (a clear image in this example) are displayed. As a result, (3) only each production design (decorative design, first small design, second small design) and background image (clear image in this example) are displayed. In this way, (1) display control of the restored image corresponding to the main symbol and (2) display control of the restored image corresponding to the sub symbol are ended at the same time, and (3) each production symbol (decorative symbol, It is possible to display only the first small symbol, the second small symbol) and the background image (the clear image in this example).

In addition, based on the fact that the first number of pending storage is 1 or more and the number of second pending storage is 0 when the power is cut off, after the power is restored, the variation pattern command and the background corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol When the designated command and the second customer waiting demo display designated command and the background designated command corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol are transmitted, the CPU 120 for effect control which has received these commands, (1) the main symbol End the display control of the restoration image corresponding to, and (2) end the display control of the restoration image corresponding to the sub-symbol, (3) each production design (decorative design, the first small symbol, the second small symbol) ) And a background image (a clear image in this example) are displayed. As a result, (3) only each production design (decorative design, first small design, second small design) and background image (clear image in this example) are displayed. In this way, (1) display control of the restored image corresponding to the main symbol and (2) display control of the restored image corresponding to the sub symbol are ended at the same time, and (3) each production symbol (decorative symbol, It is possible to display only the first small symbol, the second small symbol) and the background image (the clear image in this example).

FIG. 10-17 is a diagram showing an example of screen transition in the case where power failure occurs in the low accuracy/non-KT state. As shown in FIG. 10-17, the gaming state is controlled to a low-probability/non-KT state (main symbol: first special symbol, sub symbol: second special symbol), and a variable display and first of the first special symbol. When the variable display of the two special symbols is executed in parallel, it is assumed that the power is cut off (timing of T1 shown in FIG. 10-17). At this time, the first pending storage number is 0 and the second pending storage number is 0.

When the power is turned on (timing T2 shown in FIG. 10-17), the CPU 103 is a command transmission at the time of restoration in the game control main processing (step S7), the power failure restoration 1 designation command, the first reserved memory number. The designation command and the second reserved storage number designation command, and the display result designation command corresponding to the first special symbol and the display result designation command corresponding to the second special symbol are transmitted to the effect control CPU 120. At this time, (1) the restoration image corresponding to the main symbol and the restoration image corresponding to the (2) sub symbol having a lower display priority than this are displayed in a superimposed manner, and as a result, the restoration screen displays "power failure" on the entire screen. The word "Recovering" is displayed.

Further, as shown in "Situation 6" of FIG. 10-15, even after the interruption permission (step S12) is performed in the game control main process and the game control timer interrupt process is executed, the transmission at the time of restoration Since the command set is not sent, the message "Recovery from power failure" is displayed on the entire screen and does not change. Here, since the game control timer interrupt process is executed, the variable display of the first special symbol that was interrupted by the power interruption is resumed, and the variable display of the second special symbol that was interrupted by the power interruption is resumed. (T3 timing shown in FIG. 10-17).

Then, when the variable display of the first special symbol is completed (timing T4 shown in FIG. 10-17), the CPU 103 determines that the first customer waiting demonstration display designation command and The background designating command is transmitted to the CPU 120 for effect control. Based on the reception of the first customer waiting demonstration display designation command and the background designation command, the production control CPU 120 terminates (1) the display control of the restored image corresponding to the main symbol, and (3) each production. A design (decorative design, first small design, second small design) and a background image (clear image in this example) are displayed. However, regarding the second special symbol, since the second customer waiting demonstration display designation command and the background designation command have not been received, and neither the variation pattern command nor the background designation command have been received, (2) corresponding to the sub symbol The display control of the restored image continues. Accordingly, (2) the restored image corresponding to the sub-symbol and (3) each effect design (decorative design, first small design, second small design) and background image (clear image in this example) are displayed in a superimposed manner. It will be. As a result, the display range of the restored image corresponding to the sub-symbol (in this example, the upper right part of the screen which is the display range of the second small symbol) is displayed as "restoring", and the other parts are each production symbol. The (decorative pattern and the first small pattern) and the background image (the clear image in this example) are displayed.

Then, when the variable display of the second special symbol ends (timing of T5 shown in FIG. 10-17), the CPU 103, based on that the second number of reserved memories is 0, the second customer waiting demonstration display designation command and The background designating command is transmitted to the CPU 120 for effect control. Based on the reception of the second customer waiting demonstration display designation command and the background designation command, the effect control CPU 120 terminates (2) display control of the restored image corresponding to the sub symbol. As a result, (3) only each production design (decorative design, first small design, second small design) and background image (clear image in this example) are displayed.

FIG. 10-18 is a diagram showing an example of screen transition in the case of power failure in the low accuracy/non-KT state. As shown in FIG. 10-18, the gaming state is controlled to a low-probability/non-KT state (main symbol: first special symbol, sub symbol: second special symbol), and a variable display of the first special symbol and When the variable display of the two special symbols is executed in parallel, it is assumed that the power is cut off (timing of T1 shown in FIG. 10-18). At this time, the first pending storage number is 0 and the second pending storage number is 0.

When the power is turned on (timing of T2 shown in FIG. 10-18), the CPU 103 is a command transmission (step S7) process at the time of recovery in the game control main process, and is a power failure recovery 1 designation command, first number of pending storages. The designation command and the second reserved storage number designation command, and the display result designation command corresponding to the first special symbol and the display result designation command corresponding to the second special symbol are transmitted to the effect control CPU 120. At this time, (1) the restoration image corresponding to the main symbol and the restoration image corresponding to the (2) sub symbol having a lower display priority than this are displayed in a superimposed manner, and as a result, the restoration screen displays "power failure" on the entire screen. The word "Recovering" is displayed.

Further, as shown in "Situation 6" of FIG. 10-15, even after the interruption permission (step S12) is performed in the game control main process and the game control timer interrupt process is executed, the transmission at the time of restoration Since the command set is not sent, the message "Recovery from power failure" is displayed on the entire screen and does not change. Here, because the game control timer interrupt process is executed, the variable display of the first special symbol that was interrupted by the power interruption is resumed, and the variable display of the second special symbol that was interrupted by the power interruption is resumed. (Timing of T3 shown in FIG. 10-18).

Then, when the variable display of the second special symbol ends (timing T4 shown in FIG. 10-18), the CPU 103, based on the fact that the second reserved memory number is 0, the second customer waiting demonstration display designation command and The background designating command is transmitted to the CPU 120 for effect control. Based on the reception of the second customer waiting demo display designation command and the background designation command, the production control CPU 120 terminates (2) the display control of the restored image corresponding to the sub symbol, and (3) for each production. A design (decorative design, first small design, second small design) and a background image (clear image in this example) are displayed. However, regarding the first special symbol, since the first customer waiting demo display designation command and the background designation command have not been received, and neither the variation pattern command nor the background designation command have been received, (1) corresponding to the main symbol The display control of the restored image continues. Therefore, (1) a restored image corresponding to the main symbol, and (3) each effect symbol (decorative symbol, first small symbol, second small symbol) and background image (clear image in this example) are displayed in a superimposed manner. It will be. As a result, the word "Recovery from power failure" remains displayed on the entire screen.

Then, when the variable display of the first special symbol is completed (timing of T5 shown in FIG. 10-18), based on that the first number of reserved memories is 0, the CPU 103 causes the first customer waiting demonstration display designation command and The background designating command is transmitted to the CPU 120 for effect control. Based on the reception of the first customer waiting demonstration display designation command and the background designation command, the effect control CPU 120 terminates (1) display control of the restored image corresponding to the main symbol. As a result, (3) only each production design (decorative design, first small design, second small design) and background image (clear image in this example) are displayed.

FIG. 10-19 is a diagram showing an example of screen transition in the case of power failure in the high accuracy/second KT state. As shown in FIG. 10-19, the gaming state is controlled to a high-precision/second KT state (main symbol: second special symbol, sub symbol: first special symbol), and variable display of the first special symbol and When the variable display of the two special symbols is executed in parallel, it is assumed that the power is cut off (timing of T1 shown in FIG. 10-19). At this time, the first pending storage number is 0 and the second pending storage number is 0.

When the power is turned on (timing T2 shown in FIG. 10-19), the CPU 103 is a command transmission (step S7) process at the time of recovery in the game control main process, and a power failure recovery 1 designation command, first reserved memory count. The designation command and the second reserved storage number designation command, and the display result designation command corresponding to the first special symbol and the display result designation command corresponding to the second special symbol are transmitted to the effect control CPU 120. At this time, (1) the restoration image corresponding to the main symbol and the restoration image corresponding to the (2) sub symbol having a lower display priority than this are displayed in a superimposed manner, and as a result, the restoration screen displays "power failure" on the entire screen. The word "Recovering" is displayed.

Further, as shown in "Situation 6" of FIG. 10-15, even after the interruption permission (step S12) is performed in the game control main process and the game control timer interrupt process is executed, the transmission at the time of restoration Since the command set is not sent, the message "Recovery from power failure" is displayed on the entire screen and does not change. Here, since the game control timer interrupt process is executed, the variable display of the first special symbol that was interrupted by the power interruption is resumed, and the variable display of the second special symbol that was interrupted by the power interruption is resumed. (T3 timing shown in FIG. 10-19).

Then, when the variable display of the second special symbol is finished (timing of T4 shown in FIG. 10-19), the CPU 103 determines that the second customer waiting demonstration display designation command and The background designating command is transmitted to the CPU 120 for effect control. Based on the reception of the second customer waiting demonstration display designation command and the background designation command, the production control CPU 120 terminates (1) the display control of the restored image corresponding to the main symbol, and (3) for each production. A design (decorative design, first small design, second small design) and a background image (typhoon image in this example) are displayed. However, regarding the first special symbol, since the first customer waiting demo display designation command and the background designation command have not been received, and neither the variation pattern command nor the background designation command have been received, (2) corresponding to the sub symbol The display control of the restored image continues. Accordingly, (2) the restored image corresponding to the sub-symbol and (3) each effect design (decorative design, first small design, second small design) and background image (typhoon image in this example) are displayed in a superimposed manner. It will be. As a result, the display range of the restored image corresponding to the sub-symbol (in this example, the upper left part of the screen which is the display range of the first small symbol) is displayed as "restoring", and the other parts are each production symbols. The (decorative pattern and the second small pattern) and the background image (the typhoon image in this example) are displayed.

Then, when the variable display of the first special symbol is completed (timing T5 shown in FIG. 10-19), the CPU 103 determines that the first customer waiting demonstration display designating command and The background designating command is transmitted to the CPU 120 for effect control. Based on the reception of the first customer waiting demonstration display designation command and the background designation command, the effect control CPU 120 terminates the display control of the restored image corresponding to (2) the sub symbol. As a result, (3) each effect design (decorative design, first small design, second small design) and background image (typhoon image in this example) are displayed.

FIG. 10-20 is a diagram illustrating an example of screen transition when a power failure occurs in the high accuracy/second KT state. As shown in FIG. 10-20, the gaming state is controlled to a high-precision/second KT state (main symbol: second special symbol, sub symbol: first special symbol), and a variable display of the first special symbol and When the variable display of the two special symbols is executed in parallel, it is assumed that the power is cut off (timing of T1 shown in FIG. 10-20). At this time, the first pending storage number is 0 and the second pending storage number is 0.

When the power is turned on (timing T2 shown in FIG. 10-20), the CPU 103 is a command transmission (step S7) process at the time of recovery in the game control main process, and is a power failure recovery 1 designation command, first number of pending storages. The designation command and the second reserved storage number designation command, and the display result designation command corresponding to the first special symbol and the display result designation command corresponding to the second special symbol are transmitted to the effect control CPU 120. At this time, (1) the restoration image corresponding to the main symbol and the restoration image corresponding to the (2) sub symbol having a lower display priority than this are displayed in a superimposed manner, and as a result, the restoration screen displays "power failure" on the entire screen. The word "Recovering" is displayed.

Further, as shown in "Situation 6" of FIG. 10-15, even after the interruption permission (step S12) is performed in the game control main process and the game control timer interrupt process is executed, the transmission at the time of restoration Since the command set is not sent, the message "Recovery from power failure" is displayed on the entire screen and does not change. Here, because the game control timer interrupt process is executed, the variable display of the first special symbol that was interrupted by the power interruption is resumed, and the variable display of the second special symbol that was interrupted by the power interruption is resumed. (Timing of T3 shown in FIG. 10-20).

Then, when the variable display of the first special symbol is completed (timing T4 shown in FIG. 10-20), the CPU 103 determines that the first customer waiting demonstration display designation command and The background designating command is transmitted to the CPU 120 for effect control. Based on the reception of the first customer waiting demo display designation command and the background designation command, the production control CPU 120 terminates (2) the display control of the restored image corresponding to the sub symbol, and (3) for each production. A design (decorative design, first small design, second small design) and a background image (typhoon image in this example) are displayed. However, regarding the second special symbol, since the second customer waiting demonstration display designation command and the background designation command have not been received, and neither the variation pattern command nor the background designation command have been received, (1) corresponding to the main symbol The display control of the restored image continues. Therefore, (1) the restored image corresponding to the main symbol, and (3) each effect symbol (decorative symbol, first small symbol, second small symbol) and background image (typhoon image in this example) are displayed in a superimposed manner. It will be. As a result, the word "Recovery from power failure" remains displayed on the entire screen.

Then, when the variable display of the second special symbol ends (timing T5 shown in FIG. 10-20), based on the second number of reserved memories being 0, the CPU 103 causes the second customer waiting demonstration display designation command and The background designating command is transmitted to the CPU 120 for effect control. Based on the reception of the second customer waiting demonstration display designation command and the background designation command, the effect control CPU 120 ends (1) the display control of the restored image corresponding to the main symbol. As a result, (3) each effect design (decorative design, first small design, second small design) and background image (typhoon image in this example) are displayed.

As described above, when power failure occurs in a situation where the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol are executed in parallel, the game when the power interruption occurs It is possible to display the restoration screen in a different mode depending on the state, and the remaining variation time of the first special symbol and the remaining variation time of the second special symbol. Thereby, it becomes possible to notify the recovery process in an appropriate manner according to the variable display status of the main symbol and the variable display status of the sub symbol.

(Variation example when start winning occurs during demo display)
In the above-mentioned example, when the first demo display is being executed, when the small hit game state is controlled based on the variable display result of the second special symbol (the value of the second special symbol process flag is 9 to When the range is 11), the variable display of the first special symbol is not started, and whether or not the starting condition of the first special symbol is satisfied (the winning of the first starting winning opening has occurred). Whether or not), the execution of the first demo display continues. Not limited to such a form, when the first demonstration display is executed, the starting condition of the first special symbol is controlled when the small hit game state is controlled based on the variable display result of the second special symbol. The first demo display may be ended immediately when the conditions are satisfied. 10-21 and 10-22 are flowcharts showing modified examples of the demo display control process.

The processing of steps 026IWS4701 to 026IWS4714 shown in FIG. 10-21 is the same as the processing shown in FIG. The effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol is started in step 026IWS4714. When the variable display of the first special symbol is not started (NO in step 026IWS4714), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the first reserved memory number is 0 (step 06TM1400). When the first number of pending storages is 0 (YES in step 06TM1400), the processes after step 026IWS4715 shown in FIG. 9-38 are executed. That is, it is confirmed whether or not the big hit game state is started based on the variable display result of the second special symbol (step 026IWS4715), and if the big hit game state is started (YES in step 026IWS4715), the first demo display Is finished (step 026IWS4716), and the big hit game state is not started (step 026IWS4715 NO), the first demo display is continued.

On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 ends the first demo display (026IWS4716) when the first number of pending storages is not 0 (NO in step 06TM1400). That is, when executing the first demonstration display, regardless of whether or not it is controlled to the small hit game state based on the variable display result of the second special symbol, the starting condition of the first special symbol is satisfied. Immediately end the first demo display.

The processing of Step 026IWS4801 to Step 026IWS4814 shown in FIG. 10-22 is the same as the processing shown in FIG. The effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variable display of the second special symbol is started in step 026IWS4814. When the variable display of the second special symbol is not started (NO in step 026IWS4814), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the second reserved memory number is 0 (step 06TM1500). When the second number of pending storages is 0 (YES in step 06TM1500), the processing after step 026IWS4815 shown in FIG. 9-39 is executed. That is, it is confirmed whether or not the KT state is controlled (step 026IWS4815), and if the KT state is controlled (YES in step 026IWS4815), the second demo display is continued and the KT state must be controlled. If (NO in step 026IWS4815), the second demo display is ended (step 026IWS4816). That is, when the second demonstration display is being executed, regardless of whether or not the small hitting game state is controlled based on the variable display result of the first special symbol, the starting condition of the second special symbol is satisfied. Immediately end the first demo display.

In the present embodiment, when the gaming state is controlled to the small hitting gaming state, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not started. And, in the processing shown in FIGS. 9-38 and 9-39 described above, in the demo display control processing, even if the start winning to the winning ball apparatus 6A occurs, the variable display of the first special symbol is not started. The execution of the first demo display is continued, and since the variable display of the second special symbol is not started even if the start winning to the variable winning ball device 6B occurs, the execution of the second demo display is continued. On the other hand, in this modification, when the gaming state is controlled to the small hitting gaming state, the variable display of the first special symbol is not started, but as shown in FIG. 10-21, When the start winning to the winning ball apparatus 6A occurs and the first number of reserved memories becomes 1 (NO in step 06TM1400), the first demonstration display is immediately ended. Further, in this modification, when the gaming state is controlled to the small hitting gaming state, the variable display of the second special symbol is not started, but as shown in FIG. When the start winning for the ball device 6B occurs and the second number of reserved memories becomes 1 (YES in step 06TM1500), the second demonstration display is immediately ended.

Next, after the game state is controlled to the low-accuracy/non-KT state (normal mode), when the first demo display is being executed, it is a small hit based on the variable display of the second special symbol, and a small hit. 10-23 and 10-24 will be used to describe an example of an effect in the case where the game medium is started and won in the winning ball device 6A while being controlled to the game state. FIG. 10-23 is a modified example of the time chart showing the execution timing of each effect related to the first demo display and the start winning, and FIG. 10-24 is a modification of the effect image related to the first demo display and the starting winning. It is explanatory drawing which shows a modification.

As shown in FIG. 10-23(1), when the game state is controlled to the low accuracy/non-KT state (normal state), the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect mode to the normal mode. When the effect mode is the normal mode, a "sunny image" is displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern. The effect control CPU 120 executes the first demo display on the image display device 5, and displays the operation prompting display 06TM050 and the characters “menu” on the lower right portion of the screen of the image display device 5. Further, based on that the first reserved storage number is 0 and the second reserved storage number is 0, “0” is set in the first reserved storage number special display area 06TM015, and the second reserved storage number special display area 06TM025. "0" is displayed on.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the variable display is fixedly stopped based on that the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol executed last time (most recently executed) is “out”. The decorative design (2, 4, 7) is continuously displayed in the design display area (5L, 5C, 5R) even during the first demo display, and the small design (2, 4) when the variable display is fixedly stopped. , 7) is continuously displayed in the first small symbol display area (5l1, 5c1, 5r1).

On the other hand, the CPU 120 for effect control corresponds to the fact that the variation display (small hit variation) of the second special symbol that is being executed is completed, and the second small symbol display areas 5l2, 5c2, 5r2 (1, 3, 3). 5) Stop fixedly. That is, the combination of the second small symbol is fixedly stopped in response to the display result of the variable display of the second special symbol being "small hit", and the small hit game state is controlled (FIG. 10). Timing of T1 shown in -23). Here, since the gaming state is controlled to the low-probability/non-KT state (normal state) corresponding to the first special symbol which is the main symbol, based on the variable display of the second special symbol as described later. Even if it is controlled to the small hitting game state, it is continuously executed without ending the first demo display.

Next, in the period when the small hitting game state is controlled based on the variable display of the second special symbol, a start winning is newly generated in the winning ball device 6A when the first demo display is continuously executed. Then, it is assumed that the number of first reserved memories becomes 1 (timing of T2 shown in FIG. 10-23). At this time, the CPU 103 transmits to the effect control CPU 120 a command indicating that the first number of pending storages has increased. The effect control CPU 120 causes the first reserved storage number special display area 06TM015 to display “1” based on the reception of the command indicating that the first reserved storage number has increased.

At this time, the CPU 103, when the start winning to the winning ball apparatus 6A occurs, in the first special symbol process process, executes the first start winning determination process, and executes the first special symbol normal process of step S110A (Figure 5). Here, as shown in FIG. 10-3 described above, when the small hit game state is controlled based on the variable display result of the second special symbol, the value of the second special symbol process flag is the second small symbol. Since the value corresponds to any one of the pre-hit opening process (9), the second small hit mid-during process (10), and the second small hit end process (11) (YES in step S06TM1000A), The value of the 1 special symbol process flag is not updated from the value (0) indicating the first special symbol normal process to the value (1) indicating the first variation pattern setting process. That is, the variable display of the first special symbol is not started even if the starting winning to the first starting winning opening (winning ball device 6A) occurs. After that, the value of the second special symbol process flag is any of the second small hit opening pretreatment (9), the second small hit opening processing (10), and the second small hit end processing (11). When the value corresponding to also disappears (NO in step S06TM1000A), the value of the first special symbol process flag, the value indicating the first variation pattern setting process from the value (0) indicating the first special symbol normal process (1) ) Is updated, and the variable display of the first special symbol is started.

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-21, the effect control CPU 120 determines NO in step 026IWS4714 based on that the variable display of the first special symbol is not started, and when the first reserved storage number is 0, The first demonstration display is ended (step 026IWS4716 is executed) by determining NO in step 06TM1400 based on the fact that there is not (a command indicating that the number of first pending storage has increased) is received. .. That is, in the period in which the small hit game state is controlled on the basis of the variable display result of the second special symbol, when the start winning to the winning ball device 6A occurs, the first demo display is ended.

That is, in the present embodiment, when the first demonstration display is executed (when the main symbol is the first special symbol), it is controlled to the small hitting game state based on the variable display of the second special symbol. When (when the value of the second special symbol process flag is in the range of 9 to 11), the start condition of the first special symbol is irrespective of whether or not the start condition of the variable display of the first special symbol is satisfied. The first demonstration display is ended in response to the establishment (winning of the first start winning opening has occurred). Even if the variable display of the first special symbol is not started because it is controlled to the small hitting game state, the execution of the first demo display is continued according to the winning at the first starting winning opening. If so, the player will be caused to mistakenly recognize that the winning in the first starting winning opening is invalid. Therefore, in such a state, the first demonstration display is ended when a winning in the first starting winning opening occurs, so as to suppress misidentification of the player. In this way, it is possible to realize appropriate effect control corresponding to the situation of the variable display of the first special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 10-24(2), the CPU 120 for effect control displays the first demo display based on the fact that the first number of reserved memories becomes 1 (NO in step S06TM1400 shown in FIG. 10-21). It is ended (step 026IWS4716). As a result, the operation prompting display 06TM050 and the characters “menu” are hidden at the lower right part of the screen of the image display device 5. On the other hand, the clear image, which is the background image corresponding to the current game state ((i) low probability/non-KT state (normal state)), is continuously displayed. In this way, as the first number of reserved memories is no longer 0, the operation prompt display 06TM050 and the “menu” having a higher display priority than the background image (appearing to be displayed in front of the background image) Is hidden, but the background image itself, which has a lower display priority than the first demo display (appears to be displayed behind the operation promotion display 06TM050 and the word “menu”), continues. Will be displayed. As a result, the player is in a gaming state before the first demo display ends (when the first demo display was displayed) and after the first demo display ends (after the first demo display is hidden). It is possible to easily grasp that it has not changed.

In addition, during the period of being controlled to the small hitting game state based on the variation display result of the second special symbol, the variation start condition of the first special symbol cannot be satisfied, but a new start winning award to the winning ball device 6A. When occurs, the CPU 103 executes the first start winning a prize determination process of step S101A. In the first starting prize determination process, a process of storing the holding information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 and updating the first holding storage number is executed, and a random number value for determining the display result (including the big hit type) and the variation pattern. Is stored in the first hold storage buffer provided in the RAM 102 as hold information. After storing the hold information and the first hold storage number, the transmission for transmitting the effect control command for designating the determination result such as the occurrence of the start winning, the first hold storage number, and the look-ahead determination on the effect control board 12. Settings are made. The effect control command at the time of the start winning set to be transmitted in this way is, for example, effect control from the main board 11 by executing the command control processing of step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the first special symbol process processing is completed. It is transmitted to the substrate 12.

The effect control CPU 120, which has received the command indicating that the first number of reserved memories has increased, updates the value of the first reserved memory number special display area 06TM015 of the image display device 5 from “0” to “1”. In this way, when the variation start condition of the first special symbol cannot be satisfied, even if the start winning to the winning ball device 6A occurs, the variable display of the first special symbol is not executed, but the first hold By updating the value of the memory number special display area 06TM015, the player can recognize that at least the first start winning port has been won and the first reserved memory number has increased.

Here, as shown in FIG. 10-24(2), even though the first number of pending storages has changed from "0" to "1", an object (round image is displayed in the first pending display area 06TM011). ) Is not displayed. That is, of the display areas capable of displaying the first number of reserved memories, the first number of reserved memories (the number of objects corresponding to the first number of reserved memories) is not displayed in the highly visible first reserved display area 06TM011. The first reserved storage number is displayed only in the first reserved storage number special display area 06TM015 with low visibility.

If, in this state, an object is displayed in the first hold display area 06TM011 in response to the occurrence of a winning in the first start winning hole, the player immediately displays a variable display of the decorative symbol based on the first hold memory ( It is expected that the variable display corresponding to the first special symbol which is the main symbol) will be executed, but in the state where the small hit game state is controlled based on the variable display result of the second special symbol, the first hold display Although the object is displayed in the area 06TM011, the variable display of the decorative pattern is not started (the object is not shifted to the active display area 06TM031 and does not become the active display 06TM030), which confuses the player. Therefore, the first reserved storage number 06TM0115 with low visibility is not displayed in the first reserved display area 06TM011 with high visibility, and the first reserved storage number special display area 06TM015 with low visibility is displayed. By displaying the first reserved storage number only on, the updated first reserved storage number is appropriately notified without confusing the player.

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-24 (3), when the small hitting game state is finished and the gaming state is controlled to the low certainty/non-KT state, the variation start condition of the first special symbol is satisfied. Based, that is, the value of the second special symbol process flag is either the second small hit opening pre-processing (9), the second small hit opening during processing (10), and the second small hit end processing (11). When the value corresponding to the process of (1) is no longer present (NO in step S06TM1000A), the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol (timing of T3 shown in FIG. 10-23).

The effect control CPU 120 causes the variable display of decorative symbols (information corresponding to the first special symbol which is the main symbol) to start changing in the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5. In the first small symbol display area 5l1, the first small symbol display area 5c1, and the first small symbol display area 5r1 of the image display device 5, the variable display of the first small symbol (information corresponding to the first special symbol) is displayed. Let it start. Further, the effect control CPU 120 causes the first reserved storage number to be 0, and causes the first reserved storage number special display area 06TM015 to display “0” and the active display area 06TM031 to display the active display 06TM030. ..

In the present embodiment, when the second demonstration display is being executed, the second demonstration display is not ended even when the small hitting game state is controlled based on the variation display result of the first special symbol. It is supposed to continue. Then, when the second demo display is executed, when the start winning a prize to the second starting winning opening occurs within the period of being controlled to the small hitting game state based on the variable display result of the first special symbol, The variable display of the second special symbol is not started, and the second reserved storage number displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 06TM025 is updated from 0 to 1. At this time as well, the second demo display ends, and the object (circular image) is not displayed in the second hold display area 06TM021.

Specifically, when the second demo display is executed (the gaming state is (ii) low-accuracy/first KT state, (iii) high-accuracy/first KT state, and (iv) high-accuracy/second KT state. , If any of the game state is controlled), when the small hit game state based on the variable display result of the first special symbol is controlled, the value of the first special symbol process flag is "9" ~ " Since it is determined to be YES in step S06TM1000B shown in FIG. 10-4 based on the range of 11", the value of the second special symbol process flag does not become a value corresponding to the second variation pattern setting process, The variable display of the second special symbol is not started. And, in this state (the second demo display is being executed and is being controlled to the small hitting game state based on the variable display result of the first special symbol), if the winning to the second starting winning opening occurs, the figure It is determined to be NO in step 026IWS4814 of 10-22, further is determined to be NO in step S06TM1500, step 026IWS4816 is executed, and the second demonstration display is ended.

At this time, based on the fact that the second reserved storage number has become 1 (NO in step S06TM1500 shown in FIG. 10-22), effect control CPU 120 ends the second demonstration display (step 026IWS4816). As a result, the operation prompting display 06TM050 and the characters “menu” are hidden at the lower right part of the screen of the image display device 5. On the other hand, a background image (cloudy) corresponding to the current game state (any one of (ii) low accuracy/first KT state, (iii) high accuracy/first KT state, and (iv) high accuracy/second KT state) The image, the rain image, or the typhoon image) will be continuously displayed.

In this way, as the second number of reserved storages becomes 1, the operation prompt display 06TM050 and the “menu” having a higher display priority than the background image (appearing to be displayed in front of the background image) Is hidden, but the background image itself, which has a lower display priority than the second demo display (appears to be displayed behind the operation promotion display 06TM050 and the word “menu”), continues. Will be displayed. As a result, the player starts before (when the second demo display was displayed) and (after the second demo display was displayed) the variable display of the decorative symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol which is the main symbol). 2 After the demo display is hidden), it is possible to easily understand that the game state has not changed.

Here, the effect control CPU 120, which has received the command indicating that the second number of reserved memories has increased, updates the value of the second reserved memory number special display area 06TM025 of the image display device 5 from “0” to “1”. To do. However, even though the number of second reserved memories is changed from "0" to "1", the object (circular image) is not displayed in the second reserved display area 06TM021. That is, of the display areas capable of displaying the second reserved storage number, the second reserved storage area 06TM021 having high visibility does not display the second reserved storage number (the number of objects corresponding to the second reserved storage number). The second reserved storage number is displayed only in the second reserved storage number special display area 06TM025 having low visibility.

After that, the small hitting game state based on the variable display result of the first special symbol ends, and the gaming state is (ii) low accuracy/first KT state, (iii) high accuracy/first KT state, and (iv) high accuracy/ Second KT state, when controlled to any gaming state, based on the fact that the variation start condition of the second special symbol is satisfied, that is, the value of the first special symbol process flag, before the first small hit opening When the value corresponding to any one of the processing (9), the first small hit opening processing (10), and the first small hit end processing (11) is no longer present (NO in step S06TM1000B), the CPU 103 determines that The variable display of the second special symbol is started.

The production control CPU 120 causes the variable display of decorative symbols (information corresponding to the second special symbol, which is the main symbol) to start variable display in the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5. In the second small symbol display area 512, the second small symbol display area 5c2, and the second small symbol display area 5r2 of the image display device 5, the variable display of the second small symbol (information corresponding to the second special symbol) is displayed. Let it start. Moreover, the CPU 120 for effect control displays “0” in the second reserved storage number special display area 06TM025 and displays the active display 06TM030 in the active display area 06TM031 as the second reserved storage number becomes 0. ..

(1) In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 5, first gate passage waiting process in the first special symbol process process (first special symbol process flag: 4), first jackpot opening pretreatment (first) Special symbol process flag: 5), first big hit open processing (first special symbol process flag: 6), first big hit open after-treatment (first special symbol process flag: 7), first big hit end processing (first) Special symbol process flag: 8), first small hit open pretreatment (first special symbol process flag: 9), first small hit open processing (first special symbol process flag: 10), and first small hit end Processing (1st special symbol process flag: 11), 2nd gate passing waiting processing in 2nd special symbol process processing (2nd special symbol process flag: 4), 2nd big hit opening pretreatment (2nd special symbol process flag) : 5), second big hit opening process (second special symbol process flag: 6), second big hit opening post-processing (second special symbol process flag: 7), second big hit end process (second special symbol process flag) : 8), second small hit opening pretreatment (second special symbol process flag: 9), second small hit opening processing (second special symbol process flag: 10), and second small hit end processing (second) Special symbol process flag: 11), and an example in which the individual is provided has been described.

That is, the processing (first special symbol process flag: 4 to 11) when controlled to the big hit game state or the small hit game state based on the variable display result of the first special symbol, and the variable display result of the second special symbol. The process (the second special symbol process flag: 4 to 11) in the case of being controlled to the big hit game state or the small hit game state on the basis of the above, the example provided individually has been described. Not limited to such a form, processing (first special symbol process flag: 4 to 11) when controlled to a big hit game state or a small hit game state based on the variable display result of the first special symbol, and the second Based on the variable display result of the special symbol, the process (the second special symbol process flag: 4 to 11) when controlled to the big hit game state or the small hit game state is made common (that is, the CPU 103 executes a common program). Yes).

Specifically, when the first special symbol process flag is 4 and the second special symbol process flag is 4, a common gate passage waiting process is executed, and when the first special symbol process flag is 5 and The common big hit opening pretreatment is executed when the 2 special symbol process flag is 5, and the common big hit opening process is common when the first special symbol process flag is 6 and when the second special symbol process flag is 6. Is executed, when the first special symbol process flag is 7 and the second special symbol process flag is 7, the common jackpot opening post-processing is executed, and the first special symbol process flag is 8 and the second. When the special symbol process flag is 8, the common big hit ending process is executed, and when the first special symbol process flag is 9 and the second special symbol process flag is 9, the common small hit opening pretreatment is When the first special symbol process flag is 10 and the second special symbol process flag is 10, the common small hit opening process is executed, and the first special symbol process flag is 11 and the second. A common small hit ending process may be executed when the special symbol process flag is 11. In this way, for the processing related to the big hit game state or the small hit game state, whether it is processing based on the variable display result of the first special symbol or processing based on the variable display result of the second special symbol Instead, the programs may be shared.

(2) In the above-described embodiment, the state of waiting for passage through the gate after the big hit symbol is definitely stopped (a state before the big hit starts, when the first special symbol process flag is "4" or the second special symbol process flag is In the case of "4"), the demo display corresponding to the gaming state may be executed. That is, if the game ball does not pass through the passage gate 41 even if a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after the jackpot symbol is definitely stopped (when the game ball is not detected by the gate switch 21), the game is played. When the state is (i) low-accuracy/non-KT state, the first demo display is executed, and the game state is (ii) low-accuracy/first KT state, (iii) high-accuracy/first KT state, and (iv) high. The second demo display may be executed when either the positive/second KT state is established.

As described above, in the waiting state for passing through the gate, even if the winning in the first starting winning opening occurs, the variable display of the first special symbol based on the starting winning does not start, and the winning in the second starting winning opening is won. Even if it occurs, the variable display of the second special symbol based on the starting winning is not started. When the demonstration display is being executed in the gate passage waiting state, the effect control CPU 120 responds to the fact that the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening has been won, and thus the running demonstration display (first While terminating the 1 demo display or the 2nd demo display), a notification prompting the player to launch the game ball so as to pass through the passage gate 41 (for example, "pass the gate to start a big hit" or "right hit") It is also possible to execute a notification for displaying characters on the image display device 5. That is, regardless of the game state (whether the first demo display is being executed or the second demo display is being executed), it is executed in response to the game ball winning the first starting winning opening. It is also possible to end the demo display that is being performed, and to end the demo display that is being executed in response to the game ball winning the second starting winning opening. As described above, even in the gate passage waiting state, it is possible to realize appropriate control relating to the demonstration display according to the satisfaction condition of the starting condition.

It should be noted that, when a start winning is generated during the demo display in the gate passage waiting state, the running demo display may be continued. For example, when a start winning (winning to the first starting winning opening or winning to the second starting winning opening) occurs during the demo display in the gate passage waiting state, the game ball is not ended while the running demo display is finished. You may make it continue until it passes the passage gate 41 (until the big hit start effect is started). Further, when a start winning is generated during the demonstration display in the gate passage waiting state, the demonstration display in execution may be continued according to the game state at that time. For example, if the game state is (i) In the case of the low probability/non-KT state (during the first demo display), the first demo display is ended when the winning at the first starting winning opening occurs, but the winning at the second starting winning opening occurs. Even if the first demo display is not ended, the game state is either (ii) low-accuracy/first KT state, (iii) high-accuracy/first KT state, or (iv) high-accuracy/second KT state. In the case (during the second demo display), the second demo display is ended when the winning in the second starting winning opening occurs, but the second demo display is displayed even if the winning in the first starting winning opening occurs. It may not be terminated.

(3-1) Also, in the small hit game state when the small hit game state is controlled during execution of the demo display (first demo display, second demo display), the starting condition for the variable display of the normal symbol is When it is established (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41), the demonstration display in execution may be continued without being terminated.

(3-2) Also, in the small hit game state when the small hit game state is controlled during execution of the demo display (first demo display, second demo display), the starting condition for the variable display of the normal symbol is In response to the establishment (the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41), the demonstration display in execution may be ended. In this case, when the starting condition for the variable display of the normal symbol is satisfied (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41), the game state is (i) low accuracy/non-KT state (that is, left-handed operation should be performed. State), and when it is detected that the game ball has passed the passage gate 41 even after the end of the small hitting game state (that is, it continues in spite of the game state where the left-handed operation should be performed). When the right-handed operation is performed), left-handed notification may be performed.

1 ... Pachinko game machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Game machine frame 4A, 4B ... Special pattern display device 5 ... Image display device 6A ... Winning ball device 6B ... Variable winning ball device 7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker 9... Frame LED
10 General prize hole 11 Main board 12 Production control board 13 Voice control board 14 LED control board 15 Relay board 17 Special variable winning ball device 20 Normal pattern display 21 Gate switch 22A, 22B Start Mouth switch 23... 1st count switch 24... 2nd count switch 30... Hitting ball operation handle 31A... Stick controller 31B... Push button 32... Movable body 41... Passage gate 100... Game control microcomputers 101, 121... ROM
102, 122... RAM
103... CPU
104, 124... Random number circuit 105, 125... I/O
120... CPU for production control
123... Display control unit

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player,
Specific identification information variable display means capable of concurrently performing the variable display of the first specific identification information and the variable display of the second specific identification information;
Decoration identification information variable display means capable of executing variable display of decoration identification information corresponding to either one of variable display of the first specific identification information and variable display of the second specific identification information according to the gaming state.
Of the variable display of the first specific identification information and the variable display of the second specific identification information, the decoration identification is performed when the advantageous state is controlled based on the variable display of the specific identification information corresponding to the variable display of the decoration identification information. And a notification effect execution means capable of executing a notification effect for notifying a variable display result of information,
Of the variable display of the first specific identification information and the variable display of the second specific identification information, when the advantageous state is controlled based on the variable display of the specific identification information that does not correspond to the variable display of the decoration identification information, the notification effect A gaming machine characterized by not executing.

Images